Graphic
Issue Date: January 2023
Revision Date: February 2024
NOTE: Carefully read, understand and follow the instructions provided in this manual, and keep it in a safe place for future reference. If you have any doubt whatsoever regarding the use or care of your vehicle, please visit your Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance or advice.
This Owner's Manual should be considered as an integral part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle.
Thank you for choosing Mahindra vehicle.
We are privileged to welcome you to the Mahindra family.
Your vehicle represents Robust Quality, Ruggedness, Safety, Precision Workmanship and Distinctive Styling , which are our traditional values.
This documents contains important information on vehicle operation, that will help you make full use of the technical features available. To exercise better control on road, we suggest you to please take time to read, understand and familiarise with vehicle and its features. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, note that your Mahindra Authorised Dealer knows your vehicle best, has company trained Technical Experts, Mahindra Genuine Parts and very much cares about your satisfaction.
We extend our best wishes for safe and pleasurable motoring
Graphic

MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD.

Important Information – Quick Reference
We strongly urge that you read the information provided in pages referred hereunder which will help in road safety and prevent inconvenience
1
Warranty Coverage.............................................................................................
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 15)
2
Roadside Assistance ....................................................................................
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 10)
3
Schedule Service (Free/Paid).................................................................
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 23)
4
Maintenance Schedule Chart.................................................................................
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 24)
5
Lubricants And Capacities.............................................................................
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 28)
6
Location Of Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).................................................
Refer (P.g. 1-7)
7
Location Of Fuse Box And Fuse Details............................................................
Refer (P.g. 10-10)
8
Changing A Flat Tyre................................................................
Refer (P.g. 10-17)
9
Understanding The Warning Lamps..........................................................
Refer (P.g. 3-35)
10
Use Of Seat Belts And Child Restraint......................................
Refer (P.g. 2-12)
11
Understanding The Airbag Function.........................................................
Refer (P.g. 2-27)
12
If Your Vehicle Is Submerged.....................................................
Refer (P.g. 6-8)
13
Driving Through Water..................................................................................
Refer (P.g. 6-8)
14
Opening And Closing the Bonnet.........................................
Refer (P.g. 5-23)
15
Location Of Battery And Its Maintenance.....................................
Refer (P.g. 11-8 & 11-16)
*Warranty and Service Information Guide
Note: In view of our policy of continuously improving our products, we reserve the right to alter specifications, designs or features without prior notice and without liability. We recommend you to refer the Variant Matrix in the Brand official website or contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for the list of features applicable to your vehicle.
The vehicle's software and security measures are subject to ongoing development. Similar to computers and mobile device operating systems, the software and security features of the car might also receive irregular updates.
1 GENERAL AND SAFETY PRECAUTION
1.1 Servicing and Summary Data
We suggest that you record the vehicle servicing data in the Warranty and Service Information Guide for future references
We recommend you always use Mahindra Genuine Parts when performing repairs on the vehicle.
For all issues concerning the vehicle and for any need of Genuine spare parts, contact the Mahindra Authorised Dealer
1.2 Safety Symbols
Carefully read, understand and follow the safety symbols/ instructions given in this manual.
Legend of the Symbols
To emphasis the information and procedures regarding safety, use, maintenance, etc., the following symbols are used throughout the manual:
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or property damage.
NOTICE indicates important information relevant to the vehicle, the vehicle's use or to sections of this manual to which particular attention must be paid for optimum use of the vehicle.
If you see this symbol, it indicates “no,” “ do not,” “do not do this,” or “never”.
Graphic
1.3 General Safety Information and Instructions
1. First-aid kit is placed in the glove box of the vehicle. Ensure it is not taken out of the vehicle at any point of time.
2. Please note that throughout this manual, reference is made that “an accident” could occur. An accident could cause you or a bystander to sustain personal injury, or result in property damage.
3. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays or wear in the seat belt webbing, or loose buckles, retractors, anchors or other loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
4. The lifespan of Mahindra products depends on many factors. Improper use, abuse or harsh use in general may compromise the integrity of the vehicle and significantly reduce its lifespan. The vehicle is also subject to wear over a period of time. Please have your vehicle regularly inspected by a Mahindra Authorised Dealer or a qualified Technician . If the inspection reveals any damage or excessive wear, immediately replace, or have the component serviced.
5. The vehicle identification plates are the only legal identification reference; hence it is necessary to keep them in good condition. Never modify data on the plates or remove them. It is illegal to remove or alter the numbers in the VIN plate.
6. Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When the vehicle is fully loaded, drive at a slow speed, especially when turning. Note that the center of gravity of the vehicle changes when the vehicle is fully loaded, and also if luggage is mounted on the roof carrier.
1.4 To Users of a Mahindra Vehicle
When first driving the vehicle after long periods of non-usage, you may experience a temporary drive disturbance. This is a characteristic of the tyres and should be no reason for concern. The condition should correct itself within 5-15 kilometers. of driving. If the disturbance persists, have the vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Driving and Drugs/Medication
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired through the use of prescription or non-prescription drugs or medication (even cough syrup). If you are taking any sort of drug or medication, be sure that it will not affect your driving ability.
Mobile Phones Warning
Use of electronic devices such as mobile phones, handheld devices, computers, portable radios or other by the driver while driving is dangerous. In exceptional condition, if use of a mobile phone is necessary despite this warning, use a handsfree system to ensure that the hands are free to drive the vehicle. Even handsfree do not ensure distraction free drive. Please comply with the legal regulations in your country, concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles .
Driving Long Distances
When driving long distances, follow these tips to have a safe journey:
•  Take breaks at regular intervals
•  Lack of sleep or fatigue will impact your ability to drive safely
•  Exercise your eyes by shifting the focus of your eyes to different parts of the road
•  Use stimulating beverages such as coffee or tea
•  Relax and stay calm
Running-in
Driving smoothly during first 1,000 kilometers. will help to prevent abnormal and premature system wear. Proper running-in will improve the life of drivetrain and vehicle components.
A new engine may consume more oil during the first 1,000 kilometers. of running. This should be considered as a normal part of break-in and not interpreted as any problem with the engine.
Mahindra Genuine Parts
Mahindra uses high quality parts for building the vehicles. In the event that any parts need replacement, we recommend that you use only Mahindra genuine parts.
Non-Mahindra parts may harm vehicle performance and will not be covered by your Mahindra warranty.
The warranty does not cover problems caused by using non genuine parts
Mahindra Genuine Accessories
A wide selection of quality accessories are available through your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. These accessories have been specifically engineered to allow you to personalize your vehicle to suit your requirements and complement its style and aerodynamic appearance.
Each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets Mahindra's rigid engineering and safety specifications. Every Mahindra accessory installed according to the Mahindra installation provisions comes with the respective accessory warranty.
Consult your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for detailed information about accessories available for your specific model variant.
For maximum vehicle performance and safety considerations, always keep the following information in mind:
•  The company shall not be liable / responsible for any damages / injuries, including consequential damages / injuries, resulting due to fitment of unauthorised aftermarket accessories and / or tapping / cutting wires in the wiring harness When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front and rear axle. Consult Mahindra Authorised Dealer for specific weight information
•  Bull bars and nudge guards are not recommended
•  Accessories causing any change in vehicle specifications like wheel rims, bull bars, etc., may affect the performance of safety systems
•  Mobile communication systems such as two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters and installed in your vehicle should comply with the local regulations and should be installed only by your Mahindra Authorised Dealer and can potentially affect the vehicle performance.
Vehicle Safety
When leaving your vehicle unoccupied:
•  Always remove the ignition key when you park the vehicle
•  In case of PKE, please lock and take the key fob with you
•  Close all the windows completely and lock all the doors
•  Do not leave any valuables in your vehicle. If you must leave something in your vehicle, hide them and securely lock all the doors
When Sleeping in Your Vehicle
1. Do not sleep in a parked car with closed windows. In particular, if you stay or sleep in the car with the engine running and the air conditioner or heater turned on, you can suffocate to death
2. Sleeping in a closed space with the engine running puts you at high risk of suffocation from the exhausts
3. While sleeping, you may accidentally touch the gear shift lever or accelerator and thereby cause an accident
4. While sleeping in the car with the engine running, you may accidentally step on the accelerator, thereby overheating the engine and exhaust pipe and causing a fire
Hazardous Materials: Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the console box or other spaces. In hot weather, they can explode and cause a fire.
Fire Extinguisher: For safety, we strongly recommend that you have fire extinguisher in your vehicle. Keep it ready for use at any time. Be familiar with how to use it
When Passing the Intersection or Railway Crossing
When passing the intersection or railway crossing, stop the vehicle to check the safety and drive through as fast as you can while using low speed gear and without shifting the gear. If the engine is turned off in the middle of the intersection or railway crossing, get someone to help you and move the car to a safe place quickly.
Do not Switch off the Engine While Driving
Do not switch off the engine while driving. Otherwise, it makes the steering wheel heavier, influence the brake performance and consequently dangerous
System Safety Mode : The protective measures including illumination of engine warning lamp and reduced engine power are taken (engine turned off in extreme case) when there is a critical fault in the system or a malfunction in the major electrical or fuel system. This indicates the system entering the safety mode to protect the vehicle’s drive system.
•  If the safety mode is activated, pull over and stop the vehicle to a safe location immediately and contact your Mahindra dealer. Then drive slowly or have the vehicle towed to a Mahindra Authorised Dealer according to the dealer’s instruction and have your vehicle checked by a Technician
•  If you continue to drive in this state, normal driving is not maintained due to the fixed engine rpm and engine can stop. But even more importantly, continued driving with this state may damage the drive system
Do Not Modify This Vehicle: If unauthorised modifications are made on the vehicle, the company is not liable for repairing the modified parts even during the term of warranty. Other part problems caused by modification are also not covered.
•  The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number of precision parts that have passed through countless experiments and tests.
•  These parts are deeply and systematically interwoven. Therefore, if any part is modified or altered without authorization, may under perform or cause critical damage to the vehicle and human life
Protecting Our Environment: As a responsible citizens, all of us have an important role to play in protecting our environment. Judicious vehicle usage and ensuring hazardous waste disposal (including cleaning and lubrication fluids) are important steps towards this initiative.
Body Repairs: If your vehicle is in a collision, contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer to ensure that it is repaired with Mahindra Genuine Parts. Mahindra has collision repair centers that meet strict requirements for training, equipment, quality, and customer satisfaction. Some repair shops and insurance companies might suggest using non-original equipment to save money. However, these parts do not meet Mahindra’s high standards for quality, fit and corrosion resistance. In addition, non-genuine parts or equipment might lead to damages or failures of the vehicle’s systems.
End of Line Disposal
Composition: Vehicle is made from steel, Aluminum, Lead, Copper, Wood, other plastics & miscellaneous parts. These materials are reusable by recycling them through a proper procedure. Some are hazardous to environment and living beings to be disposed as per local pollution board regulations.
Disposal: As batteries are made of lead, lithium & Iron phosphate with solvents as electrolyte which are harmful. They can impact on environment and are to be disposed as per local pollution board regulations. Certain components of this vehicle such as seat belt pre-tensioner, airbag and battery may contain hazardous material. Special handling may be required for service or vehicle end-of-life disposal.
Similarly ABS & other plastic panels, materials used are to be disposed to accredited agencies for recycling.
Most of other materials are reusable, hence components are to be segregated as per their composition as hazardous and non-hazardous, disposed to accredited recycling agencies. Hence it is advised to contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further information
1.5 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
VIN Plate
VIN Punch
Graphic
Graphic
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is the legal identity of your vehicle. The vehicle identification number is stamped on the VIN Table riveted on to the bottom of the B-Pillar on the driver side. It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN
The vehicle identification number is also Punched on the floor under the driver seat of vehicle. Flip the cutout provided in the carpet to view the VIN Punch.
Never modify data on the plates or remove them. It is illegal to remove or alter the numbers in the VIN plate.
1.6 Engine Number
Petrol
Diesel
Graphic
Graphic
The engine number is punched on the LHS face of the crankcase adjacent to the water pump.
1.7 Front Overview
Graphic
1.8 Rear Overview
Graphic
1.9 Instrument Panel/Door Trim Overview
Graphic
1.10 Roof Overview
Graphic
1.11 Alexa Reference Guide
Graphic
1.12 ADRENOX Connect
Graphic
The Adrenox connect mobile app provides information in your mobile phone about location & status of the vehicle and allows to control certain vehicle features in a secured way for both Android and iOS platform. Kindly use the ADRENOX connect mobile app for connected car related features.
1.12.1 KYC ( Know Your Customer) Registration
To activate connected car features including access to Adrenox mobile App, KYC process must be completed successfully.
•  Customer must produce valid mobile number, communication address & email ID for KYC registration. for registration purpose.
•  Preferred mobile number entered during the KYC process will be the login for Adrenox mobile app.
•  After successful KYC registration, customer must download the “ADRENOX connect” mobile application from Google Play store or iOS app store.
Subscription for the connected car is free for a specified period, depending on the model variant. Post expiry of the free subscription, the same can be renewed by the user for an extended period.
1.12.2 Login & Registration
Follow the below steps for Login and Registration:
Graphic
•  You can select sign up option from login page which redirects to sign up page
•  Then enter registered Mobile number given in KYC form for connected services and click on Generate OTP
•  OTP with a validity will be sent to the same mobile number
•  If OTP is not received, you can request the OTP again by clicking on "Resend OTP"
•  After entering valid OTP, click on “Verify My account”
•  On successful verification you will be notified with a message " Account Verified"
•  You will be directed to "Terms and Condition" with "I Agree" option on successful authentication
1.12.3 Forgot/Change Password and Change Pin
This Feature allows the existing user to change Password and change PIN.
In case user forgets the Password and PIN below flow helps to create PIN and password.
Forgot your password
In case you forget your password:
•  Tap on the Forgot Password? link from login page
•  In forgot password page, enter the registered mobile number for connected services and click on Generate OTP
•  Enter the OTP and click on Next button
•  Enter New Password and Confirm Password and tap on Save button
Change your password
To Change your password on app if you are already logged in:
•  Tap on the top Left corner from home screen
•  Click on My Account and select Change Password
•  Page will open with Old password, New password and Confirm password fields
•  Fill all the required field and tap on save button
1.12.4 ADRENOX connect Features
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
Alerts
Over Speed Alert
When your car exceeds the set speed limit. This speed limit value can be set under alert configuration in mobile application
High Engine Temperature Alert
Alerts when Engine temperature beyond the predefined limit
Tyre Pressure Alert
Alerts on excessive/very low and high tyre pressure and navigate to nearby petrol station
Lamp Status Alert
Alerts when vehicle park lamp left in ON condition while locking the vehicle
Notifies when the vehicle park lamp is left in ON condition and helps to turn OFF remotely via mobile application
Vehicle Start/Stop Alert
Notifies when normal vehicle start /stop event is detected
Door Open Alert
Notifies when any of the doors open while vehicle is moving and also when you trigger for door lock and the door remains open unintentionally
Geo-Fence Alert
Alerts when your vehicle moves out of a set boundary area
Helps you to create virtual boundary for any region and will be notified whenever your vehicle moves in or out of that boundary
Unauthorised vehicle entry Alert
Alerts the user when any unauthorized entry in the vehicle is detected
Low Fuel Alert
Identifies low fuel level and notifies in your mobile application. Helps you to nearby fuel station
Route Deviation Alert​
Alerts the user when the vehicle deviates from the pre-defined path
Time Fencing Alert 
Notifies you when any movement of vehicle is detected during set time period
Seat Belt Alert
Notifies you whenever the driver/ co-driver is not wearing the seat belt during vehicle movement in mobile application
Driver Drowsiness Alert​
Alerts the user when the driver is detected to be drowsy while driving
Insurance expiry​ Alert
Suggests in advance to renew the Insurance as expiry date of Insurance approaches
Notifies you in advance when the insurance is about to expire
PUC expiry​ Alert
Notifies you in advance when the PUC is about to expire
Engine Idle Alert​
Alerts when engine idling is detected for a set period of time. Time can be configured in mobile application
Service reminder
This feature alert’s the user for service due
PKE / RKE low battery alert
This feature alert’s the user when key battery is low
Low DEF alert
This feature alert’s the user when DEF level is low
DPF choke alert
This feature alert’s the user when Diesel Particulate filter is about to choke
Brake pad wear alert
This feature alert’s the user when Front Brake Pad is worn out
Park brake not applied alert
This feature alert’s the user when he/she forgets to apply park brake after parking the vehicle
Location Based Service
Live tracking
GPS based vehicle tracking system for tracking vehicle’s location anywhere and at any point of time
Helps to provide the real time vehicle location when vehicle is in movement
Helps in sharing the vehicle location for a set time to your family and friends
Save Route / Save Place
Provision to save a route /place
Find my car
Helps to identify the vehicle’s location and directs you to locate your vehicle
Share my car location
Share your car's location with friends and family
Push to car 
Allows the user to push routes/location from the mobile app to the vehicle
Sync location on SUV 
Provides updates of any upcoming event by syncing with the calendar
Ecosense​
Provides the details about the driving behavior for each trip
Eco Sence Leader Board
Based on Eco score, The user’s driving pattern will be ranked for Country, state & district wise
Trip History
Provides detailed information about the trips
Weekly Report​
Provides details about various vehicle parameters for a defined time period
Trip Replay
Provides glimpse of the trip in a form of a short video
Pit Stops​
Provides information and navigational access to nearby restaurant, ATM, Mahindra Dealership and so on
Read Vehicle Status
Check door status
Allows the user to view the current status of the vehicle door
Check tyre pressure
Allows the user to view the current status of tyre pressure
Check lamp status
Allows the user to view the current status of the lamp
Check ODO
Allows the customer to check the odometer of the vehicle
My SUV info
Essential information about the vehicle like VIN, Variant and so on
Check AC Status
Allows the user to view the current status of the AC
Check Distance to empty
Helps to check distance to empty range i.e. the distance can be covered with the available fuel
Seat Belt Status
Helps the user to check the Driver/Co-Driver seat belt is buckled or not
Safety
E-Call​
In case of accident, Emergency call will be triggered from vehicle, SMS will be sent to With You Hamesha & Emergency contacts along with the current vehicle location.
SOS Button
In case of SOS is initiated, SOS call will be triggered from vehicle, SMS will be sent to With You Hamesha & Emergency contacts along with the current vehicle location
Road Side Assistance
Allows the user to reach out for help in case of vehicle breakdown
Remote Function
Remote Skyroof control
Allows the user to remotely control Skyroof using mobile app
Remote Start/ Stop
Allows the user to remotely start or stop the vehicle using mobile app
Remote Climate control
Allows the user to remotely configure the in- vehicle temperature during remote start using mobile app
Remote Window Up/Down​
Allows the user to remotely control the Driver window (with anti-pinch) using mobile app
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Provide access to the vehicle by remotely locking and unlocking the doors when vehicle is stationary
Remote Lamp On/Off​
Allows the user to remotely turn on or off the lamps using mobile app
Locate my SUV
Allows the user to remotely locate the vehicle by turning on the horn and lights
APK Features
Horoscope
Allows the user to view daily fortune as per his/her zodiac sign.
Just dial ​
Allows the user to search for various services using the Just Dial app in the infotainment
Zomato
Allows the user to search for various restaurants and cuisines using Zomato app in the infotainment
India Today
Allows the user to browse through news using India Today app in the infotainment
Weather Update
Allows the user to view weather information using the Accuweather app in the infotainment
Travel Explorer
Allows the user to search for amusement places and more using the Travel Advisor app in the infotainment
Others
ETA
Allows the user to know the Estimated Time of Arrival of your vehicle at your current mobile location.
In-Home Alexa
Allows the user to check the vehicle status and perform remote function using Alexa (voice commands)
Valet Mode
Allows the user to set the vehicle in a predefined state when giving the vehicle for valet parking. The default PIN to access the Valet mode will be 1234
Contact us
Any Query / Enquiry about the product, Get info on Mahindra. Send an Inquiry on any car model. Dealers will get back to the customer on details
Smart Home Control
Allows the user to control the smart appliances via vehicle location
Log Book - Fuel(Fuel Diary)​
Maintains a systematic log of the all the fuel filling events and provides a clear representation of the fuel filled and the amount spent
Greetings
Greetings to the user on special occasions
Do-Not Disturb ​
Avoids distraction while driving by not pushing any AdrenoX Connect app notification when mobile is detected in the vehicle
Journey Planner​
Allows the user to plan a journey by providing some basic information
Request app Access​
Allows the user to share the vehicle access to two more users
My Documents​
Storage and retrieval of documents such as Driving license, Insurance, PUC etc
Profile Manager
Allows the user to connect the mobile app profiles with the vehicle profile thereby providing sync between both
To-do list
Allows the user to create time based/location- based events that remind the user at the specified time
Smart Wearables
Allows the user to perform all the read and remote functions through the smart watch (applicable for both Android and iOS)
Pick up Reminder
Allows the user to create an event that reminds the user at the specified time
Service Booking
Allows the user to schedule a service by directing to the With You Hamesha app
Personalised Safety Alert
Alerts the user via a personalised beloved ones voice prompt when the vehicle crosses the speed limit
Toll Dairy
This Feature helps to check the toll amount for the selected route & toll amount can be recharged via Adrenox App as well. Feature also provides you alert whenever your toll balances goes low.
Personalised Greetings
Personalised welcome message, which will be configurable by the user & he/she will be welcomed with the audio uploaded by them (Ex: Kids voice, Fav music, Fav hero dialogues)
Feature Auto Suggestion
This Feature analysis user last 3 months feature usage pattern & suggest user on the non —utilised feature.
Mahindra – Lens
This feature is Visual search tool to know your XUV700 tell tail lights better
Ask Mahindra
This feature helps the customer to connect with Mahindra executive for any queries/support related to vehicle.
2 SEATS AND SAFETY
2.1 Seats
Sitting in Correct Position
Graphic
Follow the tips below for a comfortable and safe journey:
•  Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine pressed against the seat back
•  The driver and front passenger seat head restraint has 5 positions. Adjust it as close as possible to the above specified position, with the top of the head restraint even with the top of your head
•  Maintain sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. Maintain at least a Ten inch (10") distance from the centre of the steering wheel to your chest
•  The top curve of the steering wheel should align with your chin for ideal road visibility
•  Adjust your seat and seat back angle such that your wrists rest on the steering wheel
•  Ensure your legs are in bent position while fully depressing the clutch pedal
The seat should be adjusted while still maintaining control of the foot pedals (able to fully depress the clutch pedal), steering wheel (rest the wrists on the steering wheel) and your view of the instrument panel controls.
Never adjust the driver's seat while the vehicle is in motion. The seat movement may be more than expectation and cause the driver to unintentionally operate the accelerator or brake, or turn the steering wheel, causing loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stationary.
Never put objects under the seats. They may interfere with the seat-lock mechanism or unexpectedly activate the seat position adjusting lever, causing the seat to suddenly move, resulting in loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury.
While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts. This may lead to injuries.
2.1.1 Front Seat
Front Seat Slide
Graphic
Move the seat forward or backward by lifting the adjustment lever located under the seat front and release once the desired position is reached.
While adjusting the seat, make sure the latch engages fully and the seat is locked firmly in the desired position. An unlocked seat may move in a sudden stop or collision, causing injury to the person in that seat. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is locked.
Front Seat Recline
Graphic
To adjust the seat back, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back, and release the lever at the desired position.
To return the seat back, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.
If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or the shoulder strap may contact your neck.
The more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of serious injury.
When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright position, make sure you support the seat back while operating the lever.
Front Seat Height Adjustment
Graphic
The driver seat height can be raised or lowered with the help of height adjust handle.
To RAISE the seat height, operate the seat height adjust handle in the upward direction. Repeat this till the desired height is achieved.
To LOWER the seat height, push down the seat height adjust handle while seated in the driver seat. Repeat this operation until the desired seat height is reached
Do not adjust the height of seat while vehicle is in motion.
Driver Seat Lumbar Adjustment (if equipped)
Graphic
The driver seat back features lumbar adjustment. The lumbar contour of the lumbar support can be adjusted by means of the adjusting wheel on the outer side of the seat cushion.
Properly adjusted lumbar support provides adequate back support essential during long journeys.
Do not use force, rotate the lumbar adjustment knob beyond the extreme stop positions in either direction.
Driver and Co-Driver Ventilated Seats (if equipped)
Seat Ventilation is a special feature with an additional air circulation of the driver and Co-driver seats.
It ventilates the seat temperature for comfortable driving.
Graphic
The active ventilation fans blows air to the occupant contact area with seat inserts through small vent holes on the surface of the seat cushions and seat backs.
You can use the seat ventilation whenever you feel excessive heat or sweating in contact surfaces between occupant and seat.
•  The ventilated seat uses the interior air for ventilation. Make sure that it is used together with the air conditioner
•  The ventilated seat is not a cooling/heating seat which blows out cold air from it
•  Don’t put your hand in the bottom of the cushion when the ventilated seat is in operation. Otherwise, the running ventilation fan may cause you to be frightened or injured
•  If there is any problem with the seat ventilation system, Contact Mahindra Authorised service center for further assistance.
•  Do not place any sharp or heavy object on the passenger seat as this could damage the ventilation system by cracking the seat upholstery.
•  If any liquid spills, clean it up right away. Wait until the seat is dry before using the air ventilation feature. The performance of the seat ventilation system may be impacted by liquid contact.
•  Do not use the ventilated seat in the following situations:
–  The seat is not occupied.
–  There are objects on the seat, such as a child seat, newspapers, Plastic bags.
•  Never use a solvent to clean the seats, including petrol, paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or alcohol-based products.
•  The battery can be discharged if the seat ventilation system is used for a long time with the ignition mode ON and without engine running
•  In above condition, the ventilated seat will operate for a short period of time and will be turned off for better functionality of ventilation fan
•  If small vent holes on the surface of the seat cushions and seatbacks are clogged with dust and dirt, the air flow from the ventilated seat may weaken. In this case, clean the seat surface by the vacuum cleaner
Seat Ventilation Control:
The Seat Ventilation Setting accessible through Infotainment HVAC application or from footer selection of the infotainment Launcher Screen.
Once the application has been launched, the footer selection will result in NO ACTION.
•  Go to setting page in infotainment Screen then select climate control.
•  Enable the Driver and Co-driver seat ventilation feature based on the requirement.
Graphic
Once enable the seat ventilation, user will be able to modify the airflow with three different level. The default level will be OFF.
For every short press on the seat ventilation icon, the levels shall be changed by one step to another step like Level 3 →Level 2 → Level 1 → OFF →Level 1 → Level 2 →Level 3→ Level 2 →Level 3 → OFF
The long press on the Seat Ventilation Icon, to turn it OFF.
Again, a short press on the same icon will enable the feature with Last stored Level.
Power Seat with Memory (Driver Side only) (if equipped): The power seat switches are provided on the driver door panel.
Graphic
The Power seat provides advanced 6-way electrical adjustments for the driver seat.
   
It is equipped with electrically-operated power slider, power recliner and power height adjustment mechanisms. The shape of the switches guide you to the function it has been assigned. During vehicle running, Power seat movement is not allowed for short duration considering user safety. If you need further seat movement, release and press the switch once again.
Memory Functions
The driver seat is equipped with a memory function, which allows you to save and recall seat and rearview mirror settings for up to three different drivers. The memory function is operated by a button located on the driver’s side door.
Seat Adjustment
ORVM Adjustment
Graphic
Graphic
This system makes sure you have enough room to get in and out of the driver's seat by sliding the driver's seat back.
Driver Seat and ORVM Memory Setting (If equipped)
1. Turn Ignition ON
2. Adjust the Seat to your desired position
3. Adjust the ORVM to your desired position
4. Short Press the M button followed by desired memory button assigning (1, 2 or 3)
Graphic
5. Stored your preferred Seating and ORVM position to memory, and you will get acoustic confirmation (chime) from cluster
If ORVM adjustment is skipped and memory switches are pressed ORVM position at that instance of time will be saved. The ORVM can be positioned by the user and stored in the same switch.
•  The driver seat always move to its most rearward point of travel regardless of the current position
•  The final seat position will not be always the same when using easy access function. There will be some differences within the acceptable range depending on the occupant's weight and vehicle power supply status. This is completely normal and not a fault
•  Make sure that the parking brake is applied before adjusting the seat position or operating easy access function so that the vehicle cannot move
•  Do not operate seat memory switch or other switch while the easy access function is activated as it can cause malfunctioning of the easy access function
•  If the outside rearview mirror control switch is operated while setting up the driver seat and outside rearview mirror position, the memory setting will be cancelled.
•  If you do not press any memory switch within 5 seconds,. after pressing the driver seat position memory switch, the memory setting will be cancelled
Restoring Seat and ORVM Position
Graphic
In Ignition ON condition, user needs to press and hold any restore button (1, 2 or 3) shall take the Seat and ORVM to previously stored memory location and you will get acoustic confirmation (chime) from cluster.
In Ignition OFF condition, user needs to short pressing/press and hold any restore button (1, 2 or 3) shall take the Seat to previously stored memory location. During memory restore operation, pressing any seat switch shall stop ongoing seat movement.
During memory restore operation, pressing any Seat/ORVM switch shall stop ongoing Seat/ORVM movement.
The ORVM cannot be independently recalled while the seat is in its stored position.
The ORVM can be recalled only when the ignition is ON.
Easy Entry and Easy Exit
The Driver seat is equipped with easy entry and exit function. This helps user to enter and exit the vehicle by moving the seat backwards and downwards automatically in Ignition OFF and driver door open conditions. This can be enabled or disabled through the infotainment
In Easy Entry and Easy Exit function, when the door is closed, seat will go back to the same position as it was before opening the door.
Activation and deactivation:
Graphic
Go to Vehicle Setting in Infotainment system, Enter Access tab, Enable or disable Easy Entry and Easy exit feature by taping sliding bar.
•  Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stationary, otherwise there is a risk of accident. The seat should be adjusted so that the brake/ clutch pedal can be pressed fully.
•  Be cautious when adjusting the seat, you may suffer injuries without paying proper attention while adjusting seat.
•  Driver side electric seat can be adjusted in ignition off also, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle, as there is a risk of injury!
•  Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent battery discharge, we suggest that you adjust your seats when the engine is running
•  Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if the seat comes in contact with any other object and cannot be adjusted anymore.
•  If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be checked and fixed before driving
•  Easy Entry/Exit function once enabled, remains active until it is disabled. Be cautious during this operation as the rear seat passenger could get injured.
•  Do not put any luggage/water bottles below driver seat as they can obstruct power seat movement or damage seat mechanism/motor
•  Do not remove vehicle battery while seat is in motion
Ergo Lever (Only Co-Driver Seat) (If equipped)
Graphic
The Co-Driver Seat is equipped with an Ergo lever. This lever enables you to move the unoccupied Co-Driver seat forward, in order to increase the leg room behind the Co-Driver seat.
In order to do this, while seated on the Driver seat/2nd Row seat, operate the Ergo lever located on the backrest of the Codriver seat and push the seat forward manually.
Do not operate the Ergo lever when someone is occupying the Co-Driver seat. Doing so may cause injury to the Co-Driver since their leg can go and hit the instrument panel.
2.1.2 Second Row Seats
The second row seat has a 60:40 split configuration/Captain seat and a foldable armrest.
60:40 Seat
Captain Seat
Graphic
Graphic
Loading luggage on the seats is dangerous. The luggage can become a projectile that could hit and injure passengers in a sudden stop or collision. Luggage should always be kept on the floor.
To avoid serious injury, do not sit on or place objects on a folded seat back while the vehicle is moving.
Second Row Seat Recline (if equipped)
Graphic
To change the second row seat back angle, lean forward slightly while raising the recline lever on the side of the seat cushion, lean back to the desired position and release the recline lever.
Make sure the recline lever returns to its original position and the seat back is locked in place by rocking the seat back forward/ backward.
When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright position, make sure you support the seat back while operating the lever.
Second Row Seat Folding (Third Row Seat Entry/Exit Access)
The second row 40P/Captain seat can be tumbled forward to provide access to the Third Row Seat.
Entry Access
Graphic
•  Operate the lever on the side of the seat. This lever actuates the one-touch fold and tumble mechanism of the 40P/Captain seat.
60/40 Seat (Exit Access)
 
Graphic
Graphic
Captain Seat (Exit Access)
Graphic
Graphic
•  To tumble the Second Row 40P/Captain seat while sitting on the Third Row seat, pull the lever behind the 40P/Captain backrest.
•  In order to use the 2nd Row Seat to load cargo, first tumble the seat as explained above. Then, push the seat downward of the vehicle (>45 kg) until the two latches underneath the seat lock onto the floor.
Graphic
Graphic
•  To tumble the seat from the back folded (cargo) condition, first make the seat back upright. Then operate the one-touch fold and tumble lever.
The seat tumble mechanism cannot be operated when the seat is in the folded position.
Return the seat back to its upright position in one continuous motion to securely lock the seat and in turn avoiding seat flipping forward suddenly leading to injuries
If this happens, release the seat lock by pulling the lever and repeat the procedure.
Be cautious when placing your hands around the seat anchors. You could pinch your hands or fingers between the seat anchor and the seat. Hold the edge of the seat when lowering it into place. Never place your hands between the seat anchor and the seat
To avoid Personal injury keep legs away from the seat anchor when relatching the seat back to the fold position.
Graphic
Second Row Seat Folding (For Luggage)
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
The 2nd Row 60P seat back can be folded to load cargo on top of it. Operate the lever on the side of the 60P seat. This lever actuates the backrest fold mechanism. Release the lever once the backrest has folded completely.
To bring the seat back to upright position and push the seat back until it locks into the desired reclining position.
Second Row Armrest (If equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
The Second Row 60P seat features armrest with cup holder.
•  To open the armrest, simply pull on the tab given at the top of the armrest (as shown).
•  When armrest is not required, push back the armrest into the 60P backrest.
Second Row Captain Seat arm rest fold and unfold (If equipped)
Graphic
While folding the seat back ensure arm rest is in unfold condition.
Second Row Bench Seat (If equipped)
The second row seat can be folded forward to increase luggage space.
•  Pull the strap rearwards to unlock the seat back as shown in below image
•  Then push the backrest forwards to fold it.
•  To open the seat back, simply pull the backrest rearwards until it gets locked in position.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
2.1.3 Third Row Seats (If equipped)
Graphic
Access to or exit from third row seat is possible by completely folding the second row seat. Second row seat features 60:40 split configuration. The Second row 40P seat can be tumbled to gain access to third row seat.
Refer to the previous sections for details regarding folding of second row seats.
Third Row Seat Folding
To fold the third row seat, unlock the seat back by pulling the lever on the rear of the seat back outwards. Then push the seat back forward to fold the seat.
Similarly, lower the other half of third row seat to get a completely flat surface. Both the second row and third row seats can be folded flat to maximise the luggage space.
To Fold
To Open
Graphic
Graphic
To open the seat back, pull on the lever to unlock the backrest and use the same lever to lift the backrest upward till it locks at the rear most position. When loading bigger pieces of luggage behind the third row seat, the backrest can be locked at a more upright position using the same lever. There are 6 locking positions at 2 degree interval each. This provides seating space for the 3rd row occupant as well as provides a slightly increased volume for storing luggage.
2.2 Head Restraint
The head restraint comprises the padded portion which contacts your head and is inserted/locked in receptacles on the top of the seat back. Vehicle seats are equipped with head restraints which are vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of rear collision.
Graphic
Always align top of the head restraint with the top of your head or as close to it as possible. To raise the head restraint, pull the restraint up.
To lower the head restraint, press the lock knob and push the head restraint down. The head restraint can be pulled out completely by depressing the locking button while pulling the restraint out. Align the head restraint shafts over the holes on the seat top and push the restraint straight down till you hear the lock click. Keep the seat back as upright as possible so the headrest is behind, not beneath, and almost touching your head.
Never drive with the head restraints not properly adjusted, head restraints removed or inserted in a flipped condition. With no support behind your head, your neck could be seriously injured in a collision.
Head restraints are provided for the front row and second row outboard & 3rd row occupants only.
2.3 Seat Belt
2.3.1 General Warnings and Instructions
At least once each month, inspect the seat belt webbing for any cuts, tears, or other signs of wear (such as fraying along the edges). Also inspect the anchors, retractors, and buckles to be sure they are tight and operational.
•  All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belt no matter how short the trip in order to minimize the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash. In an accident, an un-belted passenger becomes a projectile, and can cause serious injury to himself or another passenger.
•  In a rollover crash, an un-belted person is significantly more likely prone to Injury than a person wearing a seat belt
•  In order to be properly buckled, you must always sit up straight and keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part must be worn low and tight across your hips, just touching the top of your thighs. While fastening the seat belt, the shoulder strap of the seat belt must pass over your chest and top of your shoulder. It must never touch your neck, face, the side of your shoulder, arm, or pass under your arm. The belt must always be flat against your body and not twisted in any way. Nothing, such as an arm rest, a pocketbook, or any external objects should be between you and the seat belt. Improperly worn of a seat belt will reduce the protection in an accident.
•  Seat belts should be adjusted as tightly as possible, consistent with comfort to properly secure the wearer in the seat.
Graphic
Graphic
•  The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for adults must be properly used and maintained.
•  For usage of adult seat belt to secure children, refer to section of manual for child seat positions and use a child restraint systems
•  Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is in motion. Passenger who does not wear the seat belts will be under a high risk of thrown against the vehicle inside hard parts, against other occupants or out of the vehicle during emergency stop or collision.
•  Do not use any accessories on seat belts or modify in any way the seat belt system. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash
•  An accident or emergency stop, can damage your seat belt system, even if the accident is “minor”. Please have your Mahindra Authorised Dealer inspect the seat belt system after an accident
•  Please be aware that any unsecured item in your vehicle, such as your pet, unsecured child restraint system, a laptop or mobile phones, can become a projectile in the event of an accident or sudden stop, causing injuries to occupants in the vehicle
Never use a damaged seat belt system. A damaged seat belt will not provide protection in an accident, resulting in serious injury.
•  Seat belt systems are prone to abuse. They are not indestructible. They must be handled with care to avoid damage
•  Keep the belts clean and dry. Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and webbings are soiled. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners. These chemicals will severely weaken the belts
•  Retractors in 3-point type seat belts retract the seat belts when not in use. The inertia lock and coil spring allow the belts to remain comfortable on users during normal driving. During accidents or abrupt stops, inertia locks restrict the sudden forward movement of the wearer
Prevention of seat belt Slow retraction:
1. Check if there any twist on in-board or out-board side of safety belt.
2. Check if dust accumulated on outer parts such as Webbing , D-Loop, Tongue stopper and Tongue.
3. Remove the dust from D-Loop, Webbing, Tongue & Tongue stopper by compressed air or air blower.
4. Use clean and lint free cloth and hand gloves for cleaning safety belt parts D-Loop, Webbing, Tongue & Tongue stopper. Do not use any chemicals and cleaning fluids could damage the seat belt assembly.
5. Inspect the Webbing for retraction performance. Safety belt assembly cleaning required if seat belt retraction becomes very slow due to dust and soil accumulation on safety belt assembly, then below cleaning procedure to be followed:
1. Appropriate Procedure of disassembly of all pyrotechnic devices to be followed for pretensioner seat belt. The Battery terminal to be removed before disassembly of pretensioner, otherwise there will be error codes registered in Airbag ECU and Airbag ECU will show malfunction.
2. Open Pillar trims and take out Seat belt assembly on bench by carefully disassembly of connector and Lap Pretensioner/ Anchor wire assembly (if equipped). Kindly follow correct safety belt pretensioner handling procedure in case of pretensioner safety belts. Use clean and lint free cloth and hand gloves for cleaning safety belt assembly. Do not use any chemicals and cleaning fluids could damage the Seat belt webbing and other parts.
3. If seat belt movement is sticky due to dust accumulation. Then please contact the dealer for help in cleaning.
4. In case of soiling on the belt, use a mild soap solution consisting of 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 liter of lukewarm water.
5. Care to be taken to prevent contact of soap water with Pretensioner .
6. Clean dust accumulated on D-Loop, Webbing and overall assembly by close inspection of D-Loop and Webbing using lint free cloth.
7. After cleaning safety belt they should be dried by lint free dry cloth.
8. After cleaning kindly inspect Webbing movement through D-Loop slot for any sticky movement of webbing .
9. Assemble the safety belt using correct torque. Re-assemble all trim parts.
10. Inspect the Webbing for retraction performance.
Seat Belts - Patients: Persons with serious medical conditions should also wear a seat belt. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations before travel.
Seat Belts - Pregnant Women: Pregnant women must also wear seat belts. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations.
Graphic
The lap belt should be worn snugly and as low as possible over the hips. The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder, but never across the stomach area. When worn properly, the seat belt will protect both the mother and the foetus in an accident or emergency stop.
A pregnant woman should never wear the seat belt across the stomach area. This could lead to serious injuries to the foetus and/or the pregnant mother.
Never wear twisted seat belts. Excessive forces will be transferred from the belt to the wearer, in a collision, resulting in serious personal injury.
Each seat belt is meant for use by one person only. Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. The seat belt will not be able to absorb the impact forces properly leading to serious injuries.
Never wear a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's lap. This could lead to serious injuries.
Seat Belt Usage is Necessary to:
•  Reduce the possibility of being out from your vehicle during an accident.
•  Reduce the possibility of injuries to upper body, lower body and legs during an accident
•  Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle
Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the vehicle seat belts. The lap portion should be snug fastened on the hips and as low as possible and the shoulder belt should be rout across the child's shoulder, not across neck or face. If you are unable to position the belt across the child's shoulder, the child should be seated in a booster seat. Frequently check the seat belt to be sure it remains snug and in position. A squirming child could cause the seat belt to come out of position.
2.3.2 Seat Belt Configuration
Graphic
Graphic
To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, it is highly recommended that the seat belts should be used by all occupants inside of your vehicle.
Seat Belt Types with respect to Location
Seat Location
Seat Belt Type
Driver Seat
Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL), & Anchor Pretensioner
Co-Driver Seat
Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL)
2nd Row LH (40P)
Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR)
2nd Row RH (60P)
Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR) & Lap Seat belt
2nd Row Captain Seat LH / RH
Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR)
3rd Row LH / RH
Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR)
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR): The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) allows the driver seat belt to freely extend and retract with occupant movement, yet locks the belt during a sudden stop or upon impact.
Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL): A pretensioner is designed to retract some of the webbing of a seat belt the instant a collision occurs, tightening the seat belt to restrain occupants quickly and reducing the amount they are thrown forward in a moderate or severe frontal crash.
Load limiters help protect occupants from seat belt-inflicted injury. In the event of a crash, the pretensioner restrains the occupant until certain amount of force is applied. At this point the load limiter releases the webbing gradually so as not to exert too much force on the chest of the occupant.
2.3.3 Seat Belt Pretensioner
In the event of a crash being detected, the belt pretensioner locks the seat belt by drawing back the seat belts on the driver’s and passenger’s torso and pelvis to prevent the driver and passenger being thrown forward. The seat belt pretensioner combined with the seat belt and airbag further increases safety.
Graphic
This vehicle is provided with a anchor pretensioner for driver seat (in the sill board area) and is used to help to protect occupant in the sever crash events .
Its activation through Airbag ECU is signalled by pulling down of the metallic cable and removes slack in in seat belt.
To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt on shoulder keeping it firmly close to the chest and bottom part of the seat belt on pelvis.
In case of side impact collisions, front air bags are not inflated, but seat belt pretensioners located in the same position with impact direction will be deployed together with side air bag. Deployed seat belt pretensioners cannot be deployed again. Have the deployed seat belt pretensioners replaced by an Authorised dealer.
Graphic
Operation of pretensioner
When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt pretensioners pull back the seat belts immediately to restrain the occupants to their seats.
Graphic
Operation of load limiter
After frontal collision, the load limiter releases the seat belt to prevent the occupant from being injured due to belt force.
Fastening the seat belt
Even if seat belts are not worn, the air bag will deploy in case of impact, collision triggered. In addition, airbags can protect occupants when the occupants are wearing their seat belts. Airbags may cause injuries to occupants if they do not wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.
•  Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If not, the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sudden manoeuvring of the vehicle
•  Sometimes you may have to apply strong force to pull the webbing out of the retract
•  Each seat belt should be used by only one occupant at a time
•  Seat belts and airbag’s can significantly minimise possible injury to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from fatal collisions or injury
•  Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat belts should be checked and repaired by only a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service centre
•  An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant or child restraint
2.3.4 Fastening the Seat Belt (3-Point type)
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Adjust the seat as needed, sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your seat belt, pull the webbing out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. An audible “click” would be heard when the tab locks into the buckle. Pull up on the shoulder strap to tighten the lap belt across your hips. The seat belt retractor will pull in any slack in the shoulder strap. A slow and easy motion will allow the belt to extend and let you move your body around freely.
Periodically check the seat belt as you ride to be sure it remains snug and in position. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock (restrict) if you try to lean forward too quickly.
If the driver or co-driver seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched ON, the seat belt warning lamp illuminates and chimes beat will turn till seat belt fastened. Refer “Warning Lamps” in the “Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for further details.
2.3.5 Fastening the Seat Belt (2-Point Lap type)
Graphic
Graphic
This seat belt is applicable to the second row middle passenger seat. Insert the tongue into the buckle until it snaps. Position the lap belt on the hips as low as possible.
2.3.6 Seat Belt Release (both 3-Point & 2 Point)
Graphic
Graphic
To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
Never insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent from properly latching the tongue and may cause damage to the buckle mechanism, thereby making the seat belt ineffective in an accident, resulting in serious personal injury.
2.3.7 Driver Seat Belt Reminder Indication
Graphic
The driver seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will blink in instrument cluster if driver doesn’t wear the seat belt and will be continuous until belt is buckled. Chime will be activated when vehicle travels more than 500 metres or attains 25 Kms/Hrs of speed while vehicle is in motion which will be ON for 95 seconds
2.3.8 Passenger Occupant Detection System (PODS) & Seat Belt Reminder Indication
Graphic
PODS detects the presence of occupant in the passenger seat.
Graphic
If Occupant is present on passenger seat and not wearing the seat belt, Seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will glow on the center fascia switch provided in vehicle instrument panel and will be continuous until the seat belt is buckled. It should be noted that the PODS require a minimum weight hence children may not be detected by PODS. Along with this warning symbol, a Chime in Cluster will be ON for 95 seconds. Do keep in mind that after market seat covers also may deteriorate the detection senor performance, don’t use the non recommended/non authorized seat covers.
Seat belt reminder warning lamp for passenger seat may glow in case of child is present in passenger seat.
Strong advice not to carry children in front seat without child restraint seat. Also do not use adult seat belt which is designed to harness person taller than 140cm Always ensure Passenger Airbag is turn OFF before you carry child on passenger seat.We strongly urge that children should be in middle row using the child seats with the ISO FIX
2.3.9 Seat Belt Height Adjuster
Graphic
You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor for maximum comfort and safety of both front seats. If the height of the seat belt is too near your neck, you will not be getting the most effective protection.
The shoulder portion of the belt should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest to the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster to an appropriate position while pressing the height adjuster button. Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into the position.
Adjust the shoulder belt height sitting well back in the seat. Do not adjust the seat belt height while vehicle is in motion.
2.4 Child Restraint System (CRS)
How to use the ISOFIX Lower Latch Anchor/ISOFIX Rods
1. ISOFIX Marking gjkkllool 2. Latch anchor/ISOFIX rod
Graphic
•  The ISOFIX lower latch anchors (rods) are located in rear seats bottom position. Their locations are shown in the illustration
•  Insert the child restraint attachments into the ISOFIX lower latch anchors (rods) until it clicks. Refer Child seat installation manual.
•  Do not use the seat belt for installing the ISOFIX child restraint
ISOFIX system is a standardized method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need to use the standard adult Seat belt to secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker installation.
•  When using the “ISOFIX” lower latch system (rod), all unused vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of un-retracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to reach the un-retracted seat belts which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to the child in the child restraint.
•  Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle
How to use the Top Tether/Rear Anchor
Graphic
There are two top tether rods/rear anchors on the seat base back side of the rear row front facing seats.
1. Remove the headrest from the rear row seat
2. Place the child restraint on the rear row seat
3. Connect the tether connector in child restraint to the top tether rod/ rear anchor. Securely tighten the child restraint by adjusting the webbing of the child restraint system (CRS) tether connector. Follow the clear instructions provide in the CRS manual
•  The top-tether/ rear anchor is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the ISOFIX rod/lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death.
•  If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation
•  Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are Firmly latched to the ISOFIX rod/lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound/ latch indications provided on seat.
•  Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury.
•  Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints
•  The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct top tether rod/rear anchor provided on seat back.
•  Don’t put the top tether strap over the head restraint of rear row seat which is not the correct methods and may cause risk.
•  Rock the child restraint to check if it is securely installed. Refer to instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.
•  Do not install the child restraint of such size if it hinders the operations of front seat which may cause problem to front occupants.
Table of Information on Child Restraint Systems (CRS) Using The Seat Belt
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Mass group
Restraint Device Figure
Seating position
Mounting method of vehicle
Passenger Seat
Second Row
Third Row
Activated front Passenger Airbag
Deactivated front Passenger Airbag
Left
Centre
Right
Left
Right
Group 0
Up to 10 kg
Rear Facing Child Seat
X
U
U
X
U
X
X
3 - Point Seat Belt
Group 0+
Up to 13 kg
Rear Facing Child Seat
X
U
U
X
U
X
X
3 - Point Seat Belt
Group I
9 to 18 kg
Forward Facing Child Seat
U
X
U
X
U
X
X
3 - Point Seat Belt
Group II
15 to 25 kg
Booster Seat
U
X
U
X
U
X
X
3 - Point Seat Belt
Group III
22 to 36 kg
Booster Seat
U
X
U
X
U
X
X
3 - Point Seat Belt
Table of Information on Child Restraint Systems (CRS) Using ISOFIX & Top Tether
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Mass group
Restraint Device Figure
Seating position
Mounting method of vehicle
First Row
Second Row
Third Row
Left
Left
Centre
Right
Left
Right
Group 0
Up to 10 kg
Rear Facing Child Seat
X
IU
X
IU
X
X
ISOFIX & Top Tether
Group 0+
Up to 13 kg
Rear Facing Child Seat
X
IU
X
IU
X
X
ISOFIX & Top Tether
Group I
9 to 18 kg
Forward Facing Child Seat
X
IU/IUF
X
IU/IUF
X
X
ISOFIX & Top Tether
Group II
15 to 25 kg
Booster Seat
X
IUF
X
IUF
X
X
ISOFIX & Top Tether
Group III
22 to 36 kg
Booster Seat
X
IUF
X
IUF
X
X
ISOFIX & Top Tether
Table of Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions
Mass group
Size Class
Fixture
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Rear outboard
Carry cot (Newborn Baby)
F
ISO/L1
X
G
ISO/L2
X
Group 0: up to 10 kg (~9 months)
E
ISO/R1
IU
Group 0+: up to 13 kg (~0 – 2 years)
E
ISO/R1
IU
D
ISO/R2
IU
C
ISO/R3
IU
Group I 09 to 18 kg (~9 months – 4 years)
D
ISO/R2
IU
C
ISO/R3
IU
B
ISO/F2
IUF
B1
ISO/F2X
IUF
A
ISO/F3
X
Key of letters be inserted in the above table
U: Suitable for “Universal” category restraint approved for use in this mass group
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “Universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the “semi-universal” categories
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS). These CRS may be are those of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’ or ‘semi-universal’ categories
IU: Suitable for using rearward facing child restraint system with ISOFIX & Top-tether (or) ISOFIX Base with Support leg
X: Seat position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class
A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm)
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm)
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing Child Restraint System
F -ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)
Use the manufacturer recommended Child Restraint System (CRS) and locations to fit in vehicle. Please read the installation instructions provided in manual carefully before use.
Anchorage Location : Child restraint anchor fittings are installed at the points as shown in the figure.
Graphic
Graphic
Unrestrained infants and small children could be injured
•  Never transport them unless they are properly restrained
•  Use restrained system which meet safety standard
•  Follow directions provided by the manufacturer
Warning for Child Restraint
•  Use only the approved Child Restraint System (CRS) for better safety of your child.
•  Mahindra is not responsible for the personal injury and property damage due to the defect of child restraint system.
•  Use the proper type of child restraint system suitable for the weight and size for your baby.
•  Use the child restraint system at recommended seating location only and follow the instructions.
•  Child restraint has 5 categories based on the weight as below:
1
GROUP 0 : 0 ~ 10 KG
4
GROUP II : 15 ~ 25 KG
2
GROUP 0+ : 0 ~ 13 KG
5
GROUP III : 22 ~ 36 KG
3
GROUP I : 9 ~ 18 KG
   
•  Group 0 & 0+ : Rear-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat (use of ISOFIX with Base & Support Leg is recommended).
•  Group I: Forward-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat (use of ISOFIX & Top Tether is recommended).
•  Group II & III: Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat belt fastened. Always follow the installation procedure and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
Cautions for ISOFIX Seat usage
•  The anchor provided on rear seat base back is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death.
•  If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation.
•  Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are latched to the lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound and color indications.
•  The child restraint seat strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct seat back anchor provided on the rear seat base back side behind the seat carpet. Follow the instructions provided on the seat back for the details of anchor location.
•  Make sure that the child restraint system is firmly secured by rocking it in different directions.
•  Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury.
2.5 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) includes airbags, pre-tensioners and ECU. The airbags are designed to provide further protection to the vehicle occupants in addition to the primary protection provided by the seat belts and seat belt pre-tensioners.
The primary components of the system are the sensors which measure the crash severity. In the event of a significant frontal impact, the SRS airbags inflate to work in conjunction with the seat belts and help reduce injuries mainly to the driver's or front passenger's head/chest.
Seat belts are the primary restraint system in the vehicle. An airbag provides supplemental protection in addition to the seat belts.
All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts irrespective of presence of airbag to minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash.
Airbags are more effective in reducing injuries when the seat belts are worn.
Airbags
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
Graphic
A: Knee airbag for the driver (if equipped)
B: Front Passenger Airbag
C: Driver Airbag
D:Two side (seat) impact airbags (if equipped)
E: Two curtain airbags (if equipped)
2.5.1 Driver and Front Passenger Airbag
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (Airbag) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and front passenger seating positions. The indications of the system's presence are the letters “SRS AIRBAG” embossed on the airbag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS is designed to deploy the front airbag only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than ± 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
Driver Airbag
Graphic
Graphic
Front Passenger Airbag
Graphic
Graphic
Front airbag are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front airbag will not deploy in frontal crashes which are below the prescribed deployment threshold where risk of serious injuries is low.
Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag and yourself. It cause injuries.
2.5.2 Knee Airbag (If equipped)
The driver’s knee airbag is located on the dashboard under the steering wheel
Graphic
Graphic
If the driver’s posture is improper while driving, the knee air bag might not protect the driver’s knee area when the airbag deployed.
2.5.3 Side Impact Airbag (If equipped)
Graphic
Your vehicle is equipped with side impact airbag in both the front seats. The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection during side impacts or collisions.
Graphic
Graphic
The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. To minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash, every passenger must always wear their seat belt (see the chapter on Seat Belts in this manual). The airbags inflate very quickly with great force. Do not position any part of your body too close to airbag, you or especially children could be seriously injured/killed by a deploying airbag.
•  In the case of a side collision, the curtain airbag may be deployed together with the relevant side airbag on the side the collision occurs
•  The side impact airbag is supplementary to the seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore, your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants
•  For best protection from the side impact airbag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag, all seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passengers arms and hands should be placed on their laps
•  Do not use any accessory seat covers. Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system
•  Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact airbag
•  Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the air bag and yourself
•  Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the door and the seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplementary side impact airbag inflates
Do not cover the front seats with anything. It hinders the air bag inflation
An airbag is not designed to deploy in every type of crash. Depending on the type of accident or impact, the front airbags independently deploy thereby protecting the occupants. It is not necessary that ALL the airbags deploy during an accident.
2.5.4 Side Curtain Airbag (If equipped)
The side curtain air bags are contained between right above the front and rear doors and the end of the vehicle roof.
The Side Curtain air bags are located along sides of the roof rails on the A & B pillars. They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions. The curtain airbag are designed to deploy depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations, collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations.
Graphic
Graphic
•  In the case of a side collision, the side airbag may be deployed together with the relevant curtain airbag on the side the collision occurs
•  In order for side and curtain airbag to provide the best protection, both front seat occupants and outboard rear occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belts properly fastened. Importantly, children should sit in a proper child restraint system in the rear seat
•  When children are seated in the rear outboard seats, they must be seated in the proper child restraint system. Make sure to position the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint system in a locked position
•  Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain airbag
2.5.5 Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation
The passenger air bag activation/deactivation option is available in instrument cluster menu.
Select Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation option in SETTINGS menu to activate/deactivate (not inflatable) the front passenger airbag as per below reference images
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
If your select Airbag ON/OFF the following indicator will appear.
Passenger Airbag OFF Indicator
Graphic
This Warning indicator glows on center fascia switch on IP when passenger airbag “OFF” position.
Passenger Airbag ON Indicator
Graphic
This Warning indicator symbol glows on center fascia switch on IP when selecting the passenger airbag “ON” option to enable the passenger airbag.
2.5.6 Airbag System Malfunction Lamp
Graphic
Airbags do not require any regular maintenance or service. The airbag system malfunction lamp illuminates when the ignition is ON, and it turns OFF after about two seconds as self check confirming normal operations of airbag system and malfunction lamp.
This lamp monitors airbag sensor assembly, airbag sensors, indicator lamp, seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If either of the following conditions occur, there is a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioner. Immediately contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
•  The lamp does not glow when the ignition is switched ON or glows beyond six (6) seconds after switching the ignition ON
•  The lamp comes ON at any other time, even briefly
•  The lamp comes ON intermittently
Never make any modifications to your vehicle which could affect the performance of airbag system. In particular, changes to the vehicle frame, bumpers, bull bar, front fenders, ride height, suspension, seat belts, interior trim, seats or steering wheel (especially covers, pads or other trim), could prevent proper deployment of the airbag. If you need to make any modifications to accommodate any disability you may have, please contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer..
Never try to open or strike the airbag cover. If the airbag cover is cracked or damaged in any way, the airbag may not function as intended. Take the vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Even if the airbags do not deploy during an accident, take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for a thorough inspection of the airbag and seat belt systems, no matter how minor the accident. The airbag system could have been damaged, and may not work as intended in the future, resulting in serious injury.
2.5.7 Airbag Inflation/Deployment
The airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. This initiates a chemical reaction which quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas.
Upon deployment, tear seams moulded directly into the pad covers separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the airbags. A fully inflated airbag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to manoeuvre or operate other controls.
Deployment of the airbags happen in a milliseconds, producing a loud noise releasing a ‘white smoke’ and residue along with a non-toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue with soap and water as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation. Exit the vehicle as soon as possible after the accident.
Airbag deployment may cause windshield to break.
•  Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent them from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or disable the system, which could result in serious injury
•  Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment. The airbags inflate only once
•  Do not cover the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats with any object (e.g. dash panel covers, seat covers) which may prevent the airbags from inflating properly
•  The airbags inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can also cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant's hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. Sit straight and well back into the seat. Move your seat as far back as practical to allow room for airbag inflation, while still allowing you to properly operate/drive the vehicle
The front passenger should never sit on the edge of the seat, stand near the glove compartment, rest feet or other parts of the body on the dashboard when the vehicle is moving.
Graphic
Graphic
The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard can be seriously injured during airbag deployment.
Graphic
•  The driver must sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle
•  The front passenger must sit as far back as possible from the dashboard
•  Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to be shifted too close to a deploying airbag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious injury
•  Always sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, on the seat cushion centre with your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor
•  All vehicle occupants must be properly restrained using the seat belts
•  All infants and children must be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle in a child restraint seat and be properly restrained by seat belts
•  Front airbags can injure occupants who are improperly positioned in the front seats
•  Even with airbags, improperly belted and un-belted occupants can be severely injured when the airbag inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, airbags and occupant safety contained in this manual
•  Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system or side impact airbags
•  Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses
2.5.8 Child Restraint and Airbag
Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it
In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.
This is indicated also on stickers that are located at the following position. On the front passenger’s sun visor
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!
Never put a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it can cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured in the event of a crash. All infants and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.
Instal the child restraint system on the rear outboard seats, and securely lock the child restraint system in position with the help of ISOFIX.
Always Buckle Children (ABC) in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride.
2.5.9 Airbag Deployment
The images shown in this section are for illustrative purpose only. They may not look like your model/variant or vehicle.
Front Airbag
Front airbag are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.
Graphic
2.5.10  Airbag Non-deployment
Impacts below a pre-determined threshold level may not cause the airbag to deploy in the following cases:
Collision with Utility Poles or Trees :
Graphic
Airbags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.
Frontal Impact :
Graphic
Frontal impact beyond 30º range from head-on to the vehicle.
Frontal Side Swipe Impact:
Frontal offset impact to the vehicle may not provide the deceleration force necessary for airbag deployment.
Graphic
In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any airbags.
Under-ride Situations :
Running under a truck's tailgate may not provide the decelerations necessary for airbag deployment.
Graphic
Airbags will not inflate in this “under-ride” situation where deceleration forces that are detected by sensors are significantly low.
Rear-end Collisions :
Graphic
Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, where occupants are moved backward away from the airbags by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit.
Potholes or Stepped Surfaces :
Graphic
Driving into a big pothole, stepped surface or hitting the far side of a hole/incline will not inflate the airbag.
Rollover:
Graphic
Airbags will not inflate in rollover accidents where airbag deployment would not provide protection to the occupants. However, side impact and curtain airbags may inflate only when severe side impact causes rollover.
2.5.11 Airbag Service
Airbag Replacement: Self-servicing or tampering with the airbag system is dangerous. An airbag could accidentally deploy causing serious injuries, or will not deploy when there is a need. Always take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for inspection and repairs.
Removing SRS Related Parts: We do not recommend removing the instrument panel, steering wheel, seats or airbag related parts or sensors by any individual or garages which are not recommended. Airbags could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries, or they may not deploy when there is a need. Visit an Mahindra Authorised Dealer if these parts must be removed.
Airbag Disposal: Improper disposal of an airbag or a vehicle with live airbags can be extremely dangerous. Approach an Mahindra Authorised Dealer to do these jobs.
Airbag Repair: If the front airbag cover or instrument panel airbag cover shows signs of damage or having been removed, the vehicle should be towed to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for repair. Do not attempt to self repair or reinstall the cover.
Airbag Maintenance: For cleaning the airbag covers/areas, use only a soft dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper deployment of the system.
3 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES
3.1 Instrument Cluster Overview
Type 1
Graphic
Type 2
Graphic
3.1.1 Speedometer
High Low
Graphic
Graphic
The speedometer indicates actual vehicle speed in kilometers per hour.
The vehicle speedometer is affected by size of the tyres used. If the size of the tyres are changed from those fitted at the factory, the speedometer might not display the correct road surface speed and distance travelled.
Over Speed Alert Buzzer
Primary level: Buzzer will trigger single chime in every 2 minutes when the vehicle speed reaches 80 kmph. once primary level chime is triggered, it will continue playing until speed is reduced to 76 kmph or goes beyond 120 kmph.
Secondary level: Buzzer will trigger periodic chime when the vehicle speed reaches 120 kmph and chime will continue playing until vehicle speed is reduced to 114 kmph. Below this speed primary level chime will be triggered and will continue till 76 kmph.
3.1.2 Tachometer
High Low
Graphic
Graphic
The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of RPM (revolutions per minute). Each division is 1000 RPM. Operating the engine at very high RPM may lead to excessive engine wear and low fuel economy. Maintain steady engine speed below 2500 RPM and do not accelerate or decelerate abruptly.
Do not over-accelerate the engine during idling, this can cause severe engine damage and would be treated as abuse of the engine which is not covered by warranty.
Tacho red band range:
Gasoline 5500 - 7000 rpm
Diesel 5000 - 7000 rpm
Diesel (High Variant): Tacho red band shall change based on engine parameters
3.1.3 Fuel Level Gauge
High Low
Graphic
Graphic
The fuel level gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON. It gives the status of the fuel level in the fuel tank. F indicates the tank is full (60 +/- 2 liters), E indicates the tank is empty.
When the fuel level reaches the reserve, the last bar will be displayed and low fuel telltale will be ON (approx 12 liters). when the fuel tank is completely empty, last bar goes off from display and low fuel telltale will be blinking . The amount of fuel required to fill the tank up may be less than the specified tank capacity, as a small amount of reserve fuel always remains in the tank.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel level may fluctuate or the last bar may flash earlier than usual. Always check the fuel level when the vehicle is on level road. If the last bar is still off and telltale is blinking even after filling sufficient fuel, contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as possible.
When all the bars in the display starts blinking/flashing, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer at the earliest.
It is highly recommended to start the fueling at ignition OFF condition and turn on the ignition only when fueling is finished to get correct fuel level.
IGN ON fuel filling may lead to inconsistency and can cause for DTE fluctuation.
3.1.4 Temperature Gauge
The engine coolant temperature gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON. It indicates the instantaneous engine coolant temperature. The coolant temperature varies with changes in weather, load on engine and driving pattern.
If the gauge moves beyond the normal operating range toward “H” mark. it indicates the engine overheating that may damage the engine. Allow engine to cool. In such situations switch OFF the AC and observe any improvements in the temperature gauge. If not, stop the vehicle and allow the engine to cool down. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir and top-up if required. If the engine is still overheating, contact your nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
High Low
Graphic
Graphic
Never remove the Degassing tank cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could splash on to skin/eyes causing severe burns. Wait for the engine to cool down before adding coolant to the reservoir.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. This will lead to damage of engine components and engine seizure.
3.1.5 Outside Ambient Temperature (if equipped)
Graphic
This Screen shows the outside ambient temperature and we can change units based on infotainment setting.
3.1.6 Gear Information
Gear information shows the actual gear the vehicle is currently in.
Based on the various parameters, it will also provide an up shift / down shift recommendation for better fuel economy.
Type 1 Type 2 Operating Conditions
Graphic
Graphic
UP/DOWN arrows recommend to up shift / down shift the drive gear.
3.1.7 Odometer
The odometer records and displays the total distance travelled in Km. Odometer cannot be reset.
Type 1 Type 2
Graphic
Graphic
3.2 Drive Mode (If equipped)
Graphic
Drive modes shall change driving characteristics by changing elements such as Engine power, Traction control, Climate control and Steering weight settings.
The vehicle has selectable drive modes like Zip, Zap, Zoom and Custom which have their own distinct pre-set configurations. The selection of drive mode is made via dedicated button or switches.
Drive selection menu part of infotainment and cluster will display the current drive mode.
Refer Drive modes in the “Starting and Driving chapter” for further details
3.3 Instrument Cluster Control Switches
The instrument cluster menus can be changed using the cluster control switches on the Steering wheel or the Driver side switch bank.
Driver side switch bank is located on the right hand side of the Instrument Panel.
Graphic
A: Menu button: Horizontal scrolling i.e., change in menu
B: UP button: Used to scroll vertically up direction
C: OK button: Select a option
D: Down button: Used to scroll vertically down direction
The right most steering wheel switches are used to control the instrument cluster menus.
Graphic
Graphic
A: Menu button: Horizontal scrolling i.e., change in menu
B: UP button: Used to scroll vertically up direction
C: OK button: Select a option
D: Down button: Used to scroll vertically down direction
E: Favorite button: Select a Favorite option
3.4 Instrument Cluster screen flow
Graphic
3.5 Drive Info
Graphic
Drive info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering Wheel/Driver side switch bank.
Use OK button to enter Drive info page.
3.5.1 Trip Meter
Graphic
Graphic
Two trip meters are available with max range of 9999.9 km. These are available in drive info menu and can be accessed using UP/DOWN switch.
Trip meter can be reset by long press of OK. Resetting trip will reset average speed and drive time associated with the particular trip.
It is recommended to reset the trip meters when battery is disconnected and reconnected
3.5.2 Drive Time
Graphic
Drive Duration is the elapsed time from the start of this trip cycle.
Drive time is part of trip page. Drive time will reset along with trip reset.
3.5.3 Average Speed
Graphic
Average Speed is calculated based on the total distance covered and time taken from the start of this trip cycle. Average speed info is part of trip page. Average speed will reset along with trip reset.
3.5.4 Clock & Date
The time on the clock & date is in sync with the infotainment. Any change in infotainment will reflect on the cluster. Refer settings for changing clock type.
Graphic
Graphic
3.5.5 Driver Drowsiness Index (If equipped)
Drowsiness detection is a safety technology that can prevent accidents that are caused by drivers who fell asleep while driving.
Graphic
Cluster will display the 5 level of driver attention level based on drive Pattern
5 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is Completely Awake.
Graphic
4 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is Quite Awake.
Graphic
3 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is Neither Awake nor Sleepy.
Graphic
2 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is slightly sleepy and can stay awake with effort.
Graphic
1 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is extremely Sleepy and cant stay awake
Refer DDD section in “Starting and Driving the vehicle” chapter for more details
3.5.6 REGEN (If equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
This page will appear only when vehicle is capable of Park regeneration (DPF telltale ON or Blinking) along with REGEN telltale.
Refer fuel emission control section for more details on Park regeneration.
3.6 Fuel Info
Fuel info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Graphic
It displays data related to fuel consumption pattern of vehicle.
Use OK button to enter Fuel info page.
3.6.1 Distance to Empty (DTE)
Graphic
Distance to Empty is the approximate distance that can be covered with the available fuel.
3.6.2 Average Fuel Efficiency (AFE)
AFE is calculated based on the last AFE reset cycle.
Graphic
AFE can be reset by long press of OK button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Additional options to change AFE reset to every ignition ON or after every fuel refill are present in the settings menu.
3.6.3  Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE)
Graphic
Instantaneous Fuel Economy is calculated based on your current driving pattern. Higher value on display means vehicle is consuming less fuel, lower value on display implies it is consuming more fuel.
3.6.4  DEF Level (If equipped)
Graphic
Instrument cluster will display the amount of DEF present in the DEF tank
3.6.5  ECO Score (If equipped)
Graphic
It displays the average Eco Score from your Ecosense screen in the Infotainment.
3.7 Digital Speedo Meter (if equipped)
Digital speedometer displays the speed of the vehicle numerically. It provides an immersive experience by having option to switch off the lights of Speedometer and Tachometer.
Graphic
Graphic
Digital speedometer can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Use OK button to enter Digital Speed page.
3.8 Vehicle Info
Vehicle info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Graphic
It displays data related to vehicle information like TPMS , Roll & Pitch and AWD Torque distribution.
Use OK button to enter Vehicle info page.
3.8.1 Tyre Pressure (if equipped)
Tyre Pressure is an electronic system designed to monitor the air pressure inside pneumatic tyres.
This system will alert the driver if the tyre pressure falls below the low pressure or raises above high pressure warning limit for any reason. Including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tyre. The Tiretronics will continue to alert the driver and will not turn off untill the tyre pressure is inflated to the recommended pressure.
Graphic
Graphic
Refer Tiretronics chapter for more details.
3.8.2 Power & Torque
Graphic
This screen indicate the current power and torque with respect to max power which can be achieved.
3.8.3 AWD Torque Distribution (If equipped)
Graphic
This screen indicate the current torque flow while driving.
3.9 Navigation (If equipped)
Graphic
Navigation can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank. It displays data related to map view which is displayed in infotainment. Use OK button to enter Navigation page.
Cluster will display the Navigation information Like Turn By Turn Navigation and Full / Partial Map view from Android auto (If available) or native navigation.
Partial Screen Navigation
Turn by Turn Navigation
Graphic
Graphic
To enter Full navigation if you are at partial Navigation screen, Long Press the OK switch to view full map.
Full Screen Navigation
Graphic
To enter partial navigation if you are at Full Navigation screen, Long Press the OK switch to view partial map.
3.10 Driver Assistance (ADAS) (If equipped)
Graphic
Driver Assistance can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel switches.
Use OK button to enter Drive page
Driver Assistance Menu View
Non Driver Assistance Menu View
Graphic
Graphic
Long press up button shall enter into LKAS setting (if equipped)
Refer “Advanced Driver Assistance System” chapter for more details.
Cluster will display the below features in Driver Assistance Menu:
1. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 3. Lane Keep Assist System (LKA/LDW)
2. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
3.11 Audio Info (If equipped)
Graphic
Audio can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Use OK button to enter Audio page
This below pages will display current media source which is playing your music like AM / FM, USB & Bluetooth.
Graphic
Graphic
3.12 Display Layout
Cluster selected Themes:
Graphic
Display Layout can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Use OK button to enter Display Layout page
Display layout  provides immersive experience by having different skin option based on user choice.
Normal Skin - Default Skin
Graphic
Information Skin: Cluster shall display all the information with different visual layout.
Graphic
Minimal Skin: Cluster shall display minimal information which is required for less informative.
Graphic
Display Layout shortcut : Long press menu button shall enter into display layout directly
3.13 Cluster Setting (if equipped)
Graphic
Settings can be accessed by pressing MENU switch
To enter inside settings, press ok.
Use UP / DOWN button to navigate setting features
Following settings are available:
1. Driver Assistance (if applicable) 2. AFE Auto Reset
3. Passenger Airbag 4. Blind View Monitoring(if applicable)
5. Drowsiness Detection(if applicable)
6. TPMS – Auto Learn (if applicable)
7. Tyre Fill Assist (if applicable) 8. Sound
9. Clock Type 10. Factory Reset
3.13.1 Driver Assistance (If equipped)
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Driver Assistance option.
Graphic
3. Press OK to enter Driver Assistance option. Use Up/Down button to navigate driver assistance features and press OK button to select the corresponding feature options.
Graphic
4. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the options and press OK button to select the corresponding option.
Above procedure is applicable for all other Driver Assistance features.
Refer to Advanced Driver Assistance System chapter for more details.
3.13.2 AFE Reset
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to AFE Auto Reset option
Graphic
3. Press OK to enter AFE Auto Reset option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.
After Ignition : After a predetermined time where the vehicle’s ignition is OFF the AFE will reset.
After Refuelling : Refuelling at ignition OFF and then driving will reset the AFE.
3.13.3 Passenger Airbag
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Passenger Airbag option
Graphic
3. Press OK to Select following screen will appear. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select, a pop-up will appear to confirm the selection
Graphic
4. Press OK to select a option. Confirm your selection by selecting Ok or Cancel.
3.13.4 Blind View Monitoring (if equipped)
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Blind View Monitoring Option
Graphic
3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the Blind View Monitoring Option.
3.13.5 Drowsiness Detection(if equipped)
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Drowsiness Detection Option
Graphic
3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the Drowsiness Detection Option.
3.13.6 TPMS-Auto Learn (if equipped)
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to TPMS-Auto Learn Option
Graphic
3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the TPMS-Auto Learn Option.
3.13.7 Tyre Fill Assist (if equipped)
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Tyre Fill Assist Option
Graphic
3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the Tyre Fill Assist Option.
3.13.8 Sound
Turn Indicators, Notifications Sound and Lane Departure Warning (If applicable) are having options to select different sounds and Volume level adjustment.
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Sound Option.
Graphic
3. Press ok to enter Sound Option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to enter Sound Options
Graphic
4. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.
Graphic
5. Use Up/Down button to Select the volume Level. Press OK to enter Volume Option.
Graphic
6. Up/Down button to select the volume levels. Press OK to select. Once selected it will return to previous page.
3.13.9 Clock Type
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Clock Type Option.
Graphic
3. Press ok to enter Clock Type option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.
3.13.10 Factory Reset
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Factory Reset Option.
Graphic
3. Press OK to Select following screen will appear. Use Down button to select Confirm. Press OK to start factory reset process.
1. To go to the main settings screen from any settings menu, use Up/Down buttons to go to the top of the menu screen and press the OK button.
2. In the settings screen, if no option is selected for a long time. The screen will go to the previous displayed screen.
3.14 Alert History
Graphic
Alert History can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Use OK button to enter Alert History page
Graphic
Alert history allows to check any active applicable vehicle warnings in the instrument cluster display.
Live warnings shall displayed in the cluster center display area and warning count will decrease if viewed in the warning history page.
Graphic
3.15 General Alerts
Display Operating Conditions
Graphic
This alert is displayed when any doors are open and show the door identified as open.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when the check engine warning telltale is ON and engine is running.
Display Operating Conditions
Graphic
This alert is displayed when engine temperature high telltale is ON and engine is running.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when an ABS related malfunction is detected.
50
Graphic
This alert is displayed when low brake fluid is detected and engine is running.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when the park lamp is ON and the ignition is turned OFF.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when low fuel warning telltale is ON or blinking and engine is running.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when the engine oil pressure warning telltale is ON and engine is running.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when either of driver or passenger (if occupied) seatbelt is unbuckled.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when water is detected in fuel filter and engine is running. It is applicable for the diesel variant only.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when passenger airbag is turned OFF.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when brake EBD related malfunction is detected.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when the ESP malfunction is detected and engine is running.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when EPS related malfunction is detected
Graphic
This alert is displayed when Skyroof is left open at ignition off.
Graphic
The alert is displayed when ignition is off, driver door is open and the driver has forgotten their phone in the wireless charging tray.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when AWD system related malfunction is detected.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when Zip drive mode is activated.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when Zap drive mode is activated.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when Zoom drive mode is activated.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when Custom drive mode is activated.
Graphic
Instrument cluster shall monitor some of the internal parameters and if any malfunction is detected it will display the “Contact Dealer” alert.
Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately when “Contact Dealer” alert is displayed in cluster.
Graphic
The alert is displayed when the driver becomes very drowsy and is not able to stay awake. The alert indicates the driver to take an immediate break.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when malfunction in Attention Assist system is detected.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when any front brake pad is detected as worn out and needs to be replaced.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when the Hill Descent Control function is not available because of a malfunction in the system.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when the Hill Hold Control function is not available because of a malfunction in the system.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when the vehicle is driven above 120 kmph.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when you try to move the vehicle and the park brake is still engaged.
Graphic
This alert is displayed 200 Kms before the scheduled service limit.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when a coin or metallic object is placed on the wireless charging tray & the phone is kept on the object leading to poor charging of phone. This will also be displayed if the phone is detected in a incorrect position on the charging tray. Adjust the phone to allow it to charge optimally.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when a NFC enabled card is placed on the wireless charging tray & a phone is placed on top of. Kindly remove the card to protect the card.
Graphic
This alert is displayed when the Skyroof is open and vehicle speed in high.
Graphic
Rain Sensor/Non Rain Sensor Variant: This alert will displayed when low wipe is ON for more than 10 seconds or high wipe is ON for more than 5 seconds in both RLS & Non RLS variants.
3.16 Partial Alerts
Display
Operating Conditions
Graphic
This message comes when auto light is turned OFF.
Graphic
This message comes when auto light is turned ON.
Graphic
This message comes when auto wiper is turned OFF.
Graphic
This message comes when auto wiper is turned ON.
Graphic
This message comes when cruise mode is turned ON.
Graphic
This message comes when cruise mode is turned OFF.
Graphic
This message comes when brake pedal is pressed when in cruise mode or if trying to activate cruise control when vehicle speed is below the cruise threshold.
Graphic
This message comes when cruise mode is ON and accelerator pedal is pressed to overtake.
Graphic
This message comes on when HDC function is enabled by pressing the HDC switch and the conditions for HDC are met . The brakes will then maintain the vehicle speed while descending the Hill
Graphic
This message comes on when the Hill Descent Control is disabled manually by pressing the HDC Switch.
Graphic
This message comes on when the Hill Descent Control is enabled manually by pressing the HDC Switch and is ready to control, but the conditions for HDC are not met yet.
3.17 Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS)
Tyre direction monitoring system or TDMS assists you when vehicle has just started and you are about to move the vehicle. It tells you about the current direction in which tyres are aligned at very beginning of manoeuvring the vehicle. TDMS works only when vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged or when vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and clutch is not engaged
<Level 5>
Graphic
Graphic
<Level 3>
Graphic
Graphic
<Level 0>
Graphic
Operating Conditions
Tyre alignment is displayed in 6 levels (level 0 to level 5) depending on the alignment degree when the ignition switch is turned to "ON" position from "OFF" position
Working conditions:
1. When vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged.
2. When vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and clutch is not engaged.
3.18 Cluster Features
Blind View Monitor (If equipped)
Left Side
Right Side
Graphic
Graphic
Blind view monitoring system displays the video from the camera placed in the side mirrors when turn indicators are ON.
Favorite Function
Favorite button short press, Cluster will display the screen which was already saved as favorite
User can set as favorite any one of the menu screen (Vehicle info, Fuel info, Digital speed, Drive info, Navigation, Driver Assistance, Audio, Display Layout & Setting Level 1) except settings (Level 2,3,4) REGEN function & Warning history.
Favorite Feature
Non–Favorite Feature
Graphic
Graphic
Each time user make a screen as favorite by pressing Favorite button long press during the previously added favorite screen will be replaced by the current screen.
3.19 Warning / Tell-tale Lamps in the Instrument Cluster
Graphic
Graphic
Few Tell Tales grouped in to same slot and this will be cyclic based on tell tale status.
Sr. No.
Symbol
Warning Lamp/Telltale
Lamp Pre-check
Lamp Status while Engine running
Action/Remarks
1
Graphic
Left Turn Indicator
No
Slow or Fast Blinking
Indicates left turn lamp is blinking
Slow Blinking: Normal operation
Fast Blinking: One / more left turn lamp bulb has fused. Have the bulb replaced
2
Graphic
Right Turn Indicator
No
Slow or Fast Blinking
Indicates right turn lamp is blinking
Slow Blinking: Normal operation
Fast Blinking: One /more right turn lamp bulb has fused. Have the bulb replaced
3
Graphic
Cruise Control telltale*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates vehicle is in Cruise mode
4
Graphic
Automatic Emergency Braking System Malfunction*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates temporary or permanent fault in Automatic Emergency braking system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
5
Graphic
Water-in-Fuel Warning telltale*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates water-in-fuel. Drain the water from filter or contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance
6
Graphic
Immobiliser lamp
No
Continuously ON / Blinking
SLOW BLINKING: Vehicle is armed with the remote
FAST BLINKING/CONTINUOUSLY ON: Indicates a system malfunction
Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
7
Graphic
ABS Warning telltale
Yes
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of the ABS system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
8
Graphic
Park Brake / EBD / Low Brake Fluid Telltale / EPB* / Brake pad worn out*
Yes
Continuously ON
Either one of the below conditions:
1. Park Brake might be engaged
2. Brake fluid level might be low
3. There is a malfunction in brake EBD.
4. Front Brake Pad wear worn out. Please contact Mahindra Dealer immediately.
9
Graphic
Parking Lamp telltale
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Park Lamp is ON
10
Graphic
Airbag Warning telltale
Yes
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of the airbag system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
11
Graphic
HHC Malfunction*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of Hill Hold Control. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
12
Graphic
Door Ajar Warning telltale
No
Continuously ON
Indicates any doors, boot or hood are open
13
Graphic
Low Fuel Warning telltale
No
Continuously ON/Blinking
Indicates fuel level has reached the reserve level. Refuel immediately
14
Graphic
ESP OFF telltale*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates ESP has been switched OFF
15
Graphic
ESP Malfunction Warning telltale*
Yes
Continuously ON or Blinking
BLINKING: Indicates ESP has taken control of the vehicle stability
CONTINUOUSLY ON: Indicates a malfunction in the ESP system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
16
Graphic
Front Fog Lamp telltale*
No
Continuously Lamp ON
Indicates front fog lamp is ON
17
Graphic
Tiretronics telltale*
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Indicates low/high tyre pressure or possible malfunction in Tiretronics. Refer to Tiretronics section in INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES/WHEELS AND TYRES chapter for further details
18
Graphic
Seat Belt Warning telltale
No
Continuously ON
If telltale is not turning OFF even after fastening the seat belt, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance
19
Graphic
SCR/DEF malfunction telltale*
No
Continuously ON
It indicates that either DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF has been filled or DEF Dosing is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”
20
Graphic
DPF telltale*
No
ON/Blink
If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DPF regeneration has not happened. Follow the instructions mentioned in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”
21
Graphic
Glow Plug telltale*
No.
Continuously ON
Indicates glow plugs are active.
22
Graphic
Head Lamp High Beam
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Head lamp high beam is ON
23
Graphic
OBD telltale
Yes
Continuously ON or Blinking
Telltale will be ON till engine starts. After engine starts, if is still ON there is a potential malfunction related to emission system, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
24
Graphic
EPS Warning telltale*
Yes
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction on Electronic Power steering system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
25
Graphic
Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning telltale
No
Continuously ON
Telltale will be ON in ignition ON But engine is OFF. In engine ON condition, it indicates engine oil pressure is low. Check oil level and top-up or contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance
26
Graphic
Check Engine telltale
Yes
Continuously ON or Blinking
Indicates a potential malfunction in the EMS, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
27
Graphic
Battery Charging System Warning telltale
No
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction in charging system. Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance
28
Graphic
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning telltale
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Engine temperature very high. Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
29
Graphic
REGEN telltale*
NO
ON/Blink
ON: Regeneration is required
Blink: Regeneration is in progress
30
Graphic
AT Warning telltale*
No
Continuously ON or Blink
Telltale is used to indicate an AT fault. Telltale Continuous ON means AT Fault. Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately if the MIL Lamp doesn’t turn off after an ignition reset.
Blinking Telltale implies overheating of clutch due to abuse conditions. This is only to warn the customer and to prevent clutch damage. Telltale will turn off once the clutch temperature has becomes normal.
31
Graphic
HDC Malfunction telltale*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of Hill Hold Control. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
32
Graphic
Rear Fog lamp telltale*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Rear fog lamp is ON
33
Graphic
Engine Start/Stop telltale*
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
CONTINUOUSLY ON: Engine is in auto stop mode Blinking: Stop/Start is about to stop the engine FAST BLINKING: Stop/Start is inhibited due to unhealthy battery conditions
34
Graphic
Automatic Emergency Braking System OFF telltale*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates AEB system is turned off by user.
35
Graphic
Lane Keep Assist System*(LKA)
No
Continuously ON
Indicates LKA system is in Standby state
Graphic
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Indicates LKA system is in Active state Blinking: LKA system providing Warning to the user
Graphic
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
LKAS System fail/Malfunction. This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with LKAS system.Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately Blinking: Camera not calibrated properly
36
Graphic
Lane Departure Warning System*(LDW)
No
Continuously ON
Indicates LDW system is in Standby state
Graphic
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Indicates LDW system is in Active state Blinking: LDW system providing Warning to the user
Graphic
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
LDW System fail/Malfunction. This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with LDWS system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately Blinking: Camera not calibrated properly
37
Graphic
Smart Pilot Assist*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Smart Pilot Assist is in Standby state
Graphic
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Indicates Smart Pilot Assist is in Active state
Graphic
No
Continuously ON
Smart Pilot Assist system fail/Malfunction. This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with SPA system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
38
Graphic
Adaptive Cruise Control*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system is in standby state.
Graphic
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system is in active state.
Graphic
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system temporarily not available due to temporary abnormal condition. Check if radar is blocked and clean.
Graphic
No
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of Adaptive cruise control system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
39
Graphic
Auto High Beam Boost*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Auto headlamp booster is in active state when the vehicle speed crosses 80kmph with high beam ON
40
Graphic
High Beam Assist*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates high beam assist function is enabled/active.
41
Graphic
Auto Vehicle Hold*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Auto Vehicle Hold in standby Mode.
Graphic
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Auto Vehicle Hold in Active Mode.
Graphic
No
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of Auto Vehicle Hold. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
42
Graphic
AWD Malfunction*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of AWD. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
43
Graphic
EPB Malfunction*
Yes
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of Electric Parking Brake. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
* if equipped / select models or variants only
3.20 Warning Lamps in the Instrument Cluster
3.20.1 Turn Lamps
Graphic
The turn lamp arrows in the instrument cluster flash showing the direction indicated by the turn signals. A sudden increase in the rate of flashing indicates failure of one or more of the lamp bulbs. Have them replaced as soon as possible.
3.20.2 Cruise Indicator (if equipped)
Graphic
The lamp indicates the status of the cruise mode. Lamp ON indicates the vehicle is in cruise mode by pressing the SET+ button on the steering wheel switch bank.
Blinking indicates that the accelerator pedal is pressed when in cruise mode allowing for an overtake.
When CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel switch bank is pressed, cruise mode is deactivated and the lamp goes OFF indicating that the vehicle is not in cruise mode.
If the lamp does not illuminate when the vehicle is in cruise mode or does not go OFF when the vehicle is out of cruise mode, there is a possible malfunction in the lamp or the cruise control system. Have the vehicle checked by a Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
3.20.3 Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The water-in-fuel warning lamp illuminates when the accumulation of water in the fuel filter reaches the maximum permissible limit. The fuel filter needs to be drained. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with the Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp ON. This may result in fuel pump / other fuel system component damage, which will not be covered by the warranty.
3.20.4 Immobiliser
Graphic
Immobiliser Lamp flashes intermittently (few secs. frequency) once the ignition is switched OFF and the vehicle security system is armed (when locked using the RKE).
Fast blinking indicates a malfunction in the engine immobiliser system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
3.20.5 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Malfunction Lamp
Graphic
If the ABS malfunction lamp is ON when driving ABS will not operate. But the brake system will still operate conventionally. In this condition, the wheels can lock during severe braking. Have the vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as possible.
However, if ABS malfunction lamp and brake warning lamp are simultaneously glowing, there is a severe malfunction in the ABS. Operate the vehicle with extreme care and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
if ABS malfunction lamp and parking brake warning lamp are simultaneously ON, there is a severe malfunction in the ABS. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
In this case, the ABS function is not available, but the conventional brake system is properly working
3.20.6 Parking Brake Lamp
Graphic
The lamp illuminates when Parking brake is engaged or when brake fluid level is low or there is malfunction in EBD. If the lamp illuminates while driving, do the following:
A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the brake as well as ABS warning lamps.
•  Check if the parking brake/ Electric parking brake is engaged. If yes, disengage it
•  Check if brake fluid level is low. If yes, top-up brake fluid to the required level
•  Check if front brake pad is worn out. If yes, replace the front brake pads
Clean the top of the brake fluid reservoir before removing the cap. Make sure no dirt, impurities or other items fall into the reservoir. Do not leave the cap off for more than a few minutes. Any contaminants, impurities or moisture in the brake fluid can affect brake operation, resulting in an accident.
If the brake warning lamp comes ON while driving, the brake system might not be working properly. The pedal might be harder to operate or might go closer to the floor and it can take longer to stop. Pull off the road carefully and stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for checks or repairs.
Driving the vehicle with the brake warning lamp ON or when you suspect brake trouble is very dangerous and could result in serious injuries. Have your vehicle towed to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
When the EBD system is not functioning the vehicle could be unstable during the hard braking. Therefore you must pay attention to the driving conditions while this warning light.
3.20.7  Electric Parking Brake Malfunction (EPB) (If equipped)
Graphic
The EPB Lamp illuminates, when there is a malfunction in EBP. The lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned ON and then goes off after about 4 seconds.
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre
If you must park the vehicle with faulty EPB, safely pull over and stop the vehicle on a flat surface and shift the gear selector lever to the P position
3.20.8 Park Lamp
Graphic
The Park lamp indicator illuminates whenever park lamp is switched ON through Combination switch. When ignition is switched OFF and if park lamp is ON with driver door open, and alert will be audible.
3.20.9 Airbag Warning Lamp
Graphic
If the lamp remains ON continuously or flash intermittently, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
Following conditions indicate airbag malfunction:
•  Lamp fails to go OFF after engine is started
•  Lamp does not illuminate at all
•  Illuminates while driving
Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately when the airbag warning lamp indicates a system malfunction. The airbag may not deploy when needed, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly or unnecessarily, which may result in personal injury.
3.20.10 HHC malfunction (if equipped)
Graphic
HHC Malfunction Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and then goes off after about 4 seconds. if there is any malfunction in hill hold control system of the vehicle.
There are chances of vehicle rolling down when starting on a hill. No assistance will be available from ESP system.
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre
3.20.11 Door Ajar Warning Lamp
Graphic
The door ajar warning lamp illuminates when any of the doors including the hood and back door are open during ignition ON. The buzzer chimes when the vehicle speed more than 2 kmph. The lamp and chime goes OFF when all the doors are closed properly.
3.20.12 Low Fuel Warning Lamp
Graphic
When the fuel level in the fuel tank falls below the reserve limit, the low fuel warning lamp is illuminated. Refuel sufficiently and the lamp goes out. If the lamp continues to remain ON even after refuelling, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
3.20.13 ESC OFF Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The ESC OFF lamp illuminates when the ESC has been switched OFF manually.
This lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and then goes off after about 4 seconds. Pressing and holding the ESC OFF switch (for more than 3 seconds) turns on the indicator lamp indicating that the ESC function is deactivated.
3.20.14 ESC System Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
While driving, if the ESC system warning lamp blinks, it indicates that ESC has taken control of the vehicle stability. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates the malfunction in the ESC System. Contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre
3.20.15 Front Fog Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The front fog lamp telltale indicates the status of the front fog lamp. The front fog lamp can be switched ON only when the parking lamp is ON.
Fog lamp will turn ON, if fitted in the vehicle.
3.20.16 Engine Stop/Start Lamp (If equipped)
Graphic
The Engine Stop/Start lamp flashes when the vehicle/engine is about to stop through the Engine Stop/ Start System. The lamp illuminates continuously when the vehicle/engine has been switched OFF by the Engine Stop/Start System. On restarting the vehicle / engine again by using the clutch/key, the lamp goes out.
3.20.17 Tiretronics (if equipped)
Graphic
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION : Tiretronics lamp Blink for approx. 90 sec & then Continuous ON.

SYSTEM WARNINGS: Tiretronics lamp Continuous ON.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION:  System fail to function normally due to system failure/Sensor failure.
SYSTEM WARNING: indicated Low/High Tyre pressure, High Temperature, Air Leakage.
3.20.18 Seat Belt Warning Lamp
Graphic
The seat belt warning lamp illuminates and the buzzer chimes reminding the driver to fasten the seat belt when the ignition is ON and vehicle running condition. The lamp will continue to illuminate till the driver fastens the seat belt properly.
3.20.19 DPF Indicator Lamp (If equipped)
Graphic
If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DPF regeneration has not happened. Follow the instructions mentioned in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”.
3.20.20 DEF Indicator Lamp (If equipped)
Graphic
If the DEF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF has been filled or DEF Dosing is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM’.
3.20.21 Glow Plug Indicator (If equipped)
Graphic
Glow plug indicator illuminates when the ignition is turned ON and Glow plug is activated. It automatically goes OFF when the glow plug reaches the required temperature. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer, if it illuminates while driving.
3.20.22 Head Lamp High Beam
Graphic
The head lamp high beam telltale illuminates whenever the head lamps are switched ON to high beam or when the head lamp flash is used.
3.20.23 Auto Head Lamp Booster (If equipped)
Graphic
The Auto Head Lamp booster telltale will come on when vehicle speed crosses 80 kmph with High beam ON
​The booster telltale will turn OFF automatically when vehicle speed comes below 75 kmph
3.20.24 OBD Check Lamp
Graphic
The OBD check lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and remains ON till the engine is started indicating normal status. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates a potential malfunction.
There may be a malfunction in:
•  The fuel management system
•  The emission control system
•  Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
3.20.25 EPS Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The lamp Indicates malfunction on Electric Power steering system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
When EPS is failed. vehicle can still be driven with increase in steering effort.
3.20.26 Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
Graphic
The low engine oil pressure warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF when the engine is started. If the lamp remains ON even after starting the engine, or illuminates while driving, stop immediately, check the oil level after 2-3 minutes. If low, add engine oil to the “MAX” level and check status. If problem persists, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
Operating the vehicle with the low oil pressure warning lamp ON could cause sudden unexpected engine failure and loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Do not run the engine with low oil pressure warning indicator ON. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered by the limited warranty.
3.20.27 Check Engine Lamp
Graphic
Indicating normal status. The lamp blinks or illuminates continuously if there is a fault in the engine management system. Switch OFF the engine immediately. Contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for necessary repairs.
3.20.28 Battery Charging System Warning Lamp
Graphic
The battery charging system warning lamp illuminates when the battery is not being charged or when there is a malfunction in the alternator.
This lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes out as soon as the engine is started. If the lamp continues to remain ON even after starting the engine, it is an indication that the battery is not being charged or there is a malfunction in the alternator. Check the alternator drive belt for looseness/breakage. If the drive belt is okay, switch OFF all unnecessary electrical equipment and recheck. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
3.20.29 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp
Graphic
The high engine coolant temperature warning lamp flashes when the coolant temperature is above 113ºC . It starts to flash when the temperature reaches 113ºC and will be continuously ON with buzzer alert when the temperature reaches 115ºC.
The bars in the temperature gauge also flash in the same frequency as the high temperature warning lamp when the above set temperature thresholds are reached.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered by the limited warranty.
3.20.30 Regen Indicator Lamp (If equipped)
Graphic
if it is continuously ON, It indicates the DPF Manual Regeneration is required. It will blink when Manual regeneration is in progress. Follow the instructions mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM’.
3.20.31 AT Warning Lamp (If equipped)
Graphic
•  This warning lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned on and it goes off when the engine is started.
•  If the lamp stays ON or comes ON while driving, some of the Transmission control components including sensors and devices may be malfunctioning.
•  If the Indicator lamp is blinking continuously, reduce the vehicle speed until the lamp stops blinking. Contact the Mahindra dealer as soon as possible.
3.20.32 HDC Malfunction (if equipped)
Graphic
The lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and goes off after about 4 seconds. Hill Descent Control or HDC malfunction warning lamp indicates malfunction in HDC system. Contact nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre
3.20.33 LDW System Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
If there is a problem with the LDW system, a message (Lane Departure Warning unavailable) will appear for a few seconds. If the problem continues the LDWS failure indicator (yellow) will illuminate . We recommend you to Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
Graphic
Illuminates
LDW system is in Standby mode
Graphic
Illuminates
LDW system is in Active state
Graphic
Illuminates
LDW system is in Not Working/Fail state
When there is a problem with the system, do one of the following::
•  Check if the system is affected by the weather. (e.g. fog, heavy rain, etc.)
•  Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
•  If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
LDW System Warning Lamp with blinking:
If the Front Camera (FCM) is not calibrated properly, means this warning lamp blinks continuously. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
3.20.34 LKA System Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
If there is a problem with the LKAS system, a message (Lane Keep Assist unavailable) will appear for a few seconds. If the problem continues the LKAS failure indicator (yellow) will illuminates. We recommend you to Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
Graphic
Illuminates
LKA system is in Standby state
Graphic
Illuminates
LKA system is in Active state
Graphic
Illuminates
LKA system is in Not Working/Fail state
When there is a problem with the system, do one of the following:
•  Check if the system is affected by the weather. (e.g. fog, heavy rain, etc.)
•  Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
•  If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
LKA System Warning Lamp with blinking:
If the Front Camera (FCM) is not calibrated properly, this warning lamp blinks continuously. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
3.20.35 Automatic Emergency Braking ON/OFF Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The warning light illuminates on the LCD display, when user turned OFF the AEB system. The driver can monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on the LCD display. If the warning light remains ON when the AEB is activated, we recommend you to have the system checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance
3.20.36 Automatic Emergency Braking Warning/Malfunction Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
This warning lamp Indicates temporary or permanent fault in Automatic Emergency braking system.
The warning light illuminates When the radar/camera sensor or cover is blocked with dirt /snow or if there is permanent failure.
•  Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth.
•  Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
•  If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
3.20.37 High Beam Assist Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
This warning light illuminates when the driver sets HBA ON/OFF via cluster and Auto Light Switch to ON and Head Lamp Switch to High.
•  Check if the system is affected by the weather. (e.g. fog, heavy rain, etc.)
•  Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
3.20.38 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system temporarily not available due to temporary abnormal condition.
Graphic
Illuminates
ACC system is in Standby state
Graphic
Illuminates
ACC system is in Active state
Graphic
Illuminates
ACC system temporarily not available due to temporary abnormal condition
Graphic
Illuminates
ACC system is Not Working/Fail State
The warning light illuminates When the radar/camera sensor or cover is blocked with dirt or snow.
•  Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth.
•  Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
Graphic
Indicates permanent failure of Adaptive cruise control system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
3.20.39 Smart Pilot Assist Warning Lamp (If equipped)
Graphic
The warning light illuminates on the LCD display when SPA system is in fail/Malfunction

Graphic
Illuminates
SPA system is in Standby state
Graphic
Illuminates
SPA system is in Active state
Graphic
Illuminates
SPA system is in Not Working/Fail state
The warning light illuminates When the radar sensor/Camera sensor or cover is blocked with dirt or snow or if there is permanent failure.
•  Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth.
•  Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
3.20.40 All Wheel Drive Malfunction (AWD) (If equipped)
Graphic
The warning light illuminates on the display when AWD system is in Malfunction
3.20.41 Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) (If equipped)
The AVH Lamp illuminates, there is a malfunction in AVH.
Graphic
Illuminates
There is a malfunction in AVH
Graphic
Illuminates
AVH is in Standby mode
Graphic
Illuminates
AVH is in Active mode
•  When the AUTO HOLD switch is operated, the AUTO HOLD system will be switched to READY mode and the "AUTO HOLD" indicator on the instrument cluster will be illuminated in white.
•  Operating the AUTO HOLD switch again turns off the indicator and deactivates the AUTO HOLD system.
If the yellow AUTO HOLD warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre
4 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your Vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control system which are as follows.
1. Crankcase emission control system
2. Evaporative emission control system
3. Exhaust emission control system
To ensure optimal functioning of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected and maintained by an authorised Mahindra dealer.
Emission Control Systems for Petrol vehicles
It is a highly effective system that controls exhaust emissions from an engine. It is crucial for meeting emission standards specified by law.
Your vehicle is equipped with a three-way catalytic converter (TWC) for meeting BS VI emission norms.
For optimal functioning of the emission control system, it is mandatory to get your vehicle inspected and maintained by a Authorised Mahindra Dealer. The maintenance schedule in owner’s manual should be followed.
In addition, it is important to use the correct grade of fuel, confirming IS 2796:2017 BS VI specification.
Three-Way Catalytic Converter (TWC)
It is an exhaust after treatment component that is designed to convert carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC), nitrogen oxides (NOx) into carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N) and water (H2O).
Emission Control System for Diesel vehicles
The emission control system is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions from the engine and crucial for meeting emission norms specified by law.
Your vehicle is equipped with the following emission control systems for meeting BS VI emission norms.
1. Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC)
2. Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR)
3. Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
To ensure optimal functioning of the emission control systems, it is mandatory to get your vehicle inspected and maintained by a Authorised Mahindra Dealer. The maintenance schedule in the Warranty & Service Information Guide need to be followed.
It is also extremely important to use correct grade of fuel, Confirming to IS 1460:2017 BS VI Specification.
4.1 Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC)
A diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC) is an after-treatment component that is designed to convert carbon monoxide (CO) and hydrocarbons (HC) into carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O).
4.2 Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR)
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) is an advanced active emission control technology system that injects a liquid-reducing agent through a special catalyst into the exhaust stream of a diesel engine. The reductant is called as Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF). The DEF sets off a chemical reaction that converts nitrogen oxides into nitrogen and water which is then expelled through the vehicle tailpipe.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) MaxiCLEAN
To enable the SCR system to work efficiently and to ensure emission compliance, it is recommended to use MaxiCLEAN DEF meeting IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification.
Replenishing DEF is part of regular maintenance service. DEF consumption is highly dependent on driving conditions/pattern and it may be necessary to refill the DEF reservoir in-between the scheduled service if need be, You are advised to monitor DEF Indicator Tell Tale and symbols/text messages displayed on the Cluster.
MaxiCLEAN DEF is available at all the Authorised Mahindra Dealers in packs of variable capacities. Individual DEF Packs may have specific filler neck, for filling DEF in the vehicle. While refilling DEF, take care to avoid spillage on your body or outer panels of the vehicle to avoid any stains or inconvenience.
It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of the after-treatment system. It is strongly recommended not to use DEF which does not meet the above specification. Further, this may lead to emission non-compliance and warranty getting void.
•  Use Genuine DEF MaxiCLEAN always.
•  Incase of non-availability of the above mentioned MaxiCLEAN Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) complying to IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification can be used.
•  Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the necessary specifications and the after treatment system of your vehicle may be damaged.
•  Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never exceed 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/component failure.
•  DEF quality and purity can be ensured only if it is stored as per recommendations. Hence ensure to store DEF in a cool, dry place.
•  Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water. This may cause damage to the after treatment system.
•  While refilling DEF be careful not to allow any foreign particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or lint to get inside the system. These may clog or damage the system.
•  While refilling DEF, use only the pipe supplied with the MaxiCLEAN. Do not use any funnel or container. Any contamination with Diesel or oils will cause malfunction of the after treatment system.
•  If DEF accidently spill over vehicle components or metal surfaces, rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and water. DEF residues will corrode the components, metal surfaces and painted body panels.
•  DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel, engine/fuel system could get damaged.
•  In such a case, do not start the engine and immediately contact nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance.
Contamination/ Incorrect DEF: If incorrect or contaminated fluid is filled inside DEF Tank, contact an authorized M&M dealer to determine the appropriate repair procedure.
Handling of DEF
•  Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin, eyes, or clothing
•  Keep DEF out of the reach of children
•  In case if any part of the body comes in contact with DEF, clean affected area immediately with plenty of water
•  If DEF comes in contact with eyes, flush with plenty of water immediately and seek medical help.
•  If DEF is swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water, drink plenty of water immediately and seek medical help.
•  Refrain from storing DEF refill containers inside the vehicle. Ammonia vapors may escape from the container which have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating to the skin, mucous membranes and eyes. Inhaling ammonia vapors may cause irritation to the eyes, nose and throat, as well as cough.
•  When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may escape. Therefore ensure to refill DEF in a well- ventilated area only.
•  If Diesel Exhaust Fluid is spilled on metal surfaces rinse and clean immediately with water. Failure to do so may leave permanent corrosive stains on the metal surfaces which cannot be removed.
DEF Operating Condition: DEF will freeze at -11°C (12.2°F). This is a natural phenomenon. The DEF system in the vehicle is designed considering this and does not require any external heating or additives to avoid freezing.
The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) system purges to prevent damage from freezing. Do NOT disconnect battery power within 20 minutes of switching the ignition key off. Failure to comply may result in vehicle or property damage.
Refilling DEF: Your Vehicle DEF Filler Neck is located beside the Fuel filler Neck. The DEF storage tank is located under the body.
Following below are the steps to refill the DEF:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground and switch OFF the ignition.
Graphic
2. Press the key fob unlock button and Press the fuel lid gently once to open.
3. Rotate the DEF filler cap in anti-clockwise direction and remove.
4. Fill DEF from the Container Pack. Each container pack has a unique mouth and filling provision. Ensure utilizing the same to avoid spillage. Example. 10 Liter Pack provided with filler tube.
5. Fill DEF as required. Maximum Storage capacity is 20 liters. Minimum quantity to be filled is 6.0 liters.
6. Rinse with water or use sponge wetted with water to clean the components/surfaces in case the DEF spills over.
7. Put the DEF filler cap back in its place and tighten in the clock wise direction, then close the fuel lid shut.
8. Switch the ignition ON
9. Verify that there is no warning regarding DEF low level. If the DEF Level Low warning is still appearing, check if enough quantity is filled, If still problem persist contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
10. DEF is being monitored through iSmart tool during regular service at dealership and the required quantity will be filled accordingly.
It is highly recommended to DEF filling always at Ignition off condition only
4.2.1 SCR Alerts
Introduction
Graphic
DEF telltale will turn ON and an error message with code will be displayed on the cluster screen due to any of the following reasons:
•  DEF level low
•  Incorrect DEF detected
•  DEF dosing malfunction
It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of the after-treatment system. It is strongly recommended not to use DEF which does not meet the specification. Further, this may lead to emission non-compliance and warranty getting void.
4.2.2 DEF Level Indication
When DEF level in the tank falls below pre-defined values, warnings are flashed in stages as explained below:
Irrespective of the warning stages, once DEF level is low, a minimum of 6.0 liters of DEF needs to be filled. If the warnings continue even after refill, contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
E31
E32
E33
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
E34
E35
 
Graphic
Graphic
 
In absence of DEF level low warning, refilling is not recommended.
Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never be more than 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/component failure. Only a Authorised Mahindra Dealer will be able to correctly determine the quantity of DEF present inside the tank. Hence if you are refilling the DEF yourself, fill only 6.0 liters in case the DEF Low level warning is flashed.
If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF level, refill the DEF tank. Failure to refill may cause engine start restriction.
4.2.3 DEF Quality
If SCR system detects the quality of DEF inside the tank is not meeting IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification, warnings will be flashed in stages as explained below:
E11
E12
E13
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
E14
E15
 
Graphic
Graphic
 
If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF quality, visit the nearest Authorised Mahindra dealer to have this repaired. Failure to repair the system may cause the engine start restriction.
4.2.4 DEF Dosing Malfunction
If SCR system detects any malfunction due to failures in components or tampering, warnings are flashed in stages as explained below:
E21
E22
E23
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
E24
E25
 
Graphic
Graphic
 
If the DEF telltale turns on due to dosing malfunction, visit an Authorised Mahindra Dealer to have this repaired. Failure to repair the system may cause engine start restriction.
4.3 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
The Diesel particulate filter (DPF) is an integral part of the vehicle exhaust gas emission reduction systems and it removes the soot (Particulate matter) from the exhaust gas. Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF is a regenerative filter. Regeneration is triggered automatically according to vehicle driving conditions which burns the accumulated particles/soot from the DPF. The process is called as DPF Active Regeneration.
However, if the vehicle continues to be driven in the below conditions the accumulated soot may not be automatically removed because of low exhaust gas temperatures.
1. Heavy traffic driving conditions, especially in the city
2. Frequent short trips
3. Low speed for a long time
When more than a certain amount of soot gets deposited, the DPF telltale turns ON along with the DPF clogged alert.
Graphic
Graphic
If the DPF telltale turns ON when driving the vehicle, it indicates that the DPF regeneration has not occurred successfully. At this moment, we suggest DPF regeneration must be done as mentioned below:
Take the vehicle to an empty stretch of road/highway and drive for 20 – 30 mins @ speeds above 60 km/hr until the telltale turns off.
•  Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as defined by local jurisdiction while driving.
If the DPF telltale starts blinking, perform DPF park regeneration following the below procedure.
If the OBD telltale is ON & DPF telltale blinking. Stop the vehicle and contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra dealer for assistance.
Continuous driving with DPF telltale blinking may lead to failure of exhaust system components
DPF Park Regeneration
DPF park regeneration is the procedure to start a DPF regeneration when the vehicle is stationary from the instrument cluster. Follow the below steps to perform Park Regeneration. The DPF park regeneration is only possible when the REGEN telltale is ON in the instrument cluster.
•  Park the vehicle safely in a well ventilated levelled open space and free of any flammable material.
•  Shift the gear lever to Neutral with the engine running and apply the parking brake.
•  Access the Drive info menu in the instrument cluster and press the down button to go to the REGEN screen, REGEN screen will appear only when the REGEN telltale is ON.
Graphic
•  REGEN screen will go OFF if REGEN telltale turns OFF.
•  When in the REGEN screen of the drive info menu, long Press OK button on the steering wheel or the driver side switch bank to start park regeneration.
•  Once regeneration starts, “In Progress” text will appear below REGEN. The engine idle speed will increase indicating regeneration has started.
Graphic
•  Park Regeneration can take up to 30 minutes to complete. Once completed the REGEN telltale in the instrument cluster will turn OFF. The engines idling speed also returns to normal.
•  To abort the Park regeneration in case of any emergency, turn OFF the ignition or press any of the Accelerator, Brake or Clutch Pedals.
•  If the Park Regeneration gets aborted by itself or does not start, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance.
•  During the regeneration process, ensure not to park the vehicle close to any flammable materials as you may observe hot emission gases from exhaust pipe.
•  To avoid burns & personal injury, keep yourself away from exhaust system.
Park Regeneration process will not start if CHECK ENGINE LAMP or OBD are ON in the cluster. Take your vehicle to a Authorised Mahindra dealer for assistance.
When Park regeneration is happening do not press the Accelerator, Brake, Clutch pedals or change the gear from Neutral or Park as this will abort the regeneration process.
Diesel Fuel
It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel confirming to IS 1460: 2017 spec only.
If the diesel fuel with high sulfur content (more than 10 PPM) and unspecified additives are used, it can cause damage to the DPF system and will not be covered under warranty.
4.4 Instrument Cluster Telltales for DPF & SCR Systems
Graphic
For other regional languages, Kindly refer the Annexure chapter at the end of this manual.
Graphic
Do's & Don’ts
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
•  Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) complying to IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification can be used.
•  Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the necessary specifications and the after-treatment system of your vehicle may be damaged.
•  Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water. This may cause damage to the treatment system.
•  Total DEF quantity inside the DEF tank should never exceed 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/component failure.
•  While refilling DEF inside tank be careful not to allow any foreign particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or lint to get inside the system. These may clog or damage the system.
•  DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel, engine/fuel system could get damaged
•  If DEF is spilled over vehicle components and metal surfaces, rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and water. DEF residues will corrode the components and metal surfaces, painted body panels
•  Do not refill the DEF with Engine ON or ignition ON state
•  When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may escape. Refill DEF in a well - ventilated area only.
•  Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin, eyes, or clothing
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
During the regeneration process, ensure not to park the vehicle near any flammable materials as you may observe hot emission gases from exhaust pipe.
To avoid burns & personal injury, keep yourself away from exhaust system.
Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as defined by local jurisdiction while driving.
5 OPENING AND CLOSING THE VEHICLE
XUV700 comes with RKE or PKE depending on the variant.
Graphic
Your key tag number is given on the tag attached to the key. It is recommended that you record the key tag number and store in a safe place. The keys operate all locks in your vehicle including those of the doors and ignition with steering lock.
Never leave the key in the ignition switch with children in the vehicle. A child could switch on the ignition, start the engine, operate power windows and other controls, or move the vehicle, resulting in personal injuries to the by stander and/or children seated inside.
5.1 Doors
5.1.1 Flush Outer Door Handle
XUV700 comes with the flush outer door handle. It comes with two types:
i). Manually operated ii). Electrically operated
i). Manually operated
Graphic
•  Unlock the center locking with RKE /PKE key fob unlock button (Refer center locking chapter for details)
Graphic
•  Push the flush handle once as shown the image
Graphic
•  Door handle will popup as shown
Graphic
•  Pull the handle firmly outwards and open the door.
Graphic
•  Door handle will return to the original position automatically when the handle is released after opening the door
ii). Electrically operated
unlock the center locking with RKE /PKE key fob unlock button (Refer center locking chapter for details)
Graphic
•  Door handle will popup automatically as shown without touching the handle
Graphic
•  Pull the handle firmly outwards and open the door.
•  Door handle will return to its original position when the vehicle is locked by RKE / PKE key fob or the vehicle speed exceeds 7 kmph
5.1.2 To Open a Door from Inside
Graphic
Pull the door lever away from the door and push the door outward to open.
5.1.3 Locking / Unlocking Individual Doors from Inside
Pull the door lever away from the door and push the door outward to open.
Graphic
A: Lock
B: Unlock
Individual doors can be locked/unlocked from inside by the respective door lock tabs. Lift the lock tab outwards to unlock or press the tab inwards to lock that particular door.
Locking the driver door from inside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further details.
5.1.4 Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from Outside (Mechanical Handle)
Graphic
Push the handle slightly as shown in the image.
Graphic
Pull the handle firmly outwards and grip & pull the handle further to gain access for the key.
Graphic
The driver door can be manually locked/unlocked from outside by using conventional key. The key is bidirectional; you can insert it into the keyhole either way. Turn the key anti-clockwise to lock or clockwise to unlock the door.
Conventional locking is on driver door side only, No key lock set on codriver door.
For unlocking insert the key and rotate it in clockwise gently (don’t apply abusive load). Take out the key to return the handle to nominal position and pull back the handle to open the door.
For locking, Pull the handle and same time press the door with knee so that door is not getting unlatched (as handle goes to release mode) insert the key and rotate the key anti-clockwise gently. Take out the key and leave the handle to nominal position. Pull the handle once to ensure locking happen properly.
A keyhole is provided in the driver door, to lock/unlock the doors manually from outside. Locking the driver door from outside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further details.
5.1.5 Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from Outside (Electrical Handle)
Graphic
Push the handle slightly as shown in the image.
Graphic
Push handle as shown in the Picture and grip & pull the handle further to gain  access for the key.
Graphic
The driver door can be manually locked/unlocked from outside by using conventional key. The key is bidirectional; you can insert it into the keyhole either way. Turn the key anti-clockwise to lock or clockwise to unlock the door.
Conventional locking is on driver door side only, No key lock set on codriver door.
For unlocking insert the key and rotate it in clockwise gently (don’t apply abusive load). Take out the key to return the handle to nominal position and pull back the handle to open the door.
For locking, Pull the handle and same time press the door with knee so that door is not getting unlatched (as handle goes to release mode) insert the key and rotate is anti-clockwise gently. Take out the key and leave the handle to nominal position. Pull the handle once to ensure locking happen properly.
A keyhole is provided in the driver door, to lock/unlock the doors manually from outside.
Locking the driver door from outside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further details.
5.1.6 Locking / Unlocking the Tailgate
Graphic
Press the Tailgate release button for 1 second on the remote to unlock the tail door. The hazard lamp flash three times indicating the same.
Graphic
Then press the tail gate release switch on the bottom of the tailgate within 45 second as shown in the illustration and pull tailgate to open.
To close the tailgate, lower the tailgate half way down and allow it fall on its own weight. The door will be locked automatically.
5.1.7 Tailgate Safety Release Lever
Graphic
Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate inside. In an emergency condition the passenger can open the tailgate from inside the vehicle.
The tailgate can be opened by the following steps:
1. Insert the mechanical key into the hole.
2. Slide the mechanical key to the left side and hold the key in the same position to open the tail gate.
5.2 Central Locking System
All doors of the vehicle can be simultaneously locked or unlocked from the driver door.
5.2.1 Central Locking/Unlocking All Doors from Outside
To manually lock/unlock all the doors from outside using the conventional key, turn the key anti-clockwise /clockwise respectively in the driver door keyhole.
If any door was unlocked or not closed completely when central locking activated. It will only get locked when the door is completely closed..
Central locking ALL the doors in the vehicle can also be done using the key fob. Refer the relevant sections in this chapter for more details.
5.2.2 Central Locking/Unlocking All Doors from Inside
Graphic
Press the driver door lock tab down (A) to lock or lift the lock tab up (B) to unlock all doors simultaneously.
Anti-Lock Out
Master Actuator Lock at Door open (Except Driver Door) — If any door is opened and driver door is in closed condition:
•  Vehicle speed is below 7 kmph - On actuating master actuator lock manually, master actuator will get lock & unlock immediately for the first time. On actuating master actuator lock again, vehicle will get locked.
•  Vehicle speed above 7 kmph - On actuating master actuator lock manually, vehicle will get locked for the first time itself.
If driver door is open and master actuator lock is performed, vehicle will not get locked
5.2.3 Child Safety Rear Door lock (If equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right-side child safety rear door locks. When the lock mechanism is engaged, the rear door(s) cannot be opened from the inside. The door(s) can only be opened from the outside.
To activate the child safety right rear door lock, push the lever down (A) till you hear a distinct click indicating the activation of the child lock.
To de-activate the child safety right rear door lock, pull the lever up (B) till you hear a distinct click indicating the deactivation of the child lock.
Graphic
A: Activate/Lock
B:De-activate/Unlock
If the rear doors are not operable from inside, ensure that the child safety locks have been disabled.
Mahindra strongly recommends that the child safety rear door locks be used whenever there are children travelling in the rear seat.
5.3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Graphic
A: LED
B: Lock
C: Tailgate Release / Search
D: Unlock
5.3.1 Precautions while Handling Remote Key
•  Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF signal
•  Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or bonnet under direct sunlight
•  Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer
5.3.2 Remote Key Status LED
LED present on Remote would be indicating the user about the Remote lock/unlock/trunk button input.
5.3.3 To Lock and Arm the Vehicle with RKE
Graphic
Press the LOCK button on the RKE key fob for locking and arming the vehicle.
Hazard lamps flash once - if all the doors in the vehicle are locked and armed successfully using RKE.
Hazard lamps flash five times along with an alarm - if any of the doors (including bonnet) in the vehicle are open.
If alarm is in mute condition only the Hazard lamps will flash. If alarm to be activated then Press Lock & Unlock button together to unmute the alarm. Now both Hazard lamps flash and alarm will work.
5.3.4 Unlock and Disarm the Vehicle with RKE
Graphic
Press the UNLOCK button on the RKE key fob to unlock and disarm the vehicle.
Hazard lamps flash twice - if there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.
Front DRL & Tail lamps flash twice (If equipped)- if there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.
Hazard lamps flash four times along with an alarm - if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.
Upon the remote lock, if any of the doors are not closed properly or left open, the hazard lamps will flash five times to indicate the same.
5.3.5 Auto Locking
All doors will get locked automatically when;
•  All doors are closed properly
•  Vehicle speed is greater than 7 kmph
Auto Locking ON DOOR OPEN — Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the auto lock will reactivate only if all doors are closed, the vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and further crosses 7 kmph
Auto Locking ON MASTER ACTUATOR UNLOCK — Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the auto lock will reactivate only if all doors are closed, the vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and further crosses 7 kmph
5.3.6 Auto Unlocking
Auto Unlock of all doors will happen in the following conditions:
•  When Ignition is switched from ON to OFF, OR In the event of a crash
5.3.7 Auto Re-locking
Auto Re-lock of all doors will happen when;
•  No door status change for 45 seconds after unlocking the vehicle using RKE/PKE
5.3.8 Search Function
Graphic
Press the Tailgate button on the key fob 2 times within 2 seconds to locate the vehicle in a parking lot. Search alarm can also bring attention to the vehicle and surrounding area, warning about an intruder or seek for help.
When the SEARCH function is ON, the hazard lamps flash along with an alarm for 30 sec. In this mode:
•  Pressing any button on the key fob again switches OFF the alarm
•  Pressing the UNLOCK button switches OFF the alarm and disarms/unlocks all doors
The search function works both during the Locked/Unlocked conditions of the vehicle.
5.3.9 Mute/ Unmute Function
Graphic
The chirps can be muted / unmute. Press the LOCK & UNLOCK buttons together for 3 sec. to toggle between MUTE / UNMUTE mode. Hazard lamps will flash once to indicate unmute to mute condition.
Hazard lamp & chirp will flash once to indicate Mute to un-mute.
In the unmuted condition, alarm chirps can be heard during Auto Re-lock (1 Chirp), RKE Lock when door open (5 Chirps) and RKE Unlock if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period (4 Chirps). In the mute condition, only hazard would flash and alarm chirps would not be audible.
In the unmuted condition,
•  Alarm chirps can be heard during Auto Re-lock (1 Chirp)
•  RKE Lock when door open (5 Chirps)
•  RKE Unlock if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period (4 Chirps)
In the mute condition,
•  Only hazard would flash and alarm chirps would not be audible.
5.3.10 Theft Alarm
Vehicle enters alarm mode when there is a change in door status/ignition status provided the vehicle was locked through RKE.
Hazard Lamp and Alarm will flash 27 seconds.
After the alarm period, there will not be any alarm again till any further change in the door/ignition status.
The security system will be activated when the vehicle is locked using the PKE/RKE key fob. Locking the doors with the manual key will also activate the security system.
When the vehicle is armed by RKE, opening the door from the inside by operating the door inner handle or opening the door from the outside using the key will be treated as unauthorised activating the vehicle security alarm. If this occurs, the alarm can be disarmed by either pressing the ‘UNLOCK’ button on the RKE or turning ON the ignition followed by a successful authentication.
5.3.11 RKE Operating Range
Graphic
Using RKE key fob , you can lock/arm or unlock/disarm the vehicle from distances approximately 9 m (30 ft) This is in open area.
If there is reduction in RKE range, please follow the steps below:
. Check the distance: The RKE may be too far from the vehicle. Stand closer to the vehicle during rain or bad weather
. Check the location: Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signals. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the RKE higher, and try again. Moreover, closeness to a radio transmitter such as radio station tower, airport transmitter, mobile or CB radios may lead to reduction in range of RKE
. Check the RKE battery: See battery replacement procedure, given later in this section
. If the RKE is still not working correctly, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
5.4 Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) System (if equipped)
Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) System enables you to enter or exit your vehicle without the need to manually lock/unlock the doors. You can start/stop, lock or unlock the vehicle using PKE. To do this, you only need carry the PKE key fob with you.
Graphic
A: LED
B: Lock
C: Tailgate Release / Search
D: Unlock
The front side of the PKE key fob has three control buttons: Unlock (D), Lock (B) and Tail gate release (C) buttons. There is also a emergency key release button, which releases a mechanical key for emergency purposes (E.g. when PKE battery is low). To remove the metal key, press and hold the release button and pull the mechanical key out.
•  While locking and unlocking the vehicle Passively, the distance between the Smart Key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3ft (1m).
•  Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF waves
•  Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or bonnet under direct sunlight
•  Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer
•  The PKE can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity
Carrying the PKE along with you, you can lock or unlock the doors and tail door and even start and stop the engine without inserting the key. Functions of the buttons on a PKE is similar to the remote keyless entry.
Locking the vehicle – Through Flush Handle(Electrical Handle)
1. Carry the PKE
2. Close all the doors
Graphic
3. Push the handle to lock the vehicle
4. The hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate the locking (5 blinks and 5 chirps will be provided if engine bonnet is open while locking)
•  Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside door handle
•  Vehicle can be locked centrally by pressing the door handle with the PKE key fob in the proximity (PKE key fob should be nearer to the triggered side). For E.g., locking/unlocking of the driver door is possible only if PKE is around the driver area
•  Even after pressing the outside door handle button, if the doors do not lock, a chime is heard along with the hazard blinking for 5 times, then one of the following situations are possible reason:
–  PKE Key fob is left inside the vehicle
–  One of the doors not closed properly
•  On attempting to lock by pressing the button in door handle, an alert will displayed in cluster, if the steering is not locked
•  With the one PKE Key fob inside, on locking the vehicle using other key fob/2nd key fob, the key which is kept inside would get deactivated completely for the security of the vehicle. To make the key active again, the vehicle should be unlocked either using PKE or by pressing remote unlock using the other key fob with which previously the vehicle was locked.
•  On performing PKE passive lock with key fob in your possession in ignition ON state, "Key Not in Vehicle" alert will be triggered in cluster along with chirp & hazard lamps flash for 5 times and vehicle will remain in unlock state.
•  On performing key fob remote lock with all doors closed in ignition ON state, no alert will be triggered and vehicle will remain in unlock state.
Unlocking the vehicle:
1. Carry the PKE Key fob
2. Press the button in the door handle
3. All doors would unlock and Front DRL & Tail lamps flash twice.
•  Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside driver door handle
•  Vehicle can be unlocked centrally by pressing the door handle only when the key is in same side of the driver door handle is pressed
Unlocking the Tail door alone:
1. Carry the PKE Key Fob
Graphic
2. Press the trunk release button in the tail door and pull the tail door
3. Tail door would unlock and hazard warning lights will blink 3 times
4. On closing the door, tail door would get locked automatically
•  Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside door handle
•  Tail door can be unlocked by pressing the button in the tail door only when the key is in range from the tail door
5.4.1 Engine START/STOP Switch (SSS) (if equipped)
Graphic
The engine can be started or stopped by pressing the Start Stop Switch (SSS), with the valid PKE Key Fob inside the vehicle.
Whenever the doors are opened or the door handle button is pressed, the engine start/stop button will be illuminated and will go off after few seconds.
Graphic
Upon any fault identification by the system in the start/stop switch (SSS), an alert would be provided in the instrument cluster for few seconds. Please visit the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately to rectify the problem.
Even with the failure in the start/stop switch, vehicle's normal function may work which depends on the severity of the failure. Please visit the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer to rectify the problem immediately.
Engine start/stop Switch positions:
To operate the engine start /stop switch to its intended function, PKE Key Fob should be inside the vehicle.
OFF: To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and press the engine start/stop button once. Status LED in the engine start /stop button goes OFF to indicate the OFF position.
If the Engine is not switching off after pressing the Engine Start Stop switch (One Press), then press and Hold start/stop switch for more than 3 seconds ( Long press SSS) or rapidly press & release the engine start/stop button 3 times within 3 seconds. On doing so, the vehicle ignition(IGN) status is changed to ACC position. Vehicle ACC  mode will get off after 30 second  OR user is opening Driver door. However, you can still lock the vehicle using mechanical key. Contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer at the earliest 
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic anti-theft steering column lock. The steering wheel locks when the engine start/stop button is in OFF position to protect against the theft. The steering wheel locks automatically when the driver door is opened or 30 seconds after engine start stop Switch changes to OFF position. If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver door and on attempting to lock the vehicle, a warning chirp along with the hazard blinks thrice. Try locking the steering wheel again (by toggling Engine Start/Stop button). If the problem is not solved, we recommend to take the vehicle to nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
Ignition ON: To switch ON the ignition, press the engine start/stop button when the switch position is in OFF/ACC without depressing the clutch pedal and with the PKE Key Fob inside the vehicle. Status LED in the engine start/stop button will turn red to indicate the IGN ON position and the vehicle is ready for starting.
OFF
ACC
ON
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Keeping the system in the ignition ON position for longer time (will be noticeable by the LED lamp of the SSS remaining ON) without engine running, can drain the battery. Switch OFF the system if engine is not to be started for long duration.
Vehicle ignition would not turn to ON position on any of the following conditions:
•  If the electronic steering lock is not getting unlocked
•  A warning would be displayed in the cluster screen for few seconds.
Graphic
. If the steering wheel doesn’t unlock properly, press the start/stop button while turning the steering wheel right/left to release the tension on the lock.
Still if you are not able to turn ON the IGN, please contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Service Centre.
•  When engine start/stop button is ON or engine is in running condition with vehicle at standstill and if any door is opened & closed, the system checks for the PKE Key fob.
Graphic
`
If the PKE Key Fob is not inside the vehicle, an alert in the instrument cluster is displayed along with hazard lamps flash & chirp for 5 times to indicate that key is not detected inside the vehicle
Bring the PKE Key Fob inside the vehicle or keep the key in the detectable position whenever you are inside the vehicle.
Starting the vehicle
Manual Transmission: To start the engine, press the clutch and press the engine start/stop button once with the key inside the vehicle. The engine can be started from any position (OFF / ACC / ON) of the start/stop switch.
Automatic Transmission: To start the engine, Gear Lever shall be in Park Position, press the Brake pedal and press the engine start/stop button once with the key inside the vehicle. The engine can be started from any position (OFF / ACC / ON) of the start/stop switch.
Ensure the gear lever is in neutral/Park position before starting.
If engine start/stop switch is pressed without pressing the clutch (MT) / Brake (AT) pedal, engine will not start, and the vehicle power modes will change as follows: OFF→ ON →OFF→ ON
If the engine start/stop switch is pressed from the OFF position directly, along with the clutch (MT) / Brake (AT) in depressed position, there may be a small delay in the engine cranking. This is normal and is not a fault.
Never press the engine start/stop switch while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of direction control and braking function, leading to an accident.
Even if the key fob is not there in the cabin. The engine will keep running, until it is switched off, after that it can not be restarted in absence of the key Before leaving the driver seat, always make sure engine start/stop switch is in OFF position and always take the PKE Key Fob with you. If the Ignition remains ON and the doors are locked. The central locking system will give 3 chirps and flashes to indicate. This can cause battery to be drained off.
As a emergency procedure (if any failure of brake or clutch switch). If the SSS is pressed continuously for more than 10 seconds then the engine can be started.
Emergency stop: To turn the engine OFF in an emergency, press and hold the engine start/stop button for more than 2 seconds or rapidly press and release the engine start/stop button 3 times within 3 seconds. On doing so, the vehicle ignition is changed to ACC position.
BACK up Start: If the key fob battery is low, the key may not be detected on pressing SSS and SSS LED will be blinking in red color. In such a situation, press the start/stop button once while the status LED in the button is blinking Red and the below error message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Graphic
`
Now place the key fob in the key fob tray with the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AT) pedal pressed and then push the Start-Stop switch twice to Start the engine.
On pressing the Start/Stop switch 1st time with the key fob in the key fob tray below the armrest. The Start-stop switch LED will blink in red color, with the above error message will be displayed again in the cluster. In this case, if you press the Start/Stop switch again vehicle will start in Back-Up mode, if the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AT) pedal is pressed.
Back-up Mode : When the key fob battery is critically low to detect the key fob inside the vehicle or the battery is dead or not available. This mode is triggered by the PKE to understand the condition to Switch ON ignition and to start the vehicle engine.
Graphic
`
If key fob battery is detected low by the PKE system, an alert would be triggered. Change the battery by following the procedure as mentioned in the section for battery replacement.
Key fob battery low can be detected only if the key has been continuously used in the vehicle. Keeping the key outside the vehicle for longer duration and then using it with the drained battery cannot be detected.
5.4.2 Vehicle locking/Unlocking in an Emergency Situation
If the PKE Key Fob does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the doors by using the mechanical key:
Refer to Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from Outside (Mechanical/Electrical Handle) section for more details.
It is strictly not advisable to leave the key fobs in the vehicle. Vehicle can be started by any unauthorised person.
A maximum of 2 Keys can be registered to a vehicle. If you lose a key, we strictly recommend to contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately to block the lost key and to get a new key.
The PKE Key Fob may not work if any of the following occurs:
•  If the vehicle is close to a radio station, airport, or an area where there is a possibility of large radio transmissions which can interfere with the normal operation of the PKE/RKE
•  The PKE Key Fob is near a mobile or a cellular phone or some electronic gadgets like Laptop/Tablets. The signal from the PKE/RKE could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smartphone . Avoid placing the PKE/RKE and your electronic gadgets in the same trouser or jacket pocket or in the bag and maintain adequate distance between the two devices
•  Another vehicle PKE key fob is being operated close to your vehicle
•  PKE Key Fob kept inside the glove box or top bin in the instrument panel may not be detected sometimes. Keep the PKE Key Fob in the visible zone or in your pocket for getting it detected
•  Keep the PKE key fob away from the water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty
Make sure the vehicle ignition is in OFF state, whenever leaving the vehicle even with the key. By keeping the vehicle ignition in ON/ACC state will hamper the vehicle security.
Do not hand over the PKE Key Fob to any unauthorized person or service provider. Your vehicle security system may be compromised in doing so.
5.4.3 PKE Alerts
Display Operating Conditions
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when the vehicle Ignition is in ON condition with the Brake pedal pressed & the user is pressing SSS to start Vehicle & Gear position is not in park or neutral. (If equipped)
Display Operating Conditions
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when vehicle Ignition ON or Engine running condition, user is pressing SSS to turn OFF Vehicle & Gear position is not in park. (If equipped)
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when Start Stop switch is Malfunction . Kindly contact the nearest Mahindra dealer
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when Key fob is not getting detected by the system. Users need to keep the key in the armrest Key fob Tray and then press the start/stop switch to turn ON the vehicle.
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when vehicle ignition in OFF condition. When user tries to lock the vehicle using driver door PKE trigger switch, but key is inside the vehicle.
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when vehicle is in cranked or in ignition ON condition, but key is not inside the vehicle.
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when Key Fob battery is Low.
Graphic
This is information to user In Ignition on to start Car by pressing Brake pedal along with SSS Press AT variant.
Graphic
This is information to user In Ignition on to start Car by pressing Clutch pedal along with SSS press MT variant.
5.4.4 Steering Lock Alerts
Display
Operating Conditions
Graphic
A warning will be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel doesn’t unlock properly, press the start/stop button while turning the steering wheel right/left to release the tension on the lock.
Graphic
If the electronics Steering Wheel not getting locked even though all locking conditions are satisfy then this warning is displayed.
Graphic
A warning will be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel lock unit has system failure. in this case please contact Mahindra dealership to check system failure.
Graphic
A warning will be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel does not pair with PKE ECU. in this case please contact Mahindra dealership to check system.
5.5 Remote Battery
Battery Specification
Battery Voltage
3 V
Battery Capacity
225 mAh
Battery Model No.
2032
Remote Battery Replacement
If the Remote operation is inconsistent when any of the buttons are pressed, then it indicates that the Remote battery is weak.
Graphic
`
The rear side of the Remote is snap fitted. Flip open the key blade and use two fingers on the side of the fob and gently pry open the battery cover.
Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently pry out the battery to and discard the same. Insert new batteries of 3V type (Battery No. 2032). While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of the batteries face up. Align both the halves of the Remote casing and press to snap fit. Check operation of the Remote.
While prying the Remote case, take care not to damage the battery.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.
Pull out the battery and discard the same. Insert new battery of same type. While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of the batteries face up. Align both the halves of the Remote casing and press to snap fit. Check operation of the Remote.
The Batteries are Lithium Ion batteries. They should be kept away from children.
This product contains a lithium button cell. If the button cell is swallowed, severe internal burns can occur within a mere two hours and lead to death.
Keep new or removed batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, discontinue use and keep away from children. If you think that batteries have been swallowed or stuck in any part of the body, seek medical help immediately.
5.6 Key Fob Tray
Graphic
Graphic
The Key fob is to be kept in the above shown key fob tray when the system requests, like in the case of the below error message in the instrument cluster.
Graphic
This message is displayed only when the PKE system fails to detect the key fob which is inside the vehicle when the user is trying to Switch ON the ignition.
On pressing the Start/Stop switch 1st time with the key fob in the key fob tray below the armrest. The Start-stop switch LED will blink in red color, with the above error message will be displayed again in the cluster.
In this case, if you press the Start/Stop switch again before the above error message in the instrument cluster goes away the 2nd time, the vehicle will start in Back-Up mode, if the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AT) pedal is pressed.
5.7 If PKE/RKE Key fob is Lost
If you have lost the programmed PKE/RKE Key fob , contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer for procuring a new Smart Key.
While programming a new key set, you will have to submit all the keys available with you, to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Please note that there is a limitation (max. 2 keys at a time) to the number of keys that can be ordered. The minimum timeframe required to supply the duplicate keys is 10 days after all the formalities are completed. Please contact the Mahindra Authorised Dealer to understand the formalities involved.
If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to deactivate the anti-theft devices or start the engine.
If the key is stolen or lost, communicate to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for de-activating the function of the lost or stolen key. This is essential to avoid unauthorised access using the misplaced key.
Only PKE/RKE transmitters programmed to your vehicle electronics can be used for remote locking and unlocking of your vehicle.
5.8 Key Fob Limitations
When the vehicle key fob is not working properly, It may be due to Radio Frequency (RF) interference caused by an external source like transformer, Amateur Radio, etc.. which emits power levels that is higher than the vehicle Key Fob. This interference may be resulting in RF signal not being received by RKE/PKE system controller.
Customer may not get Panic due to this non-function of key fob. After moving from the interference Zone, Key Fob may start working properly.
If still key fob not working then contact Mahindra Authorised service center for assistance.
5.9 Engine Immobiliser System
An Engine Immobiliser System is a security system that prevents the vehicle from being operated by an unauthorised person. The Engine immobiliser prevents the engine from being started unless it recognizes signals from the correct coded key. When a wrong key is inserted or a theft attempt is detected, the alarm is set off, and the hazard lamps flash along with a siren.
The system is automatically activated when the key is removed from the ignition.
5.9.1 Features of the Immobiliser System:
•  Prevents the vehicle being started by anyone not in possession of the correct vehicle key
•  The vehicle is automatically protected after the key is removed from the ignition/vehicle in PKE. At every ignition ON, if the vehicle does not recognize the correct key code, the engine check lamp will blink and security tell tale lamp will illuminate and the engine cannot be started.
•  The vehicle will not be protected until the key has been taken out of the ignition/vehicle in PKE.
If the engine check lamp flashes or remains continuously illuminated after the ignition being switched ON, there is a system malfunction. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
With the correct coded key in the vehicle and pressing the SSS ON, automatically recognizes and authenticates the system. It enables the engine to start.
In the event of the vehicle not starting with the correct key, switch off the ignition for a minimum of 1 minute and attempt to start the vehicle again.
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobiliser system. Any unauthorised changes or modifications can affect proper operation of the system and will void your warranty.
The security system will be activated when the vehicle is locked using the PKE/RKE key fob. Locking the doors with the manual key will also activate the security system.
Using the ignition key blade to open the diver door, when the vehicle was locked and armed with PKE/RKE key fob, in this condition if any of the door is opened which results in door switch status change will be treated as unauthorised by the system setting and this will trigger the alarm. Press the unlock button on the PKE/RKE key fob to off the alarm.
5.10 Opening and Closing the Bonnet
The bonnet release lever is in the driver side foot well area, below the instrument panel. To open bonnet follow the steps below:
Graphic
`
1. Pull the lever below the driver side instrument panel to release the bonnet.
Graphic
`
2. Lift the bonnet a little to access the safety latch holding the bonnet striker. This safety latch is located below the bonnet at the center.
Graphic
`
3. Lift the safety latch and lift the bonnet.
4. bonnet is supported by a stay rod.
Be careful while opening the bonnet immediately after a drive; the engine compartment will be very hot
Always double check to be sure that the bonnet is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched properly, the bonnet can open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a loss of visibility, resulting in an accident
Do not move the vehicle with the bonnet in the raised position, as vision is obstructed
To close the bonnet, follow the below steps:
1. Remove the stay rod supporting the bonnet by slightly lifting the bonnet
2. Bring the bonnet near to its self-opening/closing position
3. Now, push the bonnet to close and ensure the primary latch is engaged
4. Before driving off, check bonnet is locked properly with primary latch fully engaged
Bonnet Open Hazard - When the bonnet is open and vehicle is in unlock condition:
•  Hazard lamps flash continuously to alert the user that the bonnet is open
•  Hazard cluster telltale also flashes
To stop the warning, do any one of the following:
•  Close the bonnet
•  Press the hazard button TWICE
•  Change the turn signal stalk position
•  Drive the vehicle > 10 km/hr.
5.11 Fuel-Lid Opening and Closing
Follow the below steps to open the Fuel lid:
Graphic
`
1. Press the UNLOCK button on RKE/PKE.
Graphic
`
2. Then press the fuel lid gently once to open.
Diesel
Petrol
Graphic
`
Graphic
`
Diesel should be filled in diesel filler cap.
Petrol should be filled in petrol filler cap.
Diesel should not be filled in blue (DEF) filler cap.
3. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise to open. Refuel and put the cap back in its place and tighten in the clockwise direction till three distinct clicks are heard. Close the fuel lid shut and press the fuel lid once again to make it flush with body.
Ensure the fuel cap and lid are securely closed before starting the vehicle.
Fuel filler lid cannot be released whenever the vehicle locked condition.
5.12 Manual Fuel Lid Override
Follow the below process to open the fuel lid manually in case of any issue in electrical circuits:
1. Press and Open the trim cover on Left side of luggage compartment.
Graphic
`
2. Unhook and Pull the blue color knob as shown in the illustration to unlock the fuel lid manually.
3. Then press the fuel lid gently once to open.
4. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise to open. Refuel and put the cap back in its place and tighten in the clockwise direction till three distinct clicks are heard. Close the fuel lid shut and press the fuel lid once again to make it flush with body.
Ensure the fuel cap and lid are securely closed before starting the vehicle.
Do  not pull the cable with high force or pull excessively as it may damage the locking mechanism.
6 STARTING AND DRIVING I
6.1 Safety Tips - Before Starting Your Vehicle
Before starting the vehicle, inspect the interior and exterior of the vehicle; for any damages, leaks, loose parts, foreign objects/debris. In case of any abnormality noticed, Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Before starting your journey, check and ensure proper functioning of safety devices/components like brake system, steering system, all lamps & tyres. Also ensure no critical warning lamps are ON in the cluster. In case of any safety device/component not functioning as intended or any critical warning lamps found ON in cluster, contact Authorised Mahindra service center and get it rectified before starting the journey.
Adjust the seat headrest, steering wheel and fasten the seat belt as described in this manual. Never perform any seat / steering adjustments when the vehicle is in motion. Start the vehicle only when seated and belted in the driver's seat
Engine idle speed is controlled by engine management system. When the engine starts, idle RPM runs higher than normal in order to warm the engine. The engine idle speed RPM reduces once the engine warms up.
Never start your vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed area. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always keep the garage door open or start the engine in an open area.
Mirror Adjustment: Ensure that the rear view mirror and both the ORVM’s are adjusted for an unobstructed view of the road behind.
Exterior Lamps: With the help of someone observe and confirm normal operation of all exterior lamps while you work on the controls from the driver seat. Also, check functioning of all lamps in the instrument panel.
Door Latches: Check for positive closing, latching, and locking of all doors, both from inside and outside.
Fluid Leaks: Check the area under the vehicle after an overnight parking for fuel, power steering fluid, brake fluid, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. If leaks are observed contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
6.2 Starting the Engine
Make sure all vehicle occupants are properly seated in their seats and have buckled their safety belts. For more information on seat, headrest positioning, safety belts and their proper usage, refer “Seat Belts” section.
Before cranking the engine
•  Make sure the gear shift lever is in Neutral/Park mode
•  Ensure that the parking brake / EPB is engaged. Turn the key to IGN position but do not turn the key to start
Automatic Transmission-AT
1. Turn the ignition ON by pressing the start stop button or through ignition key
2. Shift the gear shift lever to Park or Neutral position, if found in any other position
3. Apply parking brake / EPB, if found not applied
4. Do not press the accelerator
5. Depress the brake pedal and press the start stop button or Turn the key momentarily to the START position to crank the engine
6. Once the engine starts, release the Start Stop Button or key.
Manual Transmission-MT
1. Turn the ignition ON by pressing the start stop button or through ignition key
2. Shift the gear shift lever to neutral position. if found in any other position
3. Apply parking brake / EPB, if found not applied
4. Do not press the accelerator.
5. Depress the clutch pedal and press the start stop button or Turn the key momentarily to the START position to crank the engine
6. Once the engine starts, release the Start Stop Button or key
Do not continue cranking after the engine has started.
If the engine fails to start, attempt to restart after about 10 seconds. If the engine fails to start even after repeated attempts as per the procedure given above, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 seconds before attempting to restart the engine.
If the vehicle battery has discharged, use booster cables, a booster battery or a battery from another vehicle to start. Jump-starting a vehicle can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to the “Jump-starting procedure” section in this manual for correct procedure.
If the engine still fails to start, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance.
Ensure the following when the engine is running:
•  All warning lamps are OFF
•  Low oil pressure lamp is OFF
Engine Idling: The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will decrease as the engine warms up.
After idling for a few seconds, follow the below steps to drive away:
Manual Transmission-MT
1. Release the parking brake / EPB (Electric Parking Brake)
2. Depress the clutch
3. Shift the gear lever to 1st gear
4. Release the brake pedal
5. Drive by releasing the clutch and depressing the accelerator pedal simultaneously
Automatic Transmission-AT
1. Release the parking brake / EPB (Electric Parking Brake)
2. Depress the Brake pedal
3. Shift the gear lever to D or R or M
4. Drive by releasing the brake pedal and depressing the accelerator pedal simultaneously
Engine Idling - In Cold Weather: Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold and prolonged idling at low ambient temperatures. Long periods of idling is harmful to engine. Combustion chamber temperatures can drop to low temperatures, where the fuel injected may not burn completely. Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
For smooth functioning and reliable operation of the engine during cold weather conditions, use suitable fuel (Petrol/Diesel) which will be available at filling stations during winter months. Check with your fuel retailer for details.
Coolant in the radiator will survive up to ambient temperature of -15 degree C. If the ambient temperature is expected go below -15 degree C, during operation, the engine will require a different coolant/coolant concentration. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance.
6.3 Stopping the Engine
Your vehicle is powered by a turbo engine. Before turning the engine OFF, always allow the engine to return to normal idle speed and run for few seconds. This assures proper cooling and lubrication of the turbocharger. This is particularly necessary after any hard driving.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, before turning OFF the engine and leaving the vehicle, always follow the below mentioned safety tips.
Manual Transmission-MT
•  Keep your right foot on the brake pedal
•  Turn front wheels towards the road curb
•  Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock position and remove the key
•  Press the start stop button once to switch off the vehicle (for PKE only)
•  Engage the parking brake / EPB
•  Move the gear shift lever to 1st gear position (reverse gear if parking on an incline).
•  Slowly release the brake pedal
•  Lock your vehicle when leaving
Automatic Transmission
•  Keep your right foot on the service brake pedal
•  Turn front wheels towards the road curb
•  Engage the parking brake / EPB
•  Shift the gear lever to Park “P” position
•  Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock position and remove the key
•  Press the start stop button once to switch off the vehicle (for PKE only)
•  Slowly release the brake pedal
•  Lock your vehicle when leaving
Alert will be displayed in the infotainment screen if the gear shifter is not in P position. Engine will not switch off unless shifter is in P position.
6.4 Exhaust Gases
Protection against exhaust gas entry into the vehicles interior is considered in the design of the exhaust system.
•  Vehicle exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Oxides, Hydrocarbons and Particulate Matter. These are potential environmental and health hazards
•  Avoid inhaling the exhaust gases. Carbon Monoxide is a colorless and odorless gas and can cause unconsciousness or even death
•  If the exhaust system is damaged for any reason or you notice a change in the exhaust noise, have the vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
•  Do not start the vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed area where ventilation is poor for the exhaust gases
•  Since the engine compartment and exhaust system components are hot and can ignite a fire, do not park or leave the vehicle with the engine idling over dry grass, leaves, paper, rags or any combustible material
Never keep the engine running when the vehicle is parked in an area which is not properly ventilated. This could lead to serious respiratory problems and/or death
6.5 Driving Your Vehicle
6.5.1 Pedals
MT
AT
Graphic
Graphic
A: Accelerator Pedal
B: Brake Pedal
C: Clutch Pedal
6.5.2 General Driving Precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of accidents leading to serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
•  Before you drive your vehicle, please read this manual carefully
•  Before you start driving, check proper operation of the brakes and steering system
•  If, while driving, you hear any strange noise or feel unusual vibration, or if you have any concerns whatsoever, or if any warning lamps illuminate or buzzers sound, park/stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Identify the cause and take any necessary remedial action. Contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer if necessary
•  Never overload or improperly load your vehicle
•  Always be attentive while driving and follow safe driving practices
•  Always maintain the recommended inflation pressure in tyres
•  Always drive at a safe speed appropriate for given driving conditions. You must follow the speed limits
•  While backing up, keep a constant lookout for people, particularly children, or other obstructions or hazardous material that might be present behind the vehicle
•  Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicles center of gravity and make your vehicle more unstable
•  Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle
•  Always slowdown in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have much better control
•  When driving in off-road or on rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle's suspension and chassis
•  Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially on rough terrains. Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion. Make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes
•  If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (e.g. from concrete to gravel/sand/mud/snow) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds, especially the way it responds to steering, braking and accelerating inputs
•  Be extremely careful when driving on pavements made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice
•  If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake or steering application. Ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface
•  It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly
•  In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surfaces to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel
6.5.3 Off-Road Driving Precautions
•  When driving in off-road or on rugged terrains, never over speed or make sharp turns. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury
•  Always maintain steering wheel control, Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion
•  Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or map-out your route before driving in the area
•  Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud or water
6.5.4 If your vehicle is submerged
If Your stationary Vehicle is Submerged up to over the bumper
Graphic
Contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately. Have the vehicle towed to nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer to check any entry of water into the engine
All fluids including engine and transmission fluids required to be changed in case of water ingress and contamination
Never attempt to start the engine, without the advice from Mahindra Authorised Dealer technician.
•  Never drive through water when it flows above the bottom portion of the bumper or above the tyre center line
•  The engine could get damaged internally if attempts are made to cross through deep water
•  Wet brake discs have a lower coefficient or friction resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Tab the brake pedal while driving to remove the film of water
6.5.5 Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water.
Never drive through still water that is higher than the bottom of the axle hubs. Not following this instruction will allow water to enter vehicle components causing internal damage to the components, affecting drivability, safety, emissions, and reliability.
When driving through water, drive very slowly and at constant speed, less than 8 kmph. Drive with out pressing accelerator pedal and control speed using only the brakes. At higher speed waves can be generated by the front of the vehicle. These water waves may enter air intake, causing severe engine damage or cause a vehicle to get stalled.
You must slow down while driving through shallow water. Speeding may cause water to splash onto the windshield, impairing your vision. In extreme conditions, you may get a water wedge formation between the road and tyre causing loss of control in the vehicle.
•  The ground under the water might not be firm which could result the water being deeper than expected when driving the vehicle through it
•  Do not stop or shut OFF the engine while immersed in water. It helps in preventing water getting inside the exhaust pipes
•  When backing down a ramp, do not allow the exhaust tail pipe to immerse in water
•  Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure. It may also enter the differentials, transmission, and transfer case, reducing the oil's lubricating qualities. If these are submerged in water, the lubricants should be replaced as required
•  Water entering the transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damaging the transmission
•  Sand, mud/sludge that has accumulated in around brake discs may affect braking efficiency. This may also damage brake system components. Wet brakes cannot stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by driving the vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal
•  When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through water
6.5.6 Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine the exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to compensate for drifting.
6.5.7 After Driving Off-Road or through Water
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.
•  After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. Completely inspect the underbody of the vehicle for any damages
•  Check for accumulations of plants or bushes. or polyethylene / plastic. These could be a fire hazard at high temperatures.
•  Inspect all the tubes/hoses and check for any fluid leakages
•  Get heat exchangers (radiator and condenser) cleaned
•  We also recommend that the vehicle be checked at the Mahindra Authorised Dealer for any water entry into the transmission / axle or the engine.
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have full braking power when needed leading to accidents. If you have been operating the vehicle in off-road conditions, get the brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
•  If any unusual vibration is experienced, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance. Get it inspected/corrected as soon as possible
•  After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission/transfer case/axle oils) to ensure the fluids have not been contaminated
6.6 Tips for Better Fuel Economy
Fuel mileage (efficiency) depends on the average speed of the vehicle, number of times the gears are shifted/Clutch pressed and number of times the brakes are applied. Vehicles operating in city traffic condition /bumper to bumper traffic will exhibit lower fuel mileage as compared to vehicles operating in open highways with higher average speeds.
DOs
•  Ensure that your vehicle is maintained as per recommendation (Refer to Warranty and Service Information Guide)
•  Ensure that the tyre pressures are as per recommendation (Ref to sticker on door pillar or
Page 6-56 or Warranty and Service Information Guide)
•  Ensure parking brakes are released fully
•  Use Engine Start-Stop feature to the maximum
(Ref Page no 6-29), if applicable
•  Drive with all the windows closed to reduce aerodynamic drag
•  Accelerate smoothly with a light foot on the accelerator
•  Anticipate stops and slow down in coasting mode before applying brake
•  In manual transmission, shift gears at the right speeds (Ref page 6-15 for gear shift indication prompts)
Don'ts
•  Fitting roof carrier will increase drag and reduce fuel mileage
•  Driving at speeds above 80 Kms/hr reduces fuel mileage
•  Do not rest the left foot on the clutch pedal in manual transmission vehicles as it will reduce the fuel mileage as well as damage clutch/transmission components
•  Do not attempt to use brakes with the left foot in Automatic transmission vehicles
Managing the Air conditioner for optimum fuel efficiency
Recommended AC modes for obtaining optimum fuel efficiency.
MX/AX3/AX5
AX7/AX7L
Graphic
Graphic
How to Measure /Read Fuel Mileage Values?
•  The Fuel mileage value is displayed in the cluster as  AFE (Average Fuel Economy) in Kms/lit.
•  The AFE can be set to multiple modes.
•  Refer to Page 3-12 for the procedure for resetting AFE modes.
6.7 Ignition Switch (if equipped)
Graphic
An illuminator ring is provided on the face of the ignition switch to help in locating the ignition switch at night. The ring will illuminate the moment the driver door is opened and will remain glowing till the driver door is closed.
The different positions of the ignition switch are:
LOCK - This is the ignition and steering lock position. The vehicle circuits and engine is completely switched OFF. The steering wheel is also locked, and the key can be removed from the ignition only in this position.
ACC - The steering is unlocked and can be rotated. In this position, all electrical circuits are enabled. Use this mode when you want to listen to music, etc., with the engine temporarily switched OFF.
ON - All electrical circuits are enabled. Some of the warning or information lamps illuminate in this position. While some of the lamps will go out after a few seconds, some will continue to remain ON till the engine is started. When the vehicle is being driven, ignition switch remains in the ON position.
Do not leave the ignition in ON when the engine is OFF. This could lead to battery drain and ignition switch damage.
START - This position is to start the engine by cranking the starter motor. This is a momentary position. When the key is turned to start position, the starter cranks the engine. Once the engine is running, release the key, and the key reverts back to ON position and the starter motor disengages from the engine.
Do not continue cranking after the engine has started.
If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering wheel from side to side and try again.
The key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When the key is removed, the steering column lock is activated, and the steering wheel cannot be turned.
Never return the key to the LOCK position or try to remove the key when the vehicle is in motion. Removing the key allows the steering wheel to lock. You will lose the control of the vehicle and may cause serious accident. Remove the key only when the vehicle is parked.
6.8 Horn
Press the pad on the steering wheel to blow/sound the horn.
The horn functions even when the ignition has been switched OFF.
Graphic
Horn will get activated when horn switch/pad is pressed
It will get deactivated when horn switch/pad is released or after 10 sec of continuously pressing.
If Horn Switch Input is ON for more than 10 sec, Horn will get deactivate after 10 sec.
6.9 Manual Transmission
The first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough. This is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will develop with the initial few hundred kilometers of running.
6.9.1 Gear Lever
Graphic
Your vehicle is fitted with manual transmission having six forward and one reverse gear. This shift pattern is imprinted on the gear lever knob.
The transmission is fully synchronized in all forward gears, so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished. The clutch pedal should be depressed fully while shifting, and then released slowly.
6.9.2 Gear Recommendation
Gear information shows the actual gear in which user has to drive the vehicle.
Based on the various parameters, it will suggest to change the gear for better fuel economy with up/down recommendation.
Display
High
Low
Graphic
Graphic
Operating Condition
The numeral is the suggested gear. The Up or down arrow is to upshift or downshift. When no arrow, it indicates vehicle is in which gear.
6.9.3 Neutral Position
This position stops the transmission of power from the engine to drive axle. With the gear lever in neutral and brakes released, the vehicle can move freely by pushing or towing. The engine can be started in this mode. It is always recommended to keep the brake pedal depressed in this position. It is advisable to shift into neutral when the vehicle is standstill for longer durations with the engine idling.
Coasting the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral and engine ON/OFF is not recommended. In an event of panic braking, you will not have the power of engine braking to slow down the vehicle. This may lead to personal injury or accident.
Do not leave the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral position. Always engage manual parking brake/EPB before leaving the vehicle, to prevent any vehicle movement leading to possible injury to a bystander or damage to vehicle.
6.9.4 Gears 1-6
Use the gears 1 to 6 as per vehicle load, road/traffic conditions or as per requirement. The current gear selection is indicated in the cluster.
Always depress the clutch fully before moving the gear lever from the current position to any desired position. Perform up-shifts or down-shifts one gear at a time, do not jump gears.
6.9.5 Recommended Gear Shifting Speeds
Upshifting - Diesel
Shift Range Vehicle Road Speed (kmph) Engine RPM Range
1–2
16
1600–2000
2–3
27
3–4
42
4–5
54
5–6
70
Downshifting -Diesel
Shift Range Vehicle Road Speed (kmph) Engine RPM Range
2–1
14
1000–1200
3–2
25
4–3
40
5–4
52
6–5
61
Upshifting - Petrol
Shift Range Vehicle Road Speed (kmph) Engine RPM Range
1–2
18
1600–2300
2–3
30
3–4
44
4–5
54
5–6
70
Downshifting -Petrol
Shift Range Vehicle Road Speed (kmph) Engine RPM Range
2–1
14
1000–1200
3–2
25
4–3
40
5–4
52
6–5
61
Shift gears at suitable engine or road speeds to safeguard the transmission components. Avoid driving in high RPM’s frequently.
When parking on an incline, gear alone may not be sufficient to prevent the vehicle from moving. Always set the manual parking brake/EPB in addition to shifting the gear lever into gear. It is also recommended to turn the front wheels towards the road curb.
6.9.6 Reverse
Graphic
This gear is to enable the vehicle to move in the reverse direction. Move the gear lever into this position only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the gear lever is in neutral position.
The reverse lock ring located immediately below the gear shift knob must be pulled upward while moving the shift lever to the reverse (R) position.
To avoid transmission damage, shift into or out of reverse gear only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. It is recommended you to wait approximately for three seconds in neutral gear to shifting into or out of reverse gear.
For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, keep the gear shift in neutral and hold the vehicle with the brake pedal. For prolonged stops, it is recommended to switch OFF the engine and apply the Parking brake/EPB. When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not hold it with the clutch/accelerator; use the brake to avoid unnecessary clutch wear/heat build up.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear lever, which could result in an accident or serious injury.
On slippery/wet road surfaces, never downshift to obtain braking action. This could result in a wheel slip and reduced vehicle control.
6.9.7 Uphill and Downhill Driving
To prevent the engine from high stress at a low RPM when driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily loaded, downshift when necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best torque range. Similarly, while driving downhill, downshift to utilize the engine braking in an optimum manner. While driving in a continuous down gradient at high speeds, always engage the appropriate gear to reduce aggressive and sustained brake usage. Aggressive and sustained brake usage can cause higher brake pad temperatures and fading.
6.10 Automatic Transmission (AT)
6.10.1 Gear Selector Lever
Graphic
Your vehicle is equipped with 6 Speed automatic transmission having Electric controls with an Adaptive Transmission Control Strategy.
This adaptive Transmission strategy offers optimal transmission operation and shift quality in different driving conditions.
The transmission electric are self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough. This is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will develop within the initial few hundred kms of running.
P : Park position
M : Manual Shift
R : Reverse position
M+ : Manual up-shift
N : Neutral position
M- : Manual down shift
D : Drive position
 
Shift Logic Table
Movement Possibility
P-R
Yes-Brake pedal + knob button
R-N
No
N-D
No
D-M
No
M-D
No
D-N
No
N-R
Yes-Only knob button
R-P
Yes-Only knob button
The current gear lever position is indicated in the centre of the cluster display.
6.10.2 P : Park Position
Graphic
Use this position to park your vehicle, warm up the engine, or stay in a location for an extended length of time.
To shift in to any other position, first depress the brake pedal, then press knob button and move the TGS to R or N or D as desired.
•  Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into “P”
•  Never shift to “P” when the vehicle is moving, To avoid damage to transmission
•  If the lever is shifted to P when the vehicle has not come to stop and in forward motion, then a ratchet noise will be heard. This is not abnormal. However we do not recommend moving to P till the vehicle has come to standstill . As repeated such instances can damage the internal parts
•  To shift from the “P” position to another position, the ignition switch must be turned to “ON” and the brake pedal should be depressed. Any forcible attempts to move the selector lever from “P” without the two procedures may damage the selector lever
6.10.3 R : Reverse position
Graphic
Use this position to drive the vehicle in reverse
To shift into “R” from “P” or “N” (with the knob button press), completely stop the vehicle and depress the brake pedal. When the shift lever is in “R”, parking aid system will be automatically activated.
•  Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving
•  Please note that the vehicle may slowly move backward when the selector lever is at “R”
6.10.4 N : Neutral position
Graphic
At this position, the engine does not transfer power to the wheels and the vehicle will not move on a flat road. However, for safety, apply the brake when the gear is in this position.
•  Warm up the engine for approximately 3 minutes when the ambient temperature is below -15°C. Otherwise, shifting of gears in Forward or Reverse direction may not be smooth
•  If you have to stop on a hill and would like to use this neutral position, depress the brake pedal firmly
•  Never attempt to move the gear selector lever to “N” when the vehicle is in motion
Depress the brake pedal while shifting the gear lever from “N” to “D” or “R” for your safety.
For shifting R to P, press the knob button and for shifting to N or D, only shift lever to moved. Refer the shift logic table for more clarity.
6.10.5 D : Drive position
Graphic
Use this position for normal driving conditions. The transmission is automatically shifted from 1st gear up to 6th gear according to the level of depression on the accelerator pedal
•  Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle immediately after shifting into “D” or the transmission will be damaged. Wait for D symbol to come in the cluster before pressing the accelerator pedal
•  Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down an uphill according to the gradients, so you have to depress the brake
•  Please note that the vehicle may creep forward on level ground when the selector lever is in “D” even without pressing the accelerator pedal and this behavior is known as forward creep
6.10.6 M : Manual Shift
Graphic
To shift to manual mode move the lever in left side from “D” position. Driving gear can be adjusted by operating the shift lever in front or back direction.
In manual shift mode, the user can upshift or downshift from 1 to 6 forward gears by moving the shift lever in front or back direction.
Shift up: Move the shift lever forward towards + direction and release once to shift up one gear.
Shift Down: Move the shift lever backwards towards - direction and release once to shift up one gear.
The gears can be shifted without requiring to release the Accelerator pedal.
In manual mode, downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. Similarly, upshifts are automatically made when the engine rpm exceeds the threshold.
When starting to drive on a snow or icy road, upshift of the gear to 2nd or 3rd is possible to avoid loss of traction.
For safety reason maximum three shifts “+” / ”-” can be allowed at given point of time.
•  Before leaving the Driver’s seat always make sure that the shift lever is in the P (park) position
•  Shifting into P position while the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the vehicle
•  Always fully depress the brake pedal before and while shifting out of the Drive (D) position into another position (other than M Mode) to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle
•  The shift from D to M (Manual Mode) and M to D can be performed while the vehicle is moving
•  Never press accelerator pedal when moving the gear shifter lever
•  To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever/ tip switch is operated
Use of Engine Brake: To use the engine as a brake, change into the manual gear shift mode first, then operate the shift lever to switch to next lower gear.
•  Abruptly downshifting and using the engine brake may make the vehicle unstable, especially when driving on roads covered with snow or ice
6.10.7 Ignition Key Interlock system (If equipped)
Graphic
The Ignition Key cannot be removed from the key barrel unless the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
If the key is stuck in the key barrel due to an malfunction, remove fuse F43 from ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX to release the key. Contact Authorized Mahindra Service Center at the earliest.
Always start the engine while the selector lever is in P or N with Brake pedal depressed.
During operation of the key interlock system, click noise will be audible, which is normal.
6.10.8 Gear Shift Interlock system
The Automatic Transmission has a shift lock system which prevents shifting the transmission from P into R unless the Brake Pedal is depressed
Graphic
Graphic
In case of malfunction of the shift lock system or vehicle battery got drained, Open up the shift lock cap which is present in front of the shift lever on the shift bezel. Then with the help of Screw driver available in toolkit, Press the butoon and move the shift lever out of P mode.
6.10.9 Starting and Driving Off
•  Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P”. For your safety, avoid starting the engine from “N” even though you can do so.
•  Check whether or not the engine idling speed is normal. Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift into “D” or “R”.
•  To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal gradually.
•  Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the engine after shifting into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be damaged. Especially, when you start off after stopping, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on with the brake pedal depressed
•  When driving on a down hill, never shift the selector lever to “N” If you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a sudden gear engagement can damage the drive train
•  HDC (Hill Descent Control) is designed for driving down a steep hill. When HDC is applied, do not shift to “N”. Otherwise, HDC will be deactivated
•  For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before moving the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped
•  Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the gear selector
•  If you have to stop on a hill, depress the brake pedal fully
•  To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never shift into “P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion
•  A high engine speed can cause your vehicle to move abruptly from the parked position. To avoid this, wait until the engine rpm becomes stable
•  When you start off on a hill after stopping and parking the vehicle, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on, with the brake pedal depressed
•  Do not press the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal at the same time
•  We suggest that right leg only should be used for brake pedal operation
6.10.10 Creep Function
Without any actuation of the accelerator pedal, your vehicle will move slowly if the selector lever is in any position other than “P” or “N”. This is called the creep effect. You can control your vehicle’s movement by only applying the brake in heavy traffic or narrow areas.
On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the opposite direction of the intended direction despite the creep effect. When stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal
6.10.11 Kick-down Function
If you need to accelerate rapidly, depress the accelerator pedal to its travel end. Then, a lower gear will be automatically engaged. This is called the kickdown function.
•  Do not use the kick-down function while driving on slippery or sharply curved roads
•  If you use the kick-down function too frequently, the fuel economy of the vehicle will get worse
6.10.12 Engine Braking
When the accelerator pedal is released while the vehicle is in motion, the engine speed decreases. On a down hill, engaging a lower gear can generate a higher engine braking and eventually slow down the vehicle speed. By using engine behavior as a brake, you can decrease your vehicle speed without excessively using the brake system. The lower gear, the higher braking force.
Do not excessively apply the brake pedal while going down a long slope. The brake system will overheat, experience vapor lock or the fade phenomenon, and lose the braking force
Be aware that the engine brake does not work when the gear selector lever is in the “N” position
Avoid any abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tyres may slip
6.10.13 Limp Home Mode (LHM)
When there is a malfunction in the transmission, it goes into Limp Home Mode to maintain minimum driving conditions and also to prevent critical transmission damage. This status is indicated by the transmission check lamp illumination in the instrument cluster. Contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
The transmission is held either in 3rd/ 5th gear when LHM is activated.
6.11 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Operation (if equipped)
Graphic
In an AWD vehicle, power is transmitted to all the wheels. This is managed by the AWD System which intelligently transfers torque to all four wheels.
AWD system includes electromagnetically operated clutch which is controlled by an ECU. According to the driving conditions, this system automatically delivers torque to the rear wheels.
6.11.1 AWD System
AWD system is available in two operating positions viz., AUTO mode and AWD LOCK mode.
Once the ignition key is turned ON, AWD system by default turns into AUTO mode. In AUTO mode, whenever a slippage is detected in the FRONT wheels (slippery surfaces like icy roads, wet surfaces, etc.) the torque is transferred to the REAR wheels by the AWD system.
6.11.2 AWD Lock Mode
The AWD LOCK mode is to transfer a portion of the drive torque to the rear wheels for increased traction on wet pavement, snow covered roads or when driving off road.
Occasional off-road use such as established unpaved roads and trails are OK. It is always important that the driver carefully reduces the speed to a level that does not exceed the safe operating speed for those conditions.
Use lock mode when driving up or down steep inclines, driving off-road, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc. to maximize traction.
AWD LOCK button is located on the driver control switch bank. The LED on the switch turns ON when the AWD Lock is activated. In this mode, fixed amount of torque is transferred to the rear wheels irrespective of the driving condition.
Graphic
The AWD warning lamp in the cluster illuminates when there is a malfunction in the AWD system.
In AWD Lock mode, when vehicle speed > 80 km/h, then system changes to AUTO mode automatically .
When driving on normal roads, deactivate the AWD LOCK mode by pushing the AWD LOCK button (AWD LOCK indicator light goes off). Driving on normal roads with the AWD LOCK mode, especially, when cornering may cause mechanical noise or vibration. The noise and vibration will disappear when the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated. Prolong driving with the noise and vibration may damage some parts of the power train.
AWD vehicles have to be towed only with loaded on the back of a truck. This is the safest and best way of towing. If vehicle needs to be towed by lifting the front wheels, then the propeller shaft needs to be disconnected in order to protect the coupling.
Do not use the AWD lock mode on dry paved roads. Doing so can cause abnormal noise or vibration, and may damage the AWD system.
When the vehicle is stuck in the snow , sand or mud, place a non-slip material under the drive wheels to provide traction OR Slowly spin the wheels in forward and reverse directions which causes a rocking motion that may free the vehicle. However, avoid running the engine continuously at high rpm, doing so may damage the AWD system.
6.12 Drive Modes (Only for Diesel Variant)
Use any of the following methods to activate Drive mode
Center Fascia Switch Bank
Press Drive mode hard switch on center fascia switch bank and select required drive mode from Infotainment Screen
Graphic
Graphic
Infotainment Home Screen
Select Drive mode icon from Infotainment Home screen and select required drive mode as shown in the image below.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Drive Mode is a quick and easy way to change driving style of your vehicle. With Drive mode settings, you can instantly adjust driving dynamics and feel of your vehicle, all on the go. The system is incredibly easy to use, simply chose you choice of "Drive Mode" and experience 3 different vehicles in one.
You can select from multiple drive modes options any time during your Drive, meaning you can switch to the perfect mode when the situation calls for it. Whether you're looking for an relaxed commute or a sporty back roads adventure, Drive Mode allows you to perfectly tailor your vehicle for your unique driving style.
Drive Modes essentially offers you the Driver a Drive Experience of 3 different cars in one car.
•  You can choose ZAP mode to experience a TRUE SUV drive, a drive that is true to the Mahindra SUV experience. This is the default mode.
•  You can choose ZIP mode for a normal comfortable city drive. The Engine Power and shift points (in AT) will be suitable for traffic conditions.
•  You can choose ZOOM Mode for the Adrenaline Rush. Engine Power, Gear shifts , Braking will all work together to give you an absolute THRILL to your driving experience.
Driving Modes changes vehicle handling, dynamics and entire Drive Feel at a touch of an icon. This essentially enables Driver to experience multiple calibrations seamlessly.
Driving modes alters
1. Sensitivity of Accelerator pedal along with engine power delivery
2. Gear shift patterns
3. Steering effort
4. TCS Control
Based on the mode selected driving
ZAP Mode: ZAP Mode offers regular everyday performance. The car runs like a true Mahindra should. It offers a good balance between ZIP and ZOOM settings and is ideal for day-to-day use. The vehicle will be default in ZAP mode every time the vehicle Ignition is turned ON. This is the default mode.
ZIP Mode: ZIP mode is the accelerator pedal response and shift points (in AT) have been modified so as to have comfortable and easy control for traffic condition.
ZOOM Mode: This mode is for a more spirited driving. ZOOM mode is offered to make the car more fun, as it produces more engaging and potent ride-quality. In this mode, accelerator will become more responsive, i.e. the car accelerates more readily. The steering gets heavier, Gear shift and is delayed.
Once any of the modes is selected, we would have an ALERT message in cluster. Based on the mode selected the Alert message would vary. for
ZAP: ZAP MODE ACTIVATED
ZIP: ZIP MODE ACTIVATED
ZOOM: ZOOM MODE ACTIVATED
Once selected we would have a permanent indication in the CLUSTER. Also, the skin of the cluster also changes as per the mode.
Allows the driver to alter settings to their specific preferences. This option offers further flexibility over choices of Drive Modes.
This is done by means of CUSTOM MODES available in Infotainment screens.
Here, the Customer is provided with Selection option from choices as seen below
Power train : ZIP , ZAP or ZOOM
Braking : ZAP or ZOOM
Steering: ZIP or ZAP or ZOOM
HVAC : Normal or Economy
Once the customer selects his/her choice from drop down on confirming his/her choice. Each of the individual controllers will switch to this selection.
Few things to note
1. When in Cruise control or Adaptive cruise control Vehicle will always be defaulted to ZAP MODE
2. ON every IGNITION Cycle, vehicle will always start in ZAP MODE
3. IN case of any faults at vehicle level , that doesn't allow the vehicle to be in the mode of choice Customer is alerted by an alert message – “DRIVE MODE INHIBITED” in Infotainment screen and the Mode choice in the Cluster would be Blank.
6.13 Micro Hybrid Technology (Engine Stop/Start System) – MT/AT (If equipped)
Engine Stop/Start system automatically “stops” and “starts” the engine when idle at signals or long traffic jams. This in turn gives a better fuel efficiency.
6.13.1 Overview of the Engine Stop/Start System – MT
Graphic
Graphic
Engine Stop/Start system is activated by the Engine Stop/Start button in the driver side switch bank. The LED on the button indicates the status of the button.
How does the Engine Stop/Start System Work?
Let’s take a simple example of driving in traffic conditions within your city. Assume that your vehicle has stopped at a traffic junction due to a red signal. The following steps illustrate how the system functions:
•  The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the neutral gear and the clutch pedal is released
•  The Engine Stop/Start lamp in the cluster will blink indicating that the engine is going to stop shortly. The engine will shut down automatically after a specific time period
•  The Engine Stop/Start lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster indicating the engine was stopped by the “Engine Stop/Start” System
•  Once the signal turns green, press the clutch pedal and the engine starts immediately
•  The indicator in the cluster goes OFF indicating that the engine has started again and you are ready to drive on
For auto stop to happen, the following conditions are to be met:
•  Engine Stop/Start system is in active condition by default and should not be turned off using the selection switch
•  Bonnet is fully closed
•  In the current ignition cycle, the vehicle has crossed 7 kmph at least once
•  Current status of the engine is idling
•  Vehicle speed is zero
•  Accelerator pedal and clutch pedal are fully released
•  Vehicle battery should be in healthy condition
•  Engine is warm (Engine coolant temperature is between 25 degree C and 100 degree C). This is an extra precaution to ensure safe working of the engine
•  Fuel temperature is less than 60 degree C
•  Gear in neutral
•  DPF REGEN should not be in active state
•  Vehicle should not have DEF error codes E14, E24 & E34l
•  OBD and CHECK ENGINE telltale in OFF condition
For auto start to happen, the following conditions are to be met:
•  Vehicle should have been stopped by the Engine Stop/Start System
•  Gear lever is in the neutral position, Clutch pedal is fully de-pressed
•  Vehicle speed is zero
•  Engine Stop/Start System is in active state
•  Bonnet should be closed
6.13.2 Overview of the Engine Stop/Start System – AT
Graphic
Graphic
Engine Stop/Start system is activated by the Engine Stop/Start button in the driver side switch bank. The LED on the button indicates the status of the button.
How does the Engine Stop/Start System Work?
Let’s take a simple example of driving in traffic conditions within your city. Assume that your vehicle has stopped at a traffic junction due to a red signal. The following steps illustrate how the system functions:
•  The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the “D” Mode and the brake pedal is pressed
•  The Engine Stop/Start lamp in the cluster will blink indicating that the engine is going to stop shortly. The engine will shut down automatically after a specific time period
•  The Engine Stop/Start lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster indicating the engine was stopped by the “Engine Stop/Start” System
•  Once the signal turns green, release the brake pedal and the engine starts immediately
•  The indicator in the cluster goes OFF indicating that the engine has started again and you are ready to drive on
For auto stop to happen, the following conditions are to be met:
•  Engine Stop/Start system is in active condition by default and should not be turned off using the selection switch
•  Bonnet is fully closed
•  In the current ignition cycle, the vehicle has crossed 10 kmph at least once
•  Current status of the engine is idling
•  Vehicle speed is zero
•  Brake pedal is fully pressed
•  Vehicle battery should be in healthy condition
•  Engine is warm (Engine coolant temperature is between 25 degree C and 100 degree C). This is an extra precaution to ensure safe working of the engine
•  Fuel temperature is less than 60 degree C
•  Gear shift Lever in ‘D’ mode
•  Vehicle should not be in slope
•  DPF REGEN should not be in active state
•  Vehicle should not have DEF error codes E14, E24 & E34l
•  AT Warning telltale in OFF condition
•  OBD and CHECK ENGINE telltale in OFF condition
For auto start to happen, the following conditions are to be met:
•  Vehicle should have been stopped by the Engine Stop/Start System
•  Gear lever is in ‘D’ mode and brake pedal is fully released
•  Vehicle speed is zero
•  Engine Stop/Start System is in active state
•  Bonnet should be closed
6.13.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
1. What is the advantage of the system?
The Engine Stop/Start System aids in attaining better fuel efficiency on your vehicle and thus reducing your running costs. However, the mileage improvement will depend upon various parameters such as prevailing traffic, driving patterns, etc.
2. What are the other advantages of the system?
•  Since the engine is switched off during traffic signals / jams, considerable amount of CO2 release in the atmosphere is avoided. This reduces global warming and thus provides us with a cleaner atmosphere to live
•  Ability to start the engine by pressing the clutch pedal
•  Reduces noise pollution at traffic signals
3. Is it possible to start the engine through the clutch pedal for the first time?
No, the engine can be cranked only with the ignition key for the first time. If the engine is stopped automatically by the system, only then it is possible to start the engine through clutch pedal in MT
4. How to activate/deactivate the system?
The system is activated by default during every ignition cycle. The LED indication on the Engine Stop/Start switch indicates the status of the system. The system can be turned OFF or back ON using the Engine Stop/Start switch.
5. Whether the system will get activated as soon as the engine is started the first time with the ignition key?
No, the Engine Stop/Start system can be activated only by the Engine Stop/Start switch, provided all listed conditions (in the previous section) are met. This is to ensure better performance of the engine in terms of fuel economy and durability.
6. What is to be done, if I don’t want the system to stop my engine at traffic signals/jams?
The system can be turned OFF by the Engine Stop/Start button in the central bezel switch bank.
7. Whether the A/C will function, if the engine is switched off?
No, the A/C will not work. However, the blower will be in operation when the ignition is ON.
8. What will happen if I keep the clutch continuously pressed at traffic signals/jams?
The system will not stop the engine if the clutch is continuously pressed since it indicates the driver’s intention of moving the vehicle immediately.
9. When the battery charge is low, whether the engine will be switched off?
If the battery charge drops below a certain threshold level, the system will not stop the engine so as to preserve the battery from further draining.
10. Whether I will be able to operate the engine with the normal ignition key?
Yes, normal operation with the ignition key is always possible.
11. Whether the vehicle will start (or) stop in gear for MT?
The vehicle will not start or stop automatically in gear to ensure safety. It will do so only in the neutral position of the gear lever.
12. Whether the system will stop my engine in moving traffic?
No, the engine will be stopped only when the vehicle speed is zero.
13. Whether the audio system will be switched OFF, when the engine shuts down?
No, the audio system will not be switched OFF and you can continue to enjoy the music.
14. Whether the engine will re-crank whenever the clutch pedal is pressed in MT?
No, when the engine is running, the starter motor will not attempt to re-crank.
15. If any component involved in the system fails, what will happen?
The system has a built-in diagnostic module which understands the failure and immediately goes to bypass mode. In the bypass mode, the engine can be turned ON and OFF by ignition key as usual.
6.14 Fuel-BS VI
Graphic
For Diesel: Use commercially available vehicular Ultra-low Sulfur Highway Diesel that meets the BIS standard (IS 1460; 2017 BS VI specification or equivalent). Information on diesel quality can normally be found in the fuel pump.
Please contact filling station personnel in case labels in the pump cannot be found. If the diesel fuel with high sulfur content (more than 10 PPM) and unspecified additives are used, it can cause the DPF system damage and emission warranty issues.
For Petrol (Manual Transmission) - Use only commercially available Petrol fuel conforming to IS 2796: 2017 BS-VI specification or equivalent (With Maximum 10% Ethanol content - E10 fuel) Information on Petrol quality can normally be found in the fuel pump. Please contact filling station personnel in case labels in the pump cannot be found.
Graphic
For Petrol (Automatic Transmission) - Use only commercially available Petrol fuel conforming to IS 2796: 2017 BS-VI specification or equivalent and / or E20 fuel confirming to IS17021;2018 specification. In either case of fuel, minimum Research Octane Number (RON) to be 95. Information on Petrol quality can normally be found in the fuel pump. Please contact filling station personnel in case labels in the pump cannot be found.
Graphic
Do not “top up” after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refuelling
Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident
Do not fill the fuel tank or mix the fuel with alcohol based fuels, kerosene, etc. This will damage the engine, fuel and exhaust system components.
If you have accidentally filled the fuel tank with incorrect or non- approved fuel, do not start the vehicle. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer to have the fuel system drained completely.
6.14.1 Fuelling during Winter
During freezing weather, if fuel is not winterised or is insufficiently winterised, waxing/gelling may start in fuel, leading to interruption in fuel supply to engine. For smooth functioning and reliable operation of the engine during cold weather conditions, use winterised ULSD which are available at the filling stations during winter months. Check with your fuel retailer for further details.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapours and any skin or clothing contact. Direct skin contact with diesel /Petrol or the inhalation of fuel vapour may affect your health.
Diesel/Petrol is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Never allow sparks, flames or smoking materials near diesel/Petrol. Turn OFF the engine before refuelling. Whenever you are around diesel/Petrol, extinguish all smoking materials.
6.14.2 Minimum Fuel Requirement
It is recommended maintaining a minimum of 10 litres of fuel in the fuel tank. Driving the vehicle till the fuel tank is empty is not recommended. Always have sufficient fuel in the tank. Check the fuel level prior to starting your journey.
Never carry fuel in separate containers in the vehicle, it is dangerous and may lead to inadvertent fuel leak or spillage.
6.15 Brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes in the front and rear wheels.
Disc brakes offer good braking capability and reduced stopping distance. Wet brake discs result in reduced braking efficiency. After a car wash or driving the vehicle through water, apply and release brake pedal mildly while driving to remove the film of water from the brake disc.
1. Front brake pad : The Front brake pads are equipped with Electronic Pad Wear Sensors, thus when the brake pads are worn out, the brake warning lamp on cluster will turn ON. Replace the brake pads as soon as possible
2. Rear Brake Pad : The rear brake pads are equipped with Mechanical Pad Wear Sensors, thus when the brake pads are worn out, there will be a metallic rubbing noise from the rear brake pads. Replace the brake pads as soon as possible
Even if the power assist (vacuum assistance) is completely lost, the brakes will still work. The brake pedal would be much harder than normal and the vehicle stopping / braking distance will be longer than usual
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous. Stopping distance increases considerably while braking
Brake squeal occurs as a high frequency whistling noise usually at the end of the stop while pressing the brake pedal, squeal can occur from front or rear or from both ends. This is a normal condition caused by environmental factors such as cold, wet, snow, etc and vehicle usage pattern
Brake Creep-Groan occurs as a low-frequency (Kar-Kar) noise which occurs in AT vehicles when the vehicle is ON and D/R mode is selected and the brake pedal is released slowly to move the vehicle
6.15.1 Parking on a Hill/Incline
If you have to park the vehicle with front side facing the uphill, select first gear for MT vehicle & park position for AT vehicles and also turn the front wheels away from the kerb.
If you have to park the vehicle with front side facing downhill, select reverse gear and turn the front wheels towards the kerb.
Always ensure that the vehicle is in gear and parking brakes is engaged before leaving the vehicle.
Graphic
When parking on an uphill, turn the front wheels away from the Kerb/Pavement
Graphic
When parking on a downhill, turn the front wheels towards the Kerb/Pavement.
While driving in a continuous down gradient at high speeds, always engage the appropriate gear to reduce aggressive and sustained brake usage. Aggressive and sustained brake usage can cause higher brake pad temperatures and fading.
6.15.2 Parking Brake – Manual (if equipped)
Graphic
To apply the parking brake, pull the park brake lever up as firmly as possible. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON, the parking brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates.
To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press the release button on the lever tip and lower the parking brake lever completely.
The parking brake warning lamp indicates only the parking brake status. It does not indicate the degree of brake application. Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear shift lever is in gear. When parking on a hill; first apply the parking brake; after that shift the TGS lever to the P position (for AT) and gear for MT. This will avoid the load on the transmission, locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of gear.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving off. Failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes. It will also result in reduced fuel efficiency lowered brake pad life and rear brake squeal
•  Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident
•  Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle, and be certain to leave the transmission in gear. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage, hit a bystander resulting in personal injury
•  Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake or the gear shift lever. Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could move the vehicle leading to accidents
•  The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle
6.16 Electric Parking Brake-EPB (if equipped)
The EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) is a safety feature with enhanced comfort, the parking brakes are applied/released by simple switch operation.
The EPB system replaces the conventional manual parking brake which requires high effort to apply & release.
In addition to the switch based Apply, EPB also provides additional safety/comfort features like EPB auto apply, auto release, Auto vehicle hold, Controlled deceleration for parking, rear wheel un-locker and roll away re-clamp.
6.16.1 Applying EPB
Graphic
Park the vehicle in a safe place and pull up the EPB switch.
Graphic
The parking brake warning lamp on the instrument cluster and the red Illumination on the EPB switch is turned on, indicating that the parking brake is applied.
6.16.2 Releasing EPB
Graphic
Press down the EPB switch with the brake pedal depressed.
Graphic
The parking brake warning lamp on the instrument cluster and the red Illumination on the EPB switch is turned off, indicating that the parking brake is released.
6.16.3 AUTO Apply EPB
For added comfort and for safety reasons the EPB will get automatically applied in the following conditions.
1. Ignition is turned Off.
2. AT vehicle –gear shifted to Park
3. Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and Driver door open.
4. Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and Driver seat belt unbuckled.
5. Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and AVH switch pressed to release AVH Active state.
6. Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in active state continuously for more than 5 minutes
7. Auto vehicle hold (AVH) active and engine turned OFF by engine start stop feature
How to override EPB Auto Apply – MT
If in any case, EPB auto apply feature needs to be overridden, it can be achieved by a simple switch-based operation, which is mentioned below:
1. Stop the vehicle
2. Push and hold EPB switch in release position
3. Holding the EPB switch in released position, turn the ignition OFF
4. This prevents EPB from automatically getting applied
In any case, where the vehicle needs to be moved in ignition OFF condition, EPB auto apply override feature to be utlilized.
In case of any Switch related failure when vehicle in standstill, the EPB Auto release feature must be used to release EPB, if EPB Auto release feature doesn’t work, contact Service center in such cases to release the EPB
How to override EPB Auto Apply – AT
EPB manual override feature can be used to push the vehicle after turning the ignition OFF or in any breakdown condition.
•  Position TGS lever in neutral (N).
•  Push and hold the EPB switch, simultaneously press and hold the start stop button (SSB) till ignition is turned OFF.
•  This operation prevents EPB auto apply and EPB will be in disengaged state.
In this case, vehicle remains in accessory state (SSB LED in amber color) before completely getting turned OFF, for 30 seconds or till driver door is opened.
6.16.4 AUTO Releasing EPB/Drive Away
For Automatic Transmission Vehicles (AT)
1. Close the driver door and fasten the driver seat belt.
2. Shift the gear selector lever to the D / M or R position
3. Release the brake pedal and then depress the accelerator pedal slowly.
4. The EPB is released automatically, thus enabling forward or backward movement of the vehicle.
5. The red Illumination on the EPB switch and the brake tell-tale on cluster is turned off, indicating that the parking brake is released.
For Manual Transmission Vehicles (MT)
1. Close the driver door and fasten the driver seat belt.
2. Shift the gear to forward or reverse gear.
3. Then slowly release the clutch pedal and depress the Accelerator pedal to drive away.
4. The EPB is released automatically, thus enabling forward or backward movement of the vehicle.
5. The red Illumination on the EPB switch and the brake tell-tale on cluster is turned off, indicating that the parking brake is released.
The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated if driver door is not closed or if the driver seat belt is not fastened. The driver will get message on cluster to ensure the same.
If the EPB is being released using the accelerator pedal , be cautious if the vehicle is parked uphill. In this scenario if an aggressive accelerator pedal input is given, it can also result in wheel spin. The wheel spin will cause ESP to intervene.
6.16.5 EPB Warning Lamp / Parking Brake Warning Lamp
Graphic
This tell-tale is turned ON in the cluster when EPB is applied properly.
Graphic
This tell-tale is turned ON in the cluster when there is a malfunction in the EPB system.
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorized Service Centre
Do’s
Driving Conditions
•  For EPB Auto release and Drive Away always wear driver seat belt and ensure that the driver door is closed
•  In MT vehicles, drive away with clutch alone modulation not possible, thus always modulate the clutch pedal and accelerator pedal for effective drive away.
Don’ts
Driving Conditions
•  If the EPB Malfunction lamp is ON and the brake is engaged. Do not drive.
•  Avoid using EPB after doing water wading. Please get the vehicle checked in workshop.
Servicing: Do not get your vehicle serviced at an unauthorized service center.
•  The EPB can also be used in cases of emergency braking. Release the accelerator and Pull and hold the EPB button until your vehicle comes to standstill and EPB gets applied. This should be done only in emergency condition and not as a regular action.
•  The braking process is interrupted when the EPB button is released or the accelerator pedal is actuated in dynamic condition
•  The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated when the driver door or the seat belt is not fastened.
•  Motor noise can be heard during the EPB operation, this is normal behavior.
•  If the EPB warning lamp stays on, have the vehicle serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service Centre.
•  Do not let children or other people who are not familiar with the EPB system operate the EPB switch. There is a danger of accidents depending on the parking/stationary state of the vehicle.
•  If you hear noises or smell a burnt odor from the related components after using the EPB emergency mode, have the vehicle checked and serviced
6.17 Auto Vehicle Hold/Auto Hold (AVH) (if equipped)
The AVH is a comfort feature offered with Electric parking brake.
The function of AVH is to hold the vehicle in standstill with the applied driver brake pressure
Once AVH switch is pressed, it remains in memory and thus driver doesn’t have to press AVH switch every time
The AVH feature can exist in 4 states in the vehicle, which are as follows.
AVH Off – AVH switch is not pressed, thus AVH is not available.
Graphic
AVH Standby – AVH is available but is in standby mode.
Graphic
AVH Active – AVH is available and is controlling/holding the vehicle in standstill.
Graphic
AVH Faulty – Indicates  some fault in AVH, because of which AVH not available
For the AUTO HOLD to function, the following conditions should be met.
•  Engine ON
•  Driver door closed and Driver seat belt buckled.
When AVH is active and Driver door is opened/Driver seat belt is unbuckled, the EPB gets automatically applied for safety reasons.
6.17.1 Activation of AVH
Graphic
1. Ensure driver door closed and Driver seat belt buckled
2. Press the AUTO HOLD switch button. Auto Hold tell-tale in cluster goes to standby.
The LED indicator on the AUTO HOLD switch is illuminated in Amber color.
6.17.2 Deactivation of AVH
Graphic
Press the AUTO HOLD switch with AUTO HOLD activated to deactivate the feature
Operating Auto hold
1. Pressing the AUTO HOLD switch turns on the AUTO HOLD indicator on cluster (white).
2. Depress the brake pedal while driving to stop the vehicle.
3. The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the instrument cluster is changed from white to green and the brake is applied.
4. Slowly depress the accelerator pedal when driving off.
5. The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the instrument cluster is changed from green to white and the brake is released.
If the AUTO HOLD function remains active for more than 5 minutes or if the driver door is opened/seat belt is unbuckled the EPB applies automatically and AVH is disabled.
•  When driving off on a downhill by depressing the accelerator pedal, be careful as the vehicle can accelerate suddenly and on uphill sufficient accelerator pedal input to be provided for overcoming the gradient.
•  Do not depress the accelerator pedal abruptly with the AUTO HOLD function is activated. Otherwise, the parking brake is released, and the vehicle can accelerate suddenly
•  If the EPB warning lamp is turned on or there is a fault in the EPB system, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service Centre. If parking the vehicle is required in an emergency, pull over the vehicle on a flat surface and chock the wheels after shifting the gear selector lever to the P position
Controlled Deceleration for Parking (CDP)
•  The Controlled Deceleration for parking is a safety feature.
•  The CDP functions can be made used in any case such as Brake pedal/Brake Booster/Master Cylinder failure because of which sufficient brake force can’t be achieved through the brake pedal.
•  In such conditions, pulling the EPB Switch triggers the ESP Control unit to generate a pressure build up in the brake system which produces the braking force at individual wheels to bring the vehicle to an emergency stop.
•  For unintentional application, if the codriver or any other person pulls the EPB switch without driver’s notice in dynamic condition, The CDP function can be overridden by the driver by pressing Accelerator pedal.
•  The CDP functionality having a high rate of deceleration, anyone other than the driver must be advised not to pull the EPB switch in any case while driving.
•  The CDP function is a safety feature and must be used in the cases of emergency only.
EPB Roll Away Re-clamp
•  If the EPB system detects any rolling after EPB is applied, the motor on caliper re-clamps the disc to avoid any rolling.
•  As an added feature, to avoid roll away due the reduction in clamp force due to decrease in temperature, the EPB motor on caliper re-clamps the disc multiple times based on the temperature.
Servicing and Repairing
The EPB is a complex system involving electrical and hydraulics, it is strictly advised to get it repaired or serviced in a Mahindra Authorized service Centre .
6.17.3 Electric Parking Brake (EPB) Alert
Display Operating Conditions
Graphic
This message is displayed on the Cluster when the EPB switch is released without depressing the brake pedal to deactivate EPB.
Graphic
This message is displayed on the Cluster in the following conditions:
1. When the accelerator pedal is depressed to auto release EPB, with EPB Applied and driver door open/driver seat belt unbuckled.
2. When the AVH switch is depressed to activate AVH, with driver door open/driver seat belt unbuckled.
6.18 Hazard on Panic Braking
Hazard lamps are turned ON during panic braking for 5 seconds when the following conditions are met:
•  Ignition is ON
•  Vehicle speed is greater than 60 kmph
•  Panic/sudden brake is applied and high deceleration rate is sensed
6.19 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-lock Brake System (also called as ABS) is designed to help prevent lock-up of the wheels and stable stopping of vehicle during a sudden, panic emergency braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. The ABS system takes input from wheel speed sensors and brake pedal switch to control the brake fluid pressures at the wheels to avoid wheel lock-up. It allows vehicle to be steered during braking.
The minimum speed for ABS to function is 12 kmph. ABS is activated only during wheel lock conditions where ABS takes over and prevents wheel lock.
During the ABS operation, a slight pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal to indicate ABS is active. You may also hear motor noise from the engine compartment. It is recommended to hold the brake pedal firmly while the ABS is active rather than pumping the brake pedal.
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, a joint in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day, tends to activate the anti-lock brake system.
Graphic
The ABS warning lamp lights up when you switch ON the ignition and should go out after a few seconds. If the ABS warning lamp does not go out or if it comes ON while driving, it means there is a fault in the ABS system. In both cases, the normal braking system remains efficient, exactly as on a vehicle without ABS. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
The ABS is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. The stopping distance may be longer in the following cases:
•  Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads
•  Driving with tyre chains installed
•  Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road
•  Driving on roads where the road surface is potholes or large differences in surface height
Do not overestimate the Anti-lock Brake System: Although the Anti-lock Brake System assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. There are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with ABS active.
If tyre grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the Anti-lock Brake System will not be able to completely avoid wheel lock-up
6.20 Electric Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD is a subsystem of the ABS system, It prevents least loaded wheel from locking on application of brakes, thus allows the wheel to maintain tractive contact with the road surface. The system monitors the wheel speed and when it identifies any slip, the pressure in the wheel cylinders is dumped thus preventing the wheels from locking.
A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the parking brake as well as ABS warning lamps. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
6.21 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (if equipped)
This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP corrects for over-steering and under-steering behavior of the vehicle by applying the brake on the appropriate wheel automatically.
ESP uses inbuilt sensors to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle , compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over-steer or under-steer.
Graphic
Over-steer - When the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Under-steer - When the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The ESP cannot overrule the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction due to the prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skilful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle can not compensate for reckless or dangerous driving that could endanger the user’s safety or the safety of others on road or passerby.
6.21.1 ESP ON
Graphic
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in active mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
When the ESP is in operation, ESP indicator lamp will blink in the instrument cluster.
When the ESP is operating, you can feel a slight pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and indicates that braking had gone to ABS zone. Suggest that the driver should slow down the speed are not matching the road surface.
When moving out of the mud or slippery road, accelerator response may be different because ESP system controls the engine RPM to come out of this slippery road condition. This is normal.
6.21.2 ESP OFF
Graphic
In some driving conditions, to maximize traction, it may be beneficial to de-activate ESP.
Such conditions are:
•  To start in deep snow or on a loose surface
•  Driving in deep sand
•  Driving through deep mud etc.
Graphic
To de-activate ESP, press ESP OFF button on the driver control switch bank. Once ESP OFF mode is selected, a warning indicator illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Press ESP OFF button again to activate ESP function.
For safety reasons, ESP will be automatically re-activated once the vehicle speed crosses 64 kmph
Mahindra recommends that ESP be operational in all normal driving conditions.
When ESP is in OFF mode, other functions like HHC (Hill Hold Control), HBA (Hydraulic Brake Assist), HDC (Hill Descent Control), DTC (Drag Torque Control), ROM (Roll Over Mitigation) will be available
ESP, by default, will be in ON condition for every ignition cycle.
Graphic
If the ESP indicator blinks while driving, it indicates that ESP is working. However If this lamp is blinking continuously or remains ON, it indicates a malfunction in the ESP system. Drive carefully to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer and get the ESP system checked.
6.22 Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) (If equipped)
The HBA function is designed to optimize the vehicles braking ability during emergency braking situations, the system detects a panic braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and generates an additional brake-force boost to the driver if required.
During a panic braking situation, the brake pressure is raised to the locking pressure. For the HBA to become active, the brake Pedal must be pressed throughout the braking maneuver, that is the brakes must not be pumped and released.
The HBA function gets deactivated, when the brake pedal is released thus do not release brake pressure unless braking is no longer needed
•  The HBA system cannot prevent collisions, the capabilities of an HBA equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could risk the user’s safety.
•  The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HBA feature to prevent accidents.
6.23 Hill Descent Control (HDC) (if equipped)
Graphic
This System assists the driver to descend a steep slope by means of brake intervention limiting the vehicle speed without driver's input on brakes. This does not replace cruise control
During HDC, if the wheel slip becomes excessive, ABS will be activated automatically.
HDC is a user-intended function. To activate, press HDC button on the driver control switch bank. The LED on the button illuminates indicating the status. Press the button again to deactivate HDC.
The HDC feature can control the vehicle speed from 8 kmph to 35 kmph, Above 35 kmph the HDC feature will go to ready mode. The HDC feature will be deactivated automatically if vehicle speed is more than 60 kmph. (For Activating the HDC feature again, the driver needs to press the HDC button once again within the specified speed limits)
The HDC should be enabled only on steep gradient. It is not recommended to be ON in plain road- to avoid accidental intervention
While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed, descent speeds can be varied by cruise buttons, accelerator pedal & brake pedal.
To Set the desired descending speed, follow the steps listed below:
•  SET Speed — This is the driver desired speed at which vehicle should descent. This can be set using HDC switch or brake/accelerator pedals.(example: when the driver activates HDC at a speed of 30 kmph, then set speed will be 30 kmph). HDC will limit vehicle descent speed to set value).
•  If driver presses the accelerator pedal and increases the speed from 30 kmph to 34 kmph and then releases the accelerator pedal. Now the new SET speed will be 34 kmph
•  Similarly, if the driver applies brake and reduces the speed from 30 kmph to 10 kmph and then releases the brake pedal, now the new SET speed will be 10 kmph
•  If the vehicle cruise speed is with in the HDC active region, similarly the set speed can be modified using cruise +/- buttons (by tapping the “SET —” or “SET +” buttons. Each press of the button will adjust the speed by approximately 0.5 kmph)
The descent speed increases only if the gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the “SET +” button may result in no speed increase.
6.24 Hill Hold Control (HHC) (if equipped)
Imagine a situation where your vehicle is stopped on an uphill incline. If you release the brake while moving off, there are chances that your vehicle may roll back. HHC helps in such situations by holding the vehicle from rolling back.
Hill Hold Control function uses the inbuilt acceleration sensor to identify the gradient and holds the vehicle for 2 seconds in MT and 1 seconds in AT vehicles after the brake pedals are released. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal
The Following conditions must be met in order for the HHC to activate:
1. The Vehicle must be equipped with HHC
2. The vehicle must be on sufficient gradient
3. The Parking brake must not be applied
The HHC will function on both vehicle facing Up hill and vehicle facing downhill, provided the correct gears are selected.
•  Vehicle Facing Uphill – Gear should be in Forward
•  Vehicle Facing Downhill – Gear should be in Reverse
•  In some situations, when the conditions are not met, the HHC may not get activated. In such cases slight rolling may occur.
•  The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HHC system to prevent rolling.
6.25 Hydraulic Fade Compensation (HFC)
Due to continuous brake operations, the temperature of the brake disc may get raised, due to which the friction between the brake pads and the brake disc may get reduced alarmingly, this is known as Brake Fading.
HFC provides an additional braking-force boost to the driver, based on the pad temperature model, brake pressure and deceleration rate, to reduce the braking distances in such cases.
The HFC will activate only during high brake pedal force application.
•  The HFC system cannot prevent collisions, the capabilities of an HFC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety.
•  The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HFC feature to prevent road accidents.
6.26 Roll Over Mitigation (ROM)
Roll Over Mitigation system is a safety function which anticipates the wheel lift due to lateral forces. The ROM function analyses the rate of change of steering wheel angle and the wheel speed to determine any possible wheel lift, the system then applies appropriate brake and may also reduce the engine power to reduce the chances of wheel lift.
In any instance where physical limits of Long. and lateral tyre road grip are not exceeded, RMF reduces the lateral forces that will lead to a critical roll moment about the center of gravity.
Minimum Vehicle speed for ROM = 25 kmph
Maximum Vehicle speed for ROM = 120 kmph
•  Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.
•  The ROM system cannot prevent all roll overs; thus ROM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
6.27 Brake Disc Wiping
When a vehicle is driven in a wet condition; the accumulated wetness on the brake disks leads to an elongated brake response time.
The BDW function actuates the brakes with a low pressure, such that; the brake pads comes in contact with the rotating brake disks, creating a wiping action; thereby removing the moisture from the brake disks.
For the Brake Disc Wiping function to get activated, the following conditions must be met.
1. Vehicle speed above 70kmph.
2. Accelerator Pedal must be pressed.
3. The Wipers must be in ON condition (Low/High Speed)
The Pressure generated in the BDW function is very small and this is not felt by the driver during normal driving conditions.
•  The system will not be able to sense water splashed on disc from situations such as water wash or water puddles.
•  It is suggested that the driver dry the brakes in the above said conditions by driving at very slow speed and applying the brakes lightly until the brake performance becomes normal.
6.28 Electric Brake Prefill - EBP
EBP is a value-added feature in ESP, the target of the function is to reduce the air gap of the wheel brake by putting low brake pressure to the brake pads such that the brake pads come in close proximity to the brake disc.
The system detects an emergency braking by monitoring the rate of release of the acceleration pedal. A sudden release of accelerator pedal signifies an upcoming sudden braking.
By actively pre-filling the brake-system, the brake response time is reduced for an upcoming braking and full vehicle deceleration is achieved earlier. This results in a shorter stopping distance.
6.29 Second Collision Mitigation System (SCM)
The SCM feature in the ESP system is an autonomous braking system which decreases the speed of the vehicle after the first collision by means of autonomous braking interventions. This reduces the risk of a subsequent crash due to uncontrolled vehicle movement.
For the Second Collision Mitigation feature to get activated, the following conditions must be met.
1. There must be a front collision detected with a certain severity, where airbags gets deployed
2. The impact speed must be greater than approx. 10 km/h.
3. The brakes, the ESP and other required electrical systems remain functional after impact.
4. The accelerator pedal must not be actuated.
6.30 Driver Drowsiness Detection System (DDD)
The Driver Drowsiness Detection system advises the driver to take a break from continuous long duration driving when driver fatigue can be detected based on the driver's steering behavior.
The system evaluates the steering behavior at speeds of 60-200 km/h.
Conditions under which a break from driving is detected by the system are as follows.
•  The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off.
•  The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed, and the driver's door opened.
•  The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes.
If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes.
The Drowsiness alert should be enabled in the driver assistance screen.
Pause Recommendation
Graphic
This alert comes in the display of instrument cluster when the system detects the driver is quiet sleepy or very sleepy, along with audible signal.
•  When the vehicle is driven continuously for more than 2 hours and if the system detects driver as “Quite Sleepy”, an alert message along with audio signal appears in the instrument cluster. Cluster will display the alert message till the user presses the “OK” button from steering wheel switch.
•  After pressing the OK button, if break is not detected by the system for next 15 minutes, alert message will repeat again. If the drowsiness is continuously sensed and if the system detects driver as “Very Sleepy”, next level alert message & audio signal will be triggered along with steering wheel haptic feedback.
Driver Attention Level: The Driver attention level is calculated based on driving behavior and many external parameters and the attention level is displayed to the driver in the Drive Info Tab
Driver Attention Level
Description
Graphic
Very Awake
Graphic
Quite Awake
Graphic
Neither Awake nor Sleepy
Graphic
Quite Sleepy
Graphic
Very Sleepy
•  The driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if you feel tired.
•  The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed.
•  Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips.
•  There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep.
•  In some situations, the system can evaluate the steering behavior incorrectly and therefore falsely display a break recommendation.
•  The system is designed primarily for use on highways.
6.31 Wheels and Tyres
6.31.1 Tyre Information
Graphic
A: RADIAL TYRES OR BIAS-PLY TYRE
B: “TUBELESS” OR “TUBE TYPE”
C: TYRE SIZE
D: MAX. LOAD LIMIT
E: TREAD WEAR
6.31.2 Tyre Rating
Your vehicle is originally equipped with tyres supplied by a reputable manufacturer. If you ever have any questions regarding your tyres, please refer to literature supplied by the tyre manufacturer, or to the separate tyre warranty provided by the tyre manufacturer. You may also contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer directly, or the tyre manufacturer.
The tyre rating of your vehicle is:
•  235/65 R17 103/104 V/H
•  Optional P235/60 R18 103/104 V/H
•  Temporary Spare Tyre T155/90 R18 113M
Tyre rating is explained as below:
Graphic
Tyre size (Example: 235/65 R17 104H)
Callout (A) : 235 (Three-digit number) : This number gives the width in millimetres of the tyre from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. This is called as “Section Width”.
Callout (B) : 65 (Two-digit number) : This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tyres ratio of height to section width.
Callout (C) : R : This is the Tyre Construction Code. The “R” stands for Radial.
Callout (D) :17 (Two-digit number) : This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
Callout (E) :104 (Two or three-digit number) : This number is the tyres load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tyre can support.
Callout (F) : H : Tyre speed rating or speed symbol. Never drive the vehicle faster than the tyre speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tyre is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.
6.31.3 Speed Rating
SPEED SYMBOL MAX. SPEED CAPABILITY
KM/HR
L
120
M
130
N
140
P
150
Q
160
R
170
S
180
T
190
U
200
H
210
V
240
W
270
Y
300
Z
240+
6.31.4 Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard)
Graphic
Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard) is located on the driver side inner B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about tyre size designed for your vehicle, and the tyre inflation pressures for the front & rear tyres.
Graphic
Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can cause tyre failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Improper inflated tyres can adversely affect vehicle handling or can fail unexpectedly, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
  Regular Tyre Temporary Tyre
Dynamic Rolling radius (mm)
358 +/- 5
358 +/- 5
6.31.5 Tyre Pressure
Proper Tyre inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper Tyre pressure:
•  Safety
•  Economy
•  Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper Tyre inflation contributes to a comfortable and safe ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. Unequal Tyre pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response or may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the Tyre tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier Tyre replacement. Under inflation also increases Tyre rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
The proper cold Tyre inflation pressure is listed in the Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard), located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar.
6.31.6 Inspection and Adjustment Procedure
The Tyre pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as inspected for signs of Tyre wear or visible damage, at least once a month. Use a good quality pressure gauge to check Tyre pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial Tyres may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated. At the same time, each Tyre should be inspected for signs of Tyre wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold Tyre inflation pressures. Cold Tyre inflation pressure is defined as the Tyre pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 km after a three-hour period. Check Tyre pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as Tyre pressures vary with temperature changes. Tyre pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 7°C of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking Tyre pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.
When it was new, the spare Tyre in your vehicle was fully inflated. However, a spare Tyre can lose pressure over time. In order to avoid being stranded, check the spare Tyre air pressure frequently.
6.31.7 Inflating Your Tyres
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your Tyres are properly inflated. Remember that a Tyre can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat.
At least once a month or before long trips, inspect each Tyre and check the Tyre pressure with a Tyre gauge (including spare Tyre). Inflate all Tyres to the recommended inflation pressure.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of Tyre failures and may result in severe Tyre cracking, tread separation or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the Tyre. It also may result in unnecessary Tyre stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.
•  Over or under inflation may reduce the tyre life
•  Do not correct the tyre pressure immediately after the vehicle is stopped after operation, server handling or long distance drive. Check the inflation pressure when the vehicle is idle for 3 hours or 10 minutes of driving after 3 hours in idle condition
•  Do not drive the vehicle with lower pressure than recommended, which may lead to over heating of sidewall resulting in tyre damage
•  Check the tyre pressures once in a month or before long distance travels
•  Check your tyres regularly for any damages or cut on the sidewall. Please replace the tyres immediately.
Always inflate your Tyres to the recommended pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the Tyre. The recommended Tyre inflation pressure is found on the Tyre Label which is located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar. Failure to follow the Tyre pressure recommendations can cause uneven tread wear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
If you overfill the Tyre, release air by pushing the metal stem in the centre of the valve. Then recheck the pressure.
After inspecting or adjusting the Tyre pressure, always reinstal the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the stem, resulting in an unexpected loss of Tyre pressure, an accident and/or personal injury.
6.31.8 Radial Ply Tyres
Combining radial ply Tyres with other types of Tyres on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury. Always use radial Tyres in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of Tyres.
Cuts and punctures in radial Tyres are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for radial Tyre repairs.
6.31.9 Tread Wear Indicators (TWI)
Tread wear indicators are moulded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear in two or more adjacent grooves, the Tyre should be replaced.
Avoid abrupt manoeuvring and braking. This can cause Tyre deterioration and lead to loss of steering or braking control.
6.31.10 Life of Tyre
The service life of a Tyre is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to:
•  Driving style
•  Tyre pressure
•  Distance driven
Tyres and the spare Tyre should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden and unexpected Tyre failure, leading to an accident and/or personal injury.
Keep dismounted Tyres in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect Tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuels.
Do not use a Tyre, wheel size or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle on the Tyre placard. Combinations of unapproved Tyres and wheels may change suspension geometric and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling, stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control of the vehicle or the Tyre can unexpectedly fail, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.
Replacing original Tyres with Tyres of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
6.31.11 Snow Chains
Snow chains cannot be used on these Tyres.
In case of harsh winter driving conditions, it is recommended using winter Tyres with the same specifications for better stability, safety and performance.
6.31.12 Tyre Rotation Recommendations
Type 1 - Applicable for Front wheel Drive Vehicles
Graphic
Tyres on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow the recommended tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving.
Type 2 – Applicable for All wheel Drive Vehicles
It is recommended rotating the tyres as per the “Maintenance Schedule”.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the diagram. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-road type tyres.
Graphic
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow the recommended tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving.
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
6.31.13 Temporary Spare Wheel
Regular Tyre
Temporary Tyre
Graphic
Graphic
The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running.
When Using the Temporary Spare Wheel
•  Temporary Spare Wheel provided specifically designed for your vehicle.
•  Do not use more than one Temporary Spare Wheel simultaneously.
•  Drive the shortest possible distance with Temporary Spare Wheel.
•  While using Temporary spare wheel reduce speed, Avoid sharp cornering, Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.
When Temporary Spare Wheel is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:
ABS, Cruise control (If equipped), EPS, Rear View monitor system (If equipped), Navigation system (If equipped)
Speed Limit when using Temporary Spare tyre
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a Temporary Spare Wheel is installed on the vehicle.
The temporary Spare Wheel is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
•  The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the Temporary Spare tyre compared to when driving with standard tyres. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.
•  Inflate the tyres as per manufacturers recommendation, refer Tyre pressure label on the door panel
•  TPMS is not provided in temporary spare wheel
•  Do not fit tyre chains to the Temporary spare tyre.
Tyre chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
•  Tyre to be loaded within the max allowable load limit specified by the load rating index marked on the tyre.
•  Tyre to be operated with in the speed limit specified by the speed rating index marked on the tyre
•  The tread depth of temporary tyre is lesser compared to regular tyre. Hence do not use the temporary tyre for longer distance than recommended. Repair & refit the regular tyre as soon as possible.
•  Recommended to drive Max 50 km in a stretch or reach nearest Mahindra authorised dealer
6.31.14 Changing a Flat Tyre
Refer to “Changing a Flat Tyre” section in the Emergencies chapter for details.
6.31.15 Wheel Tightness
When you change a wheel, remove all rust and dirt at all locations where the wheel contacts the wheel hub. Use a scraper or wire brush to be sure that you remove all rust and dirt. A loose wheel could have damaged or elongated the holes in the rim, or damaged the rim/hub assembly. If any of the wheel bolts are damaged, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Always tighten the bolts in a criss-cross sequence. Never use oil or grease on your wheel bolts.
Never overtighten the bolts on the wheel hub. You could damage the hub or the bolt.
Torque tighten the wheel bolts to the specified value at the nearest Authorised Mahindra Workshop.
The tyres fitted in this vehicle meet the requirements of BIS and they comply with the requirements under the Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR) 1989.
6.32 Tiretronics (if equipped)
The tiretronics system checks the pressure and temperature of the air inside the pneumatic tyres of the vehicle. System alerts the driver during driving if any of the tyre parameters are not in acceptable limits due to any reason.
The system will continue to alert until the warning condition is resolved to the actual placard values.
Appropriate tyre pressure and tyre temperature is required for;
•  Adequate braking
•  Road grip
•  Vehicle handling
•  Vehicle maneuvering
•  Reduced tyre wear and tear
•  Reduced tyre strain and safety
•  Good fuel efficiency
The instrument cluster displays all alerts & visual warnings related to Tiretronics system.
Graphic
Graphic
6.32.1 Operation of Tiretronics
Tiretronics uses wireless sensor technology that is mounted on the wheel rim to checks the tyre pressure levels. They transmit the data to the receiver inside the vehicle which is in turn is communicated and displayed on the instrument cluster.
In the instrument cluster screen all the tyre locations will display the status as pressure and temperature. Spare tyre (if TPMS sensor equipped) information on tiretronics screen shall be available only during any alerts and warning in the spare tyre. (User Shall verify spare tyre pressure manually, In certain conditions system may not update pressure for Spare tyre correctly)
The Tiretronics has been customized only for the manufacturer’s genuine tyres and wheels. Tiretronics pressure limits and warning messages have been established and calibrated for the tyre size equipped on your vehicle. Replacement of manufacturer’s parts with a different size, type or style of components may damage the sensor and lead to incorrect readings.
Do not use aftermarket tyre sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with Tiretronics. Failure to comply may lead to sensor damage.
The Tiretronics is not intended to replace normal tyre care and maintenance or to warn of any tyre failure condition. The system should not be used as a replacement for a pressure measuring gauge to adjust the vehicle tyre pressure.
Driving with under-inflated tyres cause the tyres to overheat and may lead to tyre failure. Under-inflated tyres reduce fuel efficiency, tyre tread life and may affect the vehicle's maneuverability and braking ability.
It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure using an accurate pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tiretronics warning indicator.
6.32.2 Tiretronics Warning Lamp
Graphic
The Tiretronics warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates for any alert condition and also for low/high tyre pressure/High temperature alerts and malfunction.
6.32.3 Tiretronics Sensor Installation
Graphic
First apply lubricant (paste) or soapy water to rim hole or valve nozzle bar, as shown in the following figure (the diagram is for reference only, and it is operated according to the degree of automation of the customer's production line)
Graphic
Graphic
1. Line the sensor up with the rim hole and attach the TTV insertion tool to the end of the valve ready for pull in
2. Ensure the TTV insertion tool is positioned to the correct notch and that the sensor is pulled through in a direction parallel to the valve whole axis and NOT at an angle to it
3. The picture below shows a correctly fitted sensor. Note the rubber bulb of the valve resting against the rim and the front face of the enclosure is NOT touching the rim. Apply tyre soap solution to the rubber portion of the valve stem and the top of the enclosure
4. Place the inner tyre bead over the rim
5. Place the outer tyre bead over the rim
6. Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressure, check the valve area for leakage and re-balance the wheels prior to installing back on the vehicle
Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. The fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it. Start from the opposite direction.
6.32.4 Tiretronics Sensor Removal
Graphic
•  Remove the tyre from the rim
•  Remove the valve core to deflate the tyre.
•  Remove the tread and ensure that the extractor forceps is inserted into the tyre at the yellow position shown below and turn the rim clockwise.
Graphic
Graphic
•  To remove the sensor, firstly remove the screw using a T6 TORX screwdriver.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
•  Carefully and firmly pull the enclosure straight back off the valve
•  Cut the rubber bulb and attach the TTV tool to the valve. Remove the valve from the rim by pulling through the rim, or simply pull through without cutting the bulb
•  Lift the outer tyre bead over the rim using a tyre tool
The valve must be positioned just left of the start position to avoid sensor damage. Do not touch the sensor with the tyre tool.
•  Lift the inner tyre bead over the rim using the tyre tool
•  Remove existing valve stem
Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. Fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it. Start from the opposite direction.
6.32.5 Functionalities of Tiretronics System
•  Low Pressure Alert
•  High Pressure Alert
•  High Temperature Alert
•  Pressure Leakage Alert
•  Sensor Signal Missing (Communication error)
•  Tiretronics Sensor Faulty.
•  Tyre Auto Learn
•  Tyre Fill Assist (TFA)
•  Tyre Pressure Imbalance
Low Pressure Alert
Graphic
Low pressure monitoring is to indicate low tyre pressure. Please note the following points.
•  Low pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes below threshold. Low pressure will be set based on the temperature value.
•  Low pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the information screen and alert register screen
•  If low pressure is observed, respective tyre should be rectified with cause of low pressure and then fill air
•  Once low pressure alert is set with tyre pressure below threshold the alert shall not be cleared until the pressure is filled to the placard value
High Pressure Alert
Graphic
High pressure monitoring is to indicate high pressure alert. Please note the following points.
•  High pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes above threshold
•  High pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the tiretronics screen
•  If high pressure value is observed, air has to be released from the respective tyre until the pressure reduces to the placard value
•  The vehicle should be driven above 40 kmph for the new pressure value to be updated and the alert to be cleared
•  Once the high pressure alert is triggered the alert shall not get cleared until the respective tyre pressure is reaches to the placard value
Pressure Leakage Alert
Graphic
Pressure leakage monitoring is to indicate pressure leakage in any of the vehicle tyres. Please note the following points.
•  Pressure Leakage alert will be set only when the tyre pressure is leaking at a rate greater than defined threshold
•  In the pressure leakage condition if the tyre pressure goes too below threshold then the low pressure alert will also be set
•  The pressure leakage alert in the main alert screen will pop up once when the alert is set for driver notification and will be shown in tiretronics screen when the vehicle is in running /ignition ON condition
•  Once pressure leakage is observed the respective tyre should be observed for air leakages and the puncture condition has to be rectified. Proper placard value should be filled after puncture rectification
•  If the vehicle is running in an extremely rocky and acute bumpy condition then fluctuating pressure leakage alert may get set which will get rectified when the vehicle runs back on a normal road. This happens due to sudden change in pressure levels due to rocky conditions
Sensor Signal Missing Alert
Graphic
When the vehicle runs in speed above 40kmph, Tiretronics system receives signal from all the Tiretronics sensor installed in all running tyres.
•  On account of any issue in signal reception or Tiretronics sensor damage or tyres changed with out performing manual learning then the signal will not be received
•  If the Signals from the tiretronics sensor are not received atleast once, when the vehicle is driven at a speed greater than 40kmph for more than 10 minutes, "Signal Missing" alert will be set for the respective tyre and Tiretronics Telltale will be ON.
•  When the Tiretronics signal missing is set then perform manual learning once. If manual learning is not done successfully then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be checked by carefully opening the tyre
•  If the sensor is found to be damaged then it should be replaced with a new one and manual/auto learning should be done
Sensor Faulty / Low Battery Alert
Each tiretronics sensor in the vehicle tyres has an internal individual battery . If the battery level is too low or the sensor by itself is malfunctioning then the Tiretronics system shall give this alert.
•  If the Tiretronics sensor low battery/faulty is set then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be removed by carefully opening the tyre and replacing it with a new sensor
•  Post replacing the new sensor, manual/auto learning should be done
Tyre Auto Learn Process (If Enabled in cluster)
Graphic
Graphic
In case of tyres location changed from its original location, Automatically tyre swap location shall be identified and pressure and temperature value for respective tyre shall be updated within 10 min of vehicle driving based on environmental condition & vehicle drive condition auto location shall take one or more drive cycle to auto learn.
In case of a new TPMS replaced in the tyre, automatically system shall identify the tyre swapped location and update the warnings and alert for new location.
If spare wheel tyre get swapped with any of the running tyres then display shall show Signal missing in the cluster for respective tyre location and TPMS indication lamp will blink for 90 sec and remain ON. TPMS indication lamp will continue until the error condition is rectified.
Refer cluster settings for the “TPMS Auto Learn ” in the” Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for further details
Tyre Fill Assist (TFA) (If Enabled in cluster)
Graphic
During Air Filling in tyre, Hazard lamps shall blink until placard value reaches.
During air filling If tyre Pressure has reached the Placard Value, then Horn shall activate one time
During Air filling If tyre Pressure exceeds Placard Value, then Hazard lamps shall blink at faster rate.
Refer cluster settings for the “Tyre Fill Assist ” in the” Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for further details
Tyre Pressure Imbalance
Graphic
During driving if the system identifies tyre Pressure imbalance on front two tyres / Rear two tyres then Instrument Cluster shall popup Tyre Pressure imbalance warning.
Graphic
Graphic
6.32.6 Tiretronics Manual Learning
After tyre rotation or Tiretronics sensor replacement, the receiver must be learnt, else the Tiretronics warning lamp will be ON, indicating malfunction.
Mandate Points
Manual learning is the process by which the identities of 4 sensors installed inside the tyres are learnt and programmed in to the memory of the receiver module.
1. Manual learning should be compulsorily performed on any of the following conditions or operations done
•  Any sensors replaced.
•  Any of the tyres are replaced
•  If any of the tyres or set of tyres are shuffled or swapped in position
•  If tyre rotation operation is performed
•  If it is observed that the alert indications in the tiretronics screen are not co-relating with respect to their actual position in the vehicle
2. Once manual learning is initiated, the sensors inside the tyres need to be triggered by leaking the air from each tyre one at a time and should be completed within certain value post to each event for learning all 4 tyres
3. Do not perform Manual learning process at the same time on two vehicles with in the radius of 20 meters
4. It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre.
5. It is required to ensure the tyres have pressure > 32psi and < 36psi before initiating the manual learning process
6. Post manual learning, all tyres should be filled to the placard pressure value
It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre.
Initiating the Manual Learning Process
Graphic
1. Turn the ignition OFF. Press and hold the up button in steering wheel
2. Turn the ignition ON
3. Wait for the cluster’s tachometer and speedometer to rotate to highest position and then release the enter button in up position. Then observe the cluster for the Tiretronics telltale to blink, vehicle siren will indicate by 2 chrips & 2 times turn lamps blink and instrument cluster screen shows ‘TPMS MANUAL LEARNING’
If failed to enter in to the manual learning mode;
•  Try initiating the manual learning once again
•  Check if the reverse gear is engaged, if it is engaged disengage it
•  Check if the Enter button is working fine
If problem still persist, contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer for further assistance.
Graphic
Starting from Front Left Tyre: Start leaking the air from the front left for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt
If the front left tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the FL tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
Graphic
Learning the Front Right Tyre: Start leaking the air from the front right for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.
If the front right tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the FR tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
Graphic
Learning the Rear Right Tyre: Start leaking the air from the rear right for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.
If the rear right tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the RR tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
Graphic
Completing the Learning with Rear Left Tyre: Start leaking the air from the rear left tyre for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.
If the rear left tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the RL tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
Graphic
If rear left tyre is also learned, then 1 siren chirp is heard and ALL tyres show learned at respective tyre positions and ‘All tyres Learned successfully’ in the centre of the screen.
Graphic
If learning is not successful at any point of time, or at any point of time during the learning process if the learning takes more than 90 secs of time for each tyre position then the system shall exit the learning mode and show the ‘TPMS Manual Learning Not Successful’ screen.
Limitations
•  The Tiretronics monitors only tyre pressure and temperature. It does not monitor conditions such as tyre wear
•  The Tiretronics will not be able to detect an instant tyre burst and inform the driver in advance
•  There may be the possibility of getting all the tyre location indicators on the Tiretronics display blinking along with the Tiretronics telltale, on passing environment area prone to heavy power lines and RF signal. It will come back to normal condition when interference gets cleared
6.32.7 Tiretronics — Points to Remember
•  It is recommended to fill the pressure to 32 psi at a digital gauge station only
•  Every 15 days, inflate all the tyres up to 32 psi and inflation should be done at cold condition/ambient temperature
•  Pressure deviation between the Tiretronics display and gauge will depend upon the following factors:
–  Atmospheric pressure
–  Error in pressure filling gauge (not calibrated)
–  Air leakage during inflation/deflation
•  Tiretronics measures pressure of the tyre
•  Pressure deviation is defined for 0.5 psi (min) and 3 psi (max)
•  If the vehicle battery/fuse is disconnected and reconnected, it will update the pressure after the vehicle is driven or sensor is activated
•  If the vehicle tyres are rotated or any of the tyres sensors are replaced, then tires have to be learned via either manual or auto learning. Refer Tyre Auto/Manual learn process in Tiretronics section for more details
•  If more than one tyre needs to be learned, learn all 4 tyres as per manual learning procedure
•  Tiretronics is only a warning or indicating device. Pressure and temperature values displayed by the system is for indication prior to alert purposes only. The Tiretronics system should not be used as a measuring device to correlate or calibrate against other systems
•  During winter or in cold conditions, there may be chances of getting a pressure alert with the corresponding tyre location indicator in the display, if the tyre pressure is near the thresholds level. i.e. between 28 psi to 24 psi. However, this alert will get cleared after driving a few kilometers depending upon the climatic condition
6.32.8 Recommended Playcard Value
Ambient Temp. (Deg C)
Recommended Pressure Front & Rear (32 Psi Placard)
<0
28
10
29
20
31
30
32
40
34
50
35
60
37
70
38
If the vehicle was previously halted for more than 45 min & is driven less than 15 min before filling the air then the tyres shall be filled to the respective playcard as per the ambient temperature else to the next playcard value.
Example: If a vehicle was halted at a ambient of 30 deg c for 50 min and driven to a air filling station within 5 min then respective play card value will be 32.0 PSI for front & rear. Else 33.5 PSI
6.33 Reverse Parking Assist System (RPAS)
Reverse parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver while parking the vehicle in reverse at a speed of less than 8 kmph. While reversing, RPAS will detect the obstacles at the rear side of the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through the internal rear view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors. The RPAS will alert the driver by sending out sound alarms at different frequency and display bars in instrument cluster to indicate proximity of the obstacle from the vehicle. The alert sound level and the number of display bars is proportional to the distance. Lesser the distance, shorter the interval between beeps & more number of display bars illuminated.
RPAS Sensors
Graphic
Two RPAS sensors are located at the rear bumper to assist driver for hassle-free parking.
Magnetic devices present in the detection range could vastly affect the sensor performance and the distance displayed may not be accurate.
Always keep the sensors clean and free from ice formation, dust, water etc. for proper working of the system.
Do not press or apply shock on the sensors by hitting or using a high-pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could be damaged.
6.33.1 Driving and Operation
•  RPAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances mahindra will accept any responsibility or can be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system
•  System will not sense pot holes, trenches or drainages which are below the ground level
•  Applying paint over the sensor will affect the performance of the system
Activation & De-activation of RPAS
•  The vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the reverse parking assistance system
•  RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and deactivate when reverse gear is disengaged
•  When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the systems starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the obstacles, more display bars illuminate & frequency of beeps increases.
6.33.2 RPAS Information on Instrument Cluster
Graphic
RPAS display on the instrument cluster gives the following information:
•  Left zone indicates obstacle on left side
•  Right zone indicates obstacle on right side
•  If obstacle is in centre then both left & Right zone will get highlight
6.33.3 Operation of RPAS
1. Start the vehicle (IGN is turned ON)
Graphic
2. Change the gear to reverse (engage the reverse gear).The RPAS will be displayed as like below in the Instrument cluster.
3. Start moving the vehicle in the reverse direction
Graphic
4. Display bars in the respective direction will glow according to obstacles in its path
5. The Beep sound can be heard from the Instrument cluster. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacle is less than 50 cm.
Graphic
6. The RPAS distance displayed will be the minimum of distances sensed by left and right sensors. And 120 cm is the maximum detection range.
For Example:
Assume 2 obstacles are placed as mentioned below:
•  Obstacle at left at 70 cm
•  Obstacle at right at 101 cm
On engaging the gear in reverse, instrument cluster will display as below:
Graphic
Since obstacle is at 70 cm in left - minimum distance is shown in the distance indicator.
Along with this beep sound can be heard from Instrument cluster. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacles is less than 50 cm.
6.33.4 Pay Attention
Graphic
1. If display bars in any one of the sides are displayed with cross marks, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
Graphic
2. If all display bars are displayed with cross marks, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Graphic
3. Obstacle in the blind zone cannot be sensed by the system.
Graphic
4. Please check the condition of the obstacle behind your vehicle before reversing. In some cases, the display may be not as same as reality due to the installed sensor level, obstacle shape and reflection condition.
Graphic
5. Point B will be detected sooner or later, but A may not be detected at all.3. Point B will be detected sooner or later, but A may not be detected at all.
Graphic
6. Not all obstacles are detected from 120 cm. For instance, a person is detected from 75 cm because of the weak reflection or absorption of the waves of the clothes.
Graphic
7. The distance indication may move up and down due to different sizes of the obstacle at different positions.
Graphic
8. Though the obstacle is in the sensing zone, obstacle may not be detected since the ultrasonic waves are not reflected back to the sensor.
Graphic
9. The obstacle of a conical shape may not be detected, since the ultrasonic waves get deflected away.
6.33.5 Limitations of RPAS
•  System may not sense obstacles like wire mesh, handrail, small objects which are below the bumper level
•  System may not sense obstacles with cotton or spongy surface, which will absorb ultrasonic waves emitted by RPAS
•  System performance is dependent on the reflection angle of the obstacle
•  System may give false alert without obstacles while reversing the vehicle on grasslands, gravels and bumpy roads considering it to be an obstacle
•  System may alert you by sensing the ground when the bumper is not fitted in its intended position or when the vehicle is overloaded
•  System may give false signal while the vehicle moves from plain ground to a slope terrain and vice versa
•  System may give false signal by sensing the ground when the bumper is tilted more from the normal position or when the vehicle is heavily overloaded
•  System may give false signal an alarm during heavy rain, snow and heavy wind conditions
•  The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Some obstacles for example as follows:
–  Sharply-angled objects
–  Tall or curved curb
–  Low obstacles (with height of 40 cm above ground level)
–  Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of the vehicle
•  Depending upon the shape of the obstacle and other environmental factors, the detection distance may shorten or detection may be impossible
•  Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor
•  Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once
•  Because of other ultrasonic sources, sensor may give false alarm for e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners and neon lights
•  Due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves, the vicinity of the vehicle is noisy. It may cause sensor to give false alarm
6.34 Rear View Camera
Graphic
Rear View Camera is located under tail gate applique.
Rear View Camera assists the driver while reversing & manoeuvring the Car at lower speeds. It has the following features:
1. Normal View​
2. Zoom-in View​
3. Full View​
4. Merged Corner View
5. Left Corner View​
6. Right Corner View​
7. Static & Dynamic Guidelines​
8. Parking assistance
•  Parallel Parking
•  Vertical (Perpendicular) Parking
6.34.1 Feature Description
1. Normal View
Graphic
By selecting Normal View Icon, Rear View camera provides about 130 deg horizontal wide rear view of vehicle's rear surrounding on the Infotainment screen.
Graphic
It overcomes limitation of IRVM, where ground is visible only after a distance from vehicle rear. Whereas with the RVC, the ground will be visible right after 15 cm to 30 cm from Vehicle’s Rear
2. Zoom-In View
Graphic
Graphic
Press Zoom-In button to view objects closer and press Zoom-Out button to go back to the normal parking view.
3. Full View/Wider View
Graphic
Graphic
By selecting Full View Icon Rear View camera provides about 170 deg horizontal wide rear view of vehicle's rear surrounding on the Infotainment screen.
Full view is wider than Normal View.
4. Merged Corner View
Graphic
Graphic
By selecting Merged Corner Rear View camera provides a wide view focussed on the left and right corners to provide a better visibility of crossing traffic for safe manouvre.
Merged Corner View shows merged view of rear left and right corners.
5. Left Corner View
Graphic
Graphic
If user wants to focus on the left side crossing traffic, then "Left Corner View" icon can be pressed to select the view.
Graphic
Select “Back” Icon to switch to Merged Corner View.
6. Right Corner View
Graphic
Graphic
If user wants to focus on the left side crossing traffic, then "Left Corner View" icon can be pressed to select the view.
Graphic
Select “Back” Icon to switch to Merged Corner View.
7. Static and Dynamic Guidelines
Static Guidelines indicate the placement of the vehicle with respect to the parking slot during parking. During parking, compare the Static guidelines against the Parking Slot Lines to know if vehicle placement is in-line with the parking slot lines.
Color coding on Static lines help in assessing the distance of obstacle from the vehicles’ rear. In the RVC Video, if Red color dashed line falls on a object on the floor then the Object is within 0.5 meter distance from the vehicle’s rear. Likewise, Red solid line indicates 0.5-1mts, Yellow indicates 1-2 mts, and Green indicates 2-3 mts.
Graphic
Dynamic Guidelines (orange color in below image) indicate path, the vehicle will traverse with current steering position. As per the steering angle movement, dynamic guidelines move and show the vehicle predicted moving direction to help the driver.
8. Parking Assistance
The feature assists the driver with the help of parking overlays to park the vehicle in target parking slot. Parallel or Vertical Parking option can be selected by driver based on parking slot availability.
Overlays and guidelines are displayed regardless of the current vehicle environment. The driver is responsible for checking and ensuring that there is no obstacle in the selected parking slot.
Parallel Parking
Parallel Parking guides the driver to park the vehicle in a slot parallel to the vehicle.
A. Selecting Parking Slot
Graphic
Drive ahead of the parking slot, until it is fully visible. Now select “Parallel Parking”
Graphic
Icon from infotainment. After selection, Infotainment displays below screen image1.
B. Setting the steering angle:
Graphic
Drive the vehicle Forward or Backward and ensure the greenish -blue rectangle [consider right rectangle if parking image slot is on right side and consider left rectangle if parking slot is on left side], is placed in the parking slot. Make sure obstacles are not present
Ensure, there is enough space (min.3ft) sideways between your vehicle and the parked vehicle before engaging reverse.
In the parking slot after the vertical pole.
•  Now start turning the steering wheel towards the direction in which parking slot is present. A shorter rectangle box will appear which will change the color according to the steering position.
Graphic
When the box is green(image 2), stop turning the steering wheel and hold the position.
Green color: Represents suitable parking location. You can try an attempt to park.
Red color: Represents unsafe/potential risk parking. Your vehicle may hit the side of the vehicle already parked.
Blue color: Represents unsafe/potential risk parking. Final parking space length needed will be larger than the desired length of parking space. May lead to wrong vehicle direction movement.
Green/Blue/Red colors in this mode are for guiding the vehicle to the parking slot and it would not detect the obstacles or alert the driver in that zone. It is the sole responsibility of the driver to ensure the rear end obstacles/ vehicles which can lead to damage while parking.
C. Complete Parking
Graphic
With current steering position, start moving the vehicle backward. An orange arc line will appear. When the orange arc (image 3)touches the parking slot end position, stop the vehicle
•  Now rotate the steering wheel to maximum in the opposite direction. Arc is then replaced by dynamic and static parking line. Continue backing the vehicle with the help of dynamic guideline.
Graphic
•  When static guidelines are parallel to target parking slot(image 4), bring steering to centre position. Adjust vehicle backward or forward until the whole vehicle is in the target parking slot. Parking Completed
Vertical/Perpendicular Parking
Vertical/Perpendicular parking assistance guides the driver to park the vehicle in a parking slot perpendicular to the vehicle. Below are the steps to achieve Vertical parking.
Selecting Parking Slot
Graphic
Drive ahead of the parking slot, until it is fully visible. Now select “Vertical
Graphic
Parking” icon present on infotainment screen. After selection, Infotainment display’s below screen:
Setting the steering angle
Based on the side driver prefers to park, either blue or pink arc needs to be taken into consideration Drive the vehicle, either forward / backward and ensure that preferred side arc’s tip is touching the starting edge of target parking slot. Once done, stop the vehicle.
Graphic
Turn steering wheel to the maximum position, towards direction of the parking slot. Pink/ blue overlay disappears, and the dynamic and static overlay appears on the screen as shows in the image.
Complete Parking
Hold steering in the maximum position and start driving the vehicle backwards. when static lines are parallel to target parking slot, bring steering to centre position and continue driving backward until the whole vehicle is in target parking slot. Parking Completed
6.34.2 Entry and Exit Conditions
Entry Conditions
Turn on ignition and apply the reverse gear, Infotainment will enter into ‘Rear View Camera Mode’ and displays the video.
Graphic
You can also view vehicle’s rear surrounding, by selecting Rear View Camera option present on Infotainment Screen, irrespective of the gear position.
You cannot enter RVC Mode, through the infotainment screen button, if the vehicle is in forward/drive gear and vehicle speed exceeds 20 kmph.
Exit Conditions
•  If the driver is not in Parallel or Vertical Parking mode and Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’ by reverse gear option, then RVC mode exits when reverse gear is disengaged
•  If the driver is not in Parallel or Vertical Parking mode and Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’, due to “Rear View Camera” selection present on the Infotainment, then RVC mode can be exited, by selecting the Cancel button appearing on the screen
•  Irrespective of RVC entry conditions, when Parallel or Vertical Parking Mode is active, driver can exit the RVC Mode using Cancel button that appears, whenever vehicle is in forward gear
•  RVC Mode is exited, whenever vehicle is in forward gear and vehicle speed exceeds 20 kmph.
•  When ignition is off.
6.34.3 Camera Maintenance
Always keep the Camera lens clean from dust. Presence of dirt on lens may lead to poor image quality.
Always use clear water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens.
Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer.
•  In case of any RVC-related issues, the Infotainment displays ‘ Please Contact Service Centre’ and vehicle needs to be taken to the Service Centre. Avoid using the Rear-View Camera under these circumstances.
•  If rear of your vehicle is damaged or if the Camera position is changed, please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center immediately.
6.34.4 System Limitations
•  Rear view camera may not operate normally, when you drive in the extremely high or low temperature area. (Operating temperature: -20°C ~ 65°C)
•  Under certain circumstances given below, the rear view camera system will work with limitation or will not function fully:
- In heavy rain, snow or fog.
- At night or in very dark places.
- If the camera is exposed to very bright light sources.
- Display may flicker, if the camera area is lit by LED or fluorescent lighting.
- If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot areas.
- If the camera lens got dirty or obstructed.
•  If the rear of your vehicle got damaged. And if the Camera position and the settings got changed. Please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center
•  Camera image reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing. As the display is 2-dimensional, pointed and protruding obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult to recognise. Please avoid rear view camera in the above situation. It could you otherwise injure others or damage objects and your vehicle
•  The performance gets affected sometimes due to deposition of ice, dust, heavy rain, heavy wind, heavy exhaust on the camera
•  Images shown on the display is a mirror-inverted manner, as like the rearview mirror. Make sure that no persons or animals or any objects/materials are in the manoeuvring area. Pay attention and ensure safety before manoeuvring the car. Driver is legally responsible for their car
•  The rear view camera is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective & inaccurately
•  Avoid using of rear view camera, if you are having eye colour blindness or impaired colour vision
•  Objects above the ground or hanged may appear to be far away than they are. But in reality, objects shall be closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments and increase the risk of collision with your car
•  It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking area to park car safely
•  Rear view video is shown, whenever reverse gear is applied, but it cannot be used as a rear view monitoring system, which cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior and interior view mirrors
Rear View Camera is only meant to aid the driver and to enhance convenience while parking. It does not in any way replace the driver’s abilities and driving skills while using this system. Under any circumstances, Mahindra accepts no responsibility and cannot be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.
7 STARTING AND DRIVING II
7.1 Steering
Your vehicle is equipped with electric power steering (EPS). EPS system provides an external assist, so that the driver can easily rotate the steering wheel without much effort. The power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of manoeuvrability in tight spaces. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will provide mechanical steering capability to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking manoeuvres.
Continued operation with reduced power steering performance could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Have the vehicle serviced at specified intervals or whenever a power steering problem is noticed.
Keep both hands especially your thumbs on the outside of the steering wheel rim. Do not hold the steering wheel spokes.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned OFF or Not availability of vehicle speed / Power cut off), you can still steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•  Under inflated tyre(s) on any wheel(s)
•  Uneven vehicle loading
•  High crown in the centre of the road
•  High crosswinds
•  Wheels out of alignment
•  Wheels out of balance
•  Loose or worn suspension components
7.1.1 Tilt Steering
Graphic
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both rake and reach as required using the lever in the steering shroud under the steering wheel.
To tilt/adjust the steering wheel:
Graphic
1. Pull the tilt lever down to unlock.
2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired position.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired position.
4. Push the tilt lever back up to its original position to lock the steering.
Improperly locked steering wheel could cause loss of control and lead to accidents. Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.
7.2 Steering Controls - Audio (if equipped)
Graphic
The steering wheel also houses switches to control the main audio functions.
Steering Audio Operations
Infotainment system can be controlled by Steering wheel switch mounted on the left side of the steering wheel.
Graphic
A: Mute
E: Source
B: Volume +
F: SEEK UP
C: Volume -
G: SEEK DOWN
D: Call Connect
H: Voice / Call Disconnect
•  Mute - Press MUTE button to mute the audio playing in Infotainment while in TUNER mode and pause the song while in USB mode
•  Volume Control - Press ‘+’ and ‘- button to increase or decrease the volume
•  Call Connect - Press to accept the incoming call to paired the BT phone to enable the driver to open the contact list in infotainment and make the call
•  Source - Press SOURCE button to toggle between TUNER, USB, BT AUDIO and MYDRIVE
•  Seek UP/Down - Press the seek UP/DOWN button can be used for toggling UP/DOWN the menu list of Infotainment.
•  Call Dis Connect - Press to reject or end active call to the paired BT phone.
This is provide the flexibility of controlling the infotainment system while driving without any distraction.
7.3 Cruise Control (if equipped)
Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without the need to keep your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. Never use it for city driving, inclines, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain or in bad weather conditions.
It works on the closed loop system principle to maintain the set speed of the vehicle; the system controls the fuel injection of the engine in order to maintain the set speed.
Graphic
Graphic
A
CRUISE ON/OFF
D
CRUISE RESUME
B
SET +
E
CLUSTER MENU/MODE
C
SET –
   
Graphic
Cruise control enhances your comfort while driving and allows you to effortlessly maintain the desired lane speed limit. Improper use of the cruise control can lead to an accident.
Cruise control is designed to operate above a vehicle speed of 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT for all gears except 1st and reverse gears. The cruise lamp in the instrument cluster functions only if the cruise control is active.
Cruise control will function only under the following conditions;
•  The vehicle is cruising above 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT
•  Engine RPM above 1200 RPM
•  Vehicle is in any gear except 1st and reverse
•  Clutch pedal released.
•  Brake pedal released.
•  Cruise is enabled by pressing ON/OFF button
•  Cruise is activated first time in an ignition cycle by SET + / SET - button
•  Subsequent cruise engagements can be done by RESUME SET+ /SET- buttons in the same ignition cycle
Cruise control is deactivated under the following conditions:
•  CRUISE OFF button is pressed
•  Brake or clutch pedal depressed
•  If the vehicle speed exceeds the cruise set speed by 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT by accelerator pedal intervention
•  If vehicle speed is increased by 10 kmph for more than 30 seconds by pressing the accelerator pedal
•  When Set+/Set- switch is pressed for more than 12 seconds (In this case, vehicle will not go into cruise mode in that ignition cycle. In order to restore the cruise function, switch OFF the ignition, wait for 30 seconds and switch ON the ignition)
•  Cruise influencing error indicated by Check Engine Lamp, OBD lamp, etc.
7.3.1 Cruise Control Activation
Cruise is enabled by pressing ON/OFF button
Drive the vehicle to the desired cruising speed (any value greater than 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT), press and hold the SET+ button until the cruise lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates.
If cruise is deactivated (e.g. by depressing brake to handle an intervention in the road etc.) in current driving cycle, reactivate the Cruise to the last active Cruise Speed by pressing the RESUME button.
Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up or down hills, and the vehicle may come out of cruise control. This is indicated by the cruise lamp going OFF in the instrument cluster.
7.3.2 Cruise Control De-activation
You can cancel cruise control in any of the following ways:
•  Press the CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel
•  Press the brake pedal
•  Gear selector moved into neutral
•  HDC or ESP becomes active
7.3.3 SET + Button
SET + button is used to activate cruise control and also to increase the cruise set speed.
To increase the speed in very small amounts, press the SET + button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed increases by about 2 kmph. When you wish to continuously increase the cruising speed, press and hold the SET + button and release when the desired speed is reached.
7.3.4 SET - Button
To decrease the speed in small amounts, press the SET - button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed decreases by about 2 kmph. When you wish to continuously decrease the cruising speed, press and hold the SET- button. When the desired speed is reached, release the button.
If switch is pressed for more than 12 secs., the switch is assumed to be malfunctioning and the cruise functionality ceases to function in that ignition cycle. To resume functionality, ignition has to toggled.
The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver must at all times remain alert of road / traffic conditions and responsible for the vehicle brake operation / steering control.
Never activate cruise control in traffic or when driven in adverse road conditions (heavy rains, windy, slippery etc.)
7.3.5 RESUME Button
With the help of RESUME, you can opt for the previous set cruising speed of the vehicle in the same ignition cycle. This is best explained with the following example:
1. Assume, you have activated cruise mode and set the vehicle speed at 50 kmph.
2. Due to an obstacle or a sharp turn, you have deactivated the cruise mode either by pressing the brake pedal or by switching OFF the CRUISE control.
3. Vehicle comes out of the cruise mode.
4. When the road condition is suitable to switch over back to cruise control mode, press RESUME button once. The system activates the cruise control mode to the previous cruising speed of 50 kmph.
5. To resume the previous cruise set speed, the vehicle speed should be above 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT.
7.3.6 Override Function
This function enables user to ramp up the cruising speed to overtake front vehicle.
The cruising speed can be increased by using accelerator pedal. User has to complete this action within 30 seconds, to maintain the cruise mode. If user exceeds the 30 seconds limit, cruise mode will be deactivated.
7.4 Advanced Driver Assistance System (If equipped)
The Advance Driver Assist System (ADAS) uses camera and radar to provide alerts and controls to improve the overall safety and increase the driver comfort. It should be noted that ADAS is only an assistance given to the driver; it neither replaces the driver nor is a substitute.
Graphic
The ADAS system gives enormous benefits to driver, however the driver shall remain solely responsible for the safe maneuvering of the car. He must remain vigilant throughout the drive.
ADAS provides below features:
1
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
2
Collision mitigation System (AEB/FCW)
3
High Beam Assist (HBA)
4
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
5
Lane Keep Assist System (LKA/LDW)
6
Smart Pilot Assist (SPA)
In view of the policy of continuously improving our products, we reserve the right to alter specifications or designs without prior notice and without liability/obligation. Illustrations do not show the vehicle in the standard form. Please be aware that this manual may apply to various models/variants. As a result you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All the information, illustration, and specifications in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication.
We recommend you to contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for latest features applicable to your vehicle.
7.4.1 Maintenance Guidelines for Camera and Radar Sensor
Graphic
Camera Maintenance
To avoid incorrect, partial or disabled ADAS functionality due to Camera sensor failure, following points to be taken care of.
•  The outer area of the windshield must be cleaned regularly and to be kept free of dirt, oil, ice, water drops etc.
•  If there is condensation in the inner side of windshield in front of Camera, use the de-mister to clear it.
•  If there is any other dirt in the inner side of windshield in front of Camera, contact Mahindra Service Centre for cleaning.
•  Stickers, window tinting, electronic toll devices or similar objects should not be attached on the windshield in front of camera.
•  If the Camera needs to be removed or replaced, contact Mahindra Service Centre only.
•  If the windshield portion in front of camera has any cracks/scratches/stone chips, it should be taken to Mahindra Service Centre for complete windshield replacement.
•  If the vehicle met with any accident or impact, particularly for the front side, contact Mahindra Service Centre to check for any damage / calibration errors in the Camera.
•  In case any modification to be done for Camera, beauty cover, Inside Rear View Mirror or Ceiling, contact Mahindra Service Centre.
•  Any external object/accessories should not be installed on the hood area as it may affect the Camera’s field of view.
•  Ensure that flag post on the bonnet is not blocking the camera view.
•  The head lamps should not be modified and in case of head lamp replacement, head lamp aiming should be by Mahindra Service Centre only
•  If the Windshield or Camera is replaced, the Camera must be recalibrated at Authorised Mahindra Service Centre only.
Radar Maintenance
To avoid incorrect, partial or disabled ADAS functionality due to Radar sensor failure, following points to be taken care of.
•  The Radar surface and bumper area in front of radar must be cleaned regularly and to be kept free of dirt, oil, ice, water etc.
•  Any external object should not be installed on the front grill or front bumper area as it may affect Radar’s performance.
•  Ensure that the number plate is not blocking the radar sensor.
•  Avoid any kind of customization to the front bumper and Radar like attaching stickers, installing flags or metallic objects, painting etc.
•  If the vehicle met with any accident or impact, particularly for the front side, contact Mahindra Service Centre to check for any damage to the Radar unit.
•  If the Radar sensor needs to be removed or replaced, contact Mahindra Service Centre only.
•  If any rework done on front bumper or Radar, the Radar must be recalibrated by Authorised Mahindra Service Center only.
7.5 Adaptive Cruise Control (Only for Automatic Transmission variant)
When the ACC is engaged, it allows the vehicle to cruise at the desired ‘set speed’. In traffic conditions if a vehicle is detected in the front of the vehicle, then the ACC reduces the vehicle speed to match the front preceding vehicle speed. The distance from the front preceding vehicle is maintained as per the Distance level set by the driver.
Disclaimer
•  ACC is an aid to assist the driver. It is not a collision avoidance system.
•  Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ACC system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the system.
•  ACC is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for observing all traffic and safety rules, including maintenance of safe distance and speed and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead
•  It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert and to be in control of the vehicle at all times.
•  Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.
•  ACC has limited braking capability and may not stop the vehicle in time to avoid a collision, if the front preceding vehicle decelerates quickly or a new vehicle cuts-in front always be prepared to apply brake.
•  Failure to follow the alerts and instructions for proper use of system could result in serious injury.
•  Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
•  Use ACC in appropriate roads with proper lane marking and sign boards.
•  Do not use ACC in busy areas where multiple road users cross the vehicles intended path.
•  When two wheeler cuts out, ACC may not be able to identify the vehicle in front of two-wheeler.
•  ACC may not be able to stop behind stopped vehicles.
•  ACC may not be always able to follow two wheeler.
ACC may not detect all types of vehicle and driver has to be vigilant to be in control of the vehicle.
7.5.1 ACC Switches
Graphic
The ACC switches on the steering wheel consists of five switches which are used for ACC Operation.
A - CRUISE ON/OFF Switch
•  To Toggle between ACC ON and OFF
B - SET+
•  To set desired speed
•  To increase Set speed when ACC is active
C - TIME GAP
•  To select the time gap to the front preceding vehicle between Level 4 to Level 1.
D - SET-
•  To set desired speed
•  To decrease Set speed when ACC is active
E - RESUME
•  To resume ACC to previous Set Speed.
Do not use RESUME button to Set Speed immediate after ACC ON. Do use only SET+/SET-
7.5.2 Instrument Cluster Display
Image
Display
Graphic
ACC Indicator
Graphic
Set Speed
Graphic
Time Gap
Graphic
front preceding vehicle Indicator
front preceding vehicle Indicator shows an icon of a Car always though the front preceding vehicle may be a car/truck/two wheeler or any other type of vehicle.
7.5.3 How to turn ACC ON/OFF
Graphic
Press CRUISE switch to activate ACC feature. This turns ACC to Standby Mode.
Standby Mode
When CRUISE switch is pressed and desired speed by using SET +/– is not set.
During Standby mode
Graphic
ACC indicator will illuminate in white color.
Graphic
•  “Adaptive Cruise Control Standby” pop-up message will be displayed in cluster.
Graphic
•  Set speed will be displayed as “—”.
•  The vehicle will not maintain previous set speed or previous time gap to the vehicle ahead.
•  Press the ON/OFF switch again to deactivate ACC feature.
•  If ACC indicator illuminates in red , there could be a problem with ACC system. visit nearby mahindra service center.
Pressing the ON/OFF switch when ACC in Standby/Active will deactivate the ACC feature.
How to set Desired Speed
Graphic
Drive the vehicle to the desired speed (minimum 10 kmph) and Press Set+/Set- switch
Graphic
•  “Adaptive Cruise Control Active” pop-up message will be displayed in the cluster.
•  ACC will maintain the vehicle speed as set by the driver. Once set, it will be confirmed by the ACC telltale light. After that no accelerator pedal input from driver need to be given.
Graphic
ACC indicator will be displayed in green.
•  Set speed will be displayed as set by driver.
•  Time interval bars will be displayed.
ACC will have two modes
1. Speed Control Mode
During Speed Control Mode, time gap indicator will be displayed
ACC operation When No Front Preceding vehicle detected ahead
When there is no front preceding vehicle detected ahead, ACC maintains the speed set by the driver.
2. Follow Control Mode
During Follow Mode, front preceding vehicle Indicator will be displayed if a front preceding vehicle is detected.
ACC operation When Front Preceding Vehicle detected ahead
When there is a preceding vehicle, ACC tries to maintain a safe gap to the front preceding vehicle by reducing the speed accordingly within comfortable deceleration limits.
ACC operation When Front Preceding Vehicle moved out from its lane
When the front preceding vehicle has moved out from your lane of travel, ACC accelerates and maintains vehicle speed to the set speed.
Whenever driver steers and system finds a new target ie., front preceding vehicle. ACC takes time to pick the new target and react.
•  If Set+/Set- switch is pressed when vehicle speed is below 30 kmph then ACC Set Speed will be initialized to 30 kmph.
•  When there is a front preceding vehicle, user can set desired speed by pressing SET+/- switch below 30 kmph as there is no minimum desired speed requirement
•  When front preceding vehicle and your vehicle are in stopped condition , apply brake and press SET+/SET-. Note that ACC will remain in standstill until the front preceding vehicle moves.
When the SET +/SET– switch is pressed under the following conditions, ACC cannot be activated. Visual and audio alert will be provided to driver to inform the same.
Condition
Alert
When traveling below 10 kmph and a vehicle ahead is not Detected
Graphic
When front preceding vehicle is very close or far away from host vehicle.
When the shift lever is not in D (Drive) Position
When the brakes are operated by the driver
Graphic
 
 
When braking system unavailable.
Graphic
When driving above maximum ACC operational speed limit.
Graphic
When driver door is open.
Graphic
When Collision Mitigation System is unavailable.
Graphic
When driver seat belt is not buckled.
Graphic
ACC interacts with other systems, such as braking, steering, EMS (Engine Management System), ACC Switch etc. If any of these systems are not functioning properly, ACC cannot be activated.
How to increase Set Speed
Use one of the following methods to increase set speed:
•  Press and quickly release the SET+ switch to increase the set speed by 1 kmph
•  Press and hold the SET+ switch to increase the set speed by 10 kmph. The set speed will be increased to the next nearest multiple of 10. Continuous hold / stuck of SET +/- button for 60 sec will turn OFF ACC.
•  Release the switch when the desired set speed reached.
How to decrease Set Speed
Use one of the following methods to decrease set speed:
•  Press and quickly release the SET- switch to decrease the set speed by 1 kmph
•  Press and hold the SET- switch to decrease the set speed.by 10 kmph. The set speed will be decreased to the next nearest multiple of 10
•  Release the switch when the desired set speed reached.
How to resume ACC to last set speed value
Press the RESUME switch
– ACC will resume back to the last set speed provided the conditions to engage ACC are satisfied.
How to change the Time Gap Level to the front preceding vehicle
Each time the Time gap switch C is pressed, the time gap will keep rolling between the time gap levels as per the below sequence
Time Gap Level 4->Time Gap Level 3 -> Time Gap Level 2->
Time Gap Level 1-> Time Gap Level 4
•  The set time gap value of the current ignition/driving cycle will be used for the next ignition/driving cycle.
•  When the system is used for the first time after starting the engine, the time gap value is set to the maximum value (Level 4).
How To Adjust ACC SENSITIVITY
The sensitivity of vehicle acceleration/deceleration can be adjusted to Slow, Normal or fast in the selection menu of ACC as shown below
Graphic
ACC STOP & GO (Only for EPB Variants)
ACC operation When front preceding vehicle is detected in models equipped with Electronic Park Brake
When a front preceding vehicle is detected, front preceding vehicle indicator along with time interval bars will be displayed in cluster
In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when stopped at a traffic light, if the front preceding vehicle comes to stop, ACC decelerates to bring your vehicle also to stop within the limitations of the system. Your vehicle movement will resume automatically if the front preceding vehicle is not stopped for more than approx. 3 seconds.
Graphic
If it takes more than 3 seconds for the front preceding vehicle to begin moving again, ACC will be set to Standby and the stop-hold function will activate. A pop-up alert message “Press Resume Switch or Pedal to Accelerate” will be displayed for driver to resume.
ACC can be engaged by any of the following methods when in stop-hold mode if front preceding vehicle is present at distance more than 2m and less than 40m:
1. Press RESUME button
2. Slightly tap the accelerator pedal
3. Increase the speed above 10 kmph and press the RESUME button
When in ACC stopped condition, if driver is trying to unbuckle seat belt/open doors/ change gear etc, then ACC may get disengaged and based on gear lever position, vehicle may crawl. Driver has to apply brake and control the vehicle.
ACC without Stop & Go
For vehicles with manual parking brake, ACC without STOP & GO is applicable. Here, If the front preceding vehicle comes to stop, ACC decelerates to bring the vehicle speed up to 20 kmph and disengages. System provides pop up message “Adaptive Cruise Control Standby” for driver to take necessary action.
ACC decelerates when there is too much of lateral acceleration.
Graphic
When following the front preceding vehicle, if the front preceding vehicle disappears due to a cut-out maneuver, a pop-up message will be displayed as “Object Disappeared Pay Attention”
Please pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.
If ACC changes targets from a moving front preceding vehicle to a stationary front preceding vehicle at speeds above 30 km/h, the system may not react to the stationary vehicle and will accelerate to the previously set speed. The driver must actively apply the brake to slow/stop the vehicle.
ACC operation when Accelerator pedal is pressed
Even when ACC is engaged, driver can press the accelerator pedal if he wishes to accelerate the vehicle rapidly. When driver presses accelerator pedal, the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed.
•  ACC is overridden hence Set Speed and Distance is not followed
Graphic
•  ACC override pop-up will be displayed.
•  Set speed display will blink.
•  Set distance display will blink.
•  The front preceding vehicle indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open.
When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will exit from the override mode and ACC operation will be resumed
Automatic cancellation of ACC
Under the following conditions ACC control will be cancelled automatically with an audio alert.
•  When the shift lever is not in D(Drive) position.
•  When the parking brake is applied
•  When Brake pedal is pressed.
•  When ESP is turned off
•  When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted.
•  When radar sensor area of the front bumper covered with dirt or is obstructed.
•  When accelerator pedal is depressed for more than 60 seconds continuously.
•  When collision mitigation system is in action.
•  When ESP operates
•  When driver door is open
•  When vehicle speed exceeds maximum ACC operating speed.
•  When driver seat belt is unbuckled
•  When the Zoom mode is selected.
•  The engine speed (rpm) is too high/low.
•  When ACC is engaged, and your vehicle stopped, and after 3 seconds the front preceding vehicle moves and disappears and when the driver tries to resume ACC without the front preceding vehicle.
•  When driver tries to resume ACC when front preceding vehicle (moving/stopped) is not in detection range.
Graphic
In above scenarios, the driver may be alerted by an audio alert and a message in the instrument cluster that ACC function is released/disengaged.
The driver is responsible for adapting to vehicle's speed, apply the brakes when necessary and keep a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.
ACC disengages whenever there is an ESP intervention. For example-: pot holes on a bumpy road
Graphic
In some situations where ACC braking is not enough to follow the front preceding vehicle, an audio alert along with pop-up message will be given in the instrument cluster "Collision Possible Apply Brake".
The driver has to apply brake to keep a safe distance.
Graphic
In case of temporary abnormal conditions, ACC Status telltale will illuminate in Yellow color and ACC function will be disabled temporarily by showing up a pop-up
“Adaptive Cruise Control Disabled due to Radar Limitation”
The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions
Causes
Action
The bumper in front of the radar is dirty or covered with snow/ice.
Clean/Clear the bumper in front of the radar.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.
Do not use ACC during heavy rain or snow.
Clogged water or snow from the surface of the road may interface with the radar signals.
No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the function of the radar.
Do not use ACC during these situations.
The bumper area in front of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed.
Graphic
In case of permanent failure, ACC Status telltale will illuminate in red color also and ACC function will be disabled permanently by showing up a pop-up
“Adaptive Cruise Control Disabled Service Required” Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
In case of collision in front bumper, the radar position may change which results in degraded ACC performance. Visit nearest service center for radar calibration.
7.5.4 ACC System Limitations
•  Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions.
•  Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision  avoidance system. The driver is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect front preceding vehicle.
•  ACC may not assist in close cut-in scenarios.
•  Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to people or animals. It also does not react to slow moving, parked or approaching vehicles, or stationary objects.
•  In case of a hit in bumper / full or partial blockage to RADAR, turn off ACC and get the vehicle serviced as early as possible.
•  ACC will be disabled when trailer is connected
When using a trailer, make sure the trailer electrical connector is connected to the vehicle.
Avoid using ACC under the following conditions
•  On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves
•  On slippery road surfaces
•  During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) and poor visibility.
•  When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the sensor
•  On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set speed and in trying to maintain set speed, may result in overheating the brakes)
•  On repeated uphill and downhill roads
•  When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration
•  Interference by other radar sources installed in nearby protected areas like military, airports etc.
•  Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in demanding driving conditions, in slippery conditions, when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on or off ramps.
ACC Limitation Scenarios
ACC may not function in below scenarios
•  Close cut-in situation
Graphic
Sudden entry of other road vehicle in to host vehicle's lane may not be detected.
•  Situation of stopped vehicles
Graphic
Sudden vicinity of stationary object in host vehicle's lane may not be detected.
Graphic
When the preceding vehicle that follows is cutting out, it detects the preceding vehicle (Vehicle-B) as a new preceding vehicle because of an irregular radar reflection are occurred in particular.
As Vehicle-B stops, the host vehicle stops on Vehicle-B.
At this time, since there is no collision with Vehicle-A, the driver may misunderstand that it is under normal control of Vehicle-A.
When Vehicle-B starts, host vehicle may start without considering the new stationary Vehicle-A because of irregular radar reflection.
•  Curve entry / exit situation
Graphic
Graphic
In the curve entry / exit situation, based on the curvature of road on which the host vehicle is moving differs from the curvature of the predicted road, so the adjacent lane can be selected as the control target and the preceding vehicle in the host lane may be missed
•  Curves with larger curvature
Graphic
If the radius of curvature is very small, an inadequate or excessive acceleration/ deceleration may occur due to the limitation
•  Poor visibility
Graphic
In case of poor visibility, Driver must take the control of vehicle
•  When a preceding vehicle enters an intersection
Graphic
In an road intersection, target preceding vehicle may be lost and ACC may not function as intended. Driver must take the control of vehicle.
•  When the road gradient changes
Graphic
In case of road gradient variation, preceding target vehicle may be lost and ACC may not function as intended. Driver must take the control of vehicle.
•  Sensor cover blockage
Graphic
Any blockage to sensors, detection will degrade and ADAS features may not function as intended
•  Long cargo loading vehicle
Graphic
Graphic
If the height of the preceding target vehicle is very high, the sensor may not detect it and ADAS functionality may vary. Driver should take control of vehicle.
•  Inability to recognize pedestrians
Graphic
In case of Stop & Go situation, the host vehicle may not detect pedestrian. Driver should take control of vehicle.
•  Excessive braking of the preceding vehicle
Graphic
ACC might not slow down your XUV700 sufficiently if target starts to decelerate too fast as ACC only has only 30% of total brake force available in vehicle
If the preceding vehicle brakes beyond the ACC maximum deceleration limit, AEB may engage. However, driver shall be alert and take control vehicle.
•  Detection performance deterioration due to road side structures
Graphic
If the front radar is exposed to the surrounding road structures (steel laminates, tunnels, construction sections, etc.) that may affect the detection performance, the front preceding vehicle may not be detected normally.
Any metal road structures / bridges, tunnels or toll plazas may vary the system functionality, Driver shall be alert and take control of the vehicle.
•  False deceleration or no deceleration
If radar misaligned vertically or horizontally, ACC may produce frequent false deceleration or no deceleration for front preceding vehicle. Visit nearest service center for radar alignment
•  ACC does not slowdown for pot-holes and Speed breakers
Graphic
Graphic
•  ACC may not slow down for road curves
Graphic
•  ACC may not slow down for barriers/blockades
Graphic
•  ACC does not slow down for crossing or merging vehicles at angles more than 30 degree
Graphic
Graphic
ACC might not slow down your XUV700 sufficiently if target starts to decelerate too fast as ACC only has only 30% of total brakeforce available in vehicle
•  ACC does not slowdown for oncoming/reversing front vehicles
Graphic
•  ACC does not slowdown for animals
Graphic
Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to special/modified vehicles such as Harvester, Tractor Trailor, Motorized Ice Cream Cart, construction vehicle, animals etc.
•  ACC may not reliably follow bicycle
Graphic
•  ACC cannot react to stationary target
Graphic
•  If a very slow moving target cutting in between your XUV700 and stationary target then there is a chance that ACC system does not pick-up the slow moving target since ACC is not able to discriminate between slow moving target and stationary target.
•  If a target in front takes a sharp turn and goes out of Field of view, then your XUV700 can start to accelerate fast.
•  ACC might not pick-up target at sharp curve
Graphic
•  When XUV700 follows two wheeler and two wheeler overtakes stationary target ahead, XUV700 may not slow down due to stationary target detection limitation.
Graphic
•  ACC cannot follow a motorized two-wheeler if two-wheeler speed is less than around 10kmph.
•  Do not use ACC with an offset to the target vehicle.
Graphic
•  Do not use ACC to follow motorbikes where there is no space for XUV700 to navigate.
Graphic
7.6 Collision Mitigation System
Collision Mitigation System alerts the driver by providing audio and visual warning when there is a possibility of collision with rear end of the preceding vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians detected ahead. if driver fails to take actions within a rational time, system will apply braking in certain situations to mitigate the collision.
Disclaimer
•  System can detect vehicles, cyclists and pedestrians but not in all situations. System's capacity to assess certain traffic situations is a supplemental aid to the driver and does not function in all driving/traffic situations or weather/road conditions. It can never replace the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or his/her responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Refer system limitation section for more information about system limitation. Read the manual carefully in detail before using the system.
•  Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the system could result in serious injury or death.
•  The Collision Mitigation System is a supplemental aid to the driver . It is not a replacement for the driver. It is driver's responsibility to monitor traffic conditions and drive the vehicle safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.
•  System does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.
•  System does not detect all kind of vehicles ,bicyclists and pedestrians.
•  System is designed to intervene as late as possible i.e. in emergency to help avoid unnecessary activation.
•  Vehicles, Pedestrians or cyclists at an offset may not be detected by FCW/AEB system.
•  Collision Mitigation System works on prediction of possible collision with the objects in front of vehicle by assuming the objects movements in certain directions. Sometimes the objects movement direction may not match to the prediction and the system may react early and provide warning or perform braking even though the object may not be in the host vehicle path.
•  Only rear end of the preceding vehicles are identified by the system and warning or braking as needed will be provided by the system. System may not react or providing warning or braking for a crossing or oncoming vehicle. System may not react to a stationary vehicle if the vehicle is stationed in crossing or oncoming pose.
Collision Mitigation System comprises of the following functions:
Forward Collision Warning (FCW): When enabled, alerts the driver in case of a possible collision detected by the system.
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB): When enabled, can provide a braking assist to mitigate the collision detected by the system.
There are situations where the system may not detect a possible collision, driver has to take control of the vehicle always.
System Operation
Prerequisite for activation
AEB or FCW gets ready to be activated when turned ON from Instrument Cluster settings and when the following prerequisites are satisfied
- The braking system is ready.
- Vehicle speed is within system operating limit
- No other system failures or degradation of functions related to Collision mitigation systems like Braking system, Engine management system, Steering system etc.
AEB/FCW for Vehicles
To enable the system to detect rear end of preceding vehicles ahead, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 kmph
Below 10kmph FCW/AEB will not work.
System detects types of vehicles that are either stationary or moving in the same direction as your vehicle. In order to detect a vehicle in darkness, its headlights and taillights must be ON and clearly visible.
Minimum overlap with the bumper should be 50% for system to detect a front preceding vehicle. Minimum overlap with the bumper should be 50% for system to detect a motorbike/two wheeler
Level 1 Warning
Graphic
•  The driver is alerted to the risk of an imminent collision by first level of visual and audible warning.
The icon displayed as visual alert may show the object in the front as car even though the system may react for cars, pedestrians,two wheelers and cyclists.
Level 2 Warning
Graphic
•  If the driver does not take action or the driver braking force is not enough to mitigate collision, system issues the second level of visual and audible warning and applies partial braking.
Level 3 Warning
Graphic
•  After second level warning, If the driver does not take action or driver braking force is not enough and risk of a collision is imminent, the system applies harder braking along with third level of visual and audible warning.
System applying AEB braking can only mitigate a possible collision and does not guarantee in avoiding the collision. Driver has to take necessary braking or steering actions to avoid the collision.
During harder braking, there are possibilities that the occupants may experience a high amount of physical shock due to the braking force which may cause uncomfortable feeling or injury. Take necessary health checkups and precautions when experienced.
All the occupants should wear seat belts, as the system braking may lead of high level of motional inertia, where unbelted occupants are in a risk of getting injured.
Vehicle’s brake lights come on when braking is performed by the AEB system.
If driver applies hard brake during drive , dynamic braking system activates to boost braking force.
When Forward Collision Warning is selected in Instrument cluster settings, the driver is alerted to the risk of an imminent collision by visual and audible warnings. Braking will not be provided in this setting.
Graphic
When system has applied the brakes, a pop-up message will be displayed as "Automatic Emergency Braking Completed".
If AEB system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.
If the vehicle driving speed is above 85 kmph, AEB third level warning won’t come and system won’t apply full braking. In this case first and second level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or Collision Mitigation System to take action.
The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 kmph of speed drop. E.g. if the Collision mitigation system is initiated at 70 kmph, then by reaching 20 kmph, the collision mitigation system will be deactivated. Driver has to take control of the vehicle always.
AEB/FCW for Pedestrain
To enable the system to detect a pedestrian, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 kmph.
For pedestrian detection clear information about the person's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the body and a person's normal pattern of movement are required. In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be a contrast to the background. If there is little contrast, the person may not be detected.
If major parts of the pedestrian's body are not visible to the camera, person may not be detected.
In order to detect a pedestrian, the system must have a full view of the person's entire body and the person must be at least 80 cm tall.
Fast moving pedestrians and pedestrians not in their walking pose are not detected by the system and hence there will not be any warning or braking provided by the system.
Minimum overlap should be 25% for system to detect a pedestrian.
System may not detect pedestrians in sitting, bent, crawling or lying poses.
If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph, AEB second and third level warning won’t come for pedestrian. Hence system won’t apply full braking. If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph and below 85 kmph, then first level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or for Collision Mitigation System to take action.
The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 kmph of speed drop. E.g. if the Collision mitigation system is initiated at 70 kmph, then by reaching 20 kmph, the collision mitigation system will be deactivated. Driver has to be in control of the vehicle always.
AEB/FCW for Cyclists
To enable the system to detect a cyclist, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 kmph.
For cyclist detection, clear information about the cycle itself and the rider's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the body and a cyclist's normal pattern of movement is required
If major parts of the cyclist's body are not visible to the camera, the system cannot detect the cyclist.
The cyclist should be of height greater than 3 feet and should be driving an adult cycle.
Fast moving cyclists are not detected by the system. Hence the system may not react by providing warning or braking for the fast moving cyclists.
If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph, AEB second and third level warning won’t come for cyclist. Hence system won’t apply full braking. If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph and below 85 kmph, then first level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or for Collision Mitigation System to take action.
The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 kmph of speed drop. E.g. if the Collision mitigation system is initiated at 70 kmph, then by reaching 20 kmph, the collision mitigation system will be deactivated. Driver has to be in control of the vehicle always.
AEB for Vehicles - Junction Turning
To enable the system to detect an approaching vehicle in junction turning scenarios the vehicle driving speed must be between 10-30 kmph and oncoming vehicle should be clearly visible and moving in the speed range of 30 kmph to 70 kmph.
To detect an approaching vehicle in situations where there is a risk of a collision, that approaching vehicle must be within detection range and your vehicle must be in left lane making a right turn with the right turn indicator ON.
In junction turning scenarios, system applies braking and there is no warning.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the target ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help mitigate the consequences of a collision and cannot completely avoid the collision. The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed. Never wait for a warning or collision mitigation system to take action.
The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:
•  When steering is applied to avoid a collision
•  When the accelerator pedal is depressed
•  When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead.
•  When driver presses and releases brake pedal.
How to turn ON/OFF AEB/FCW System
Perform the following steps to turn the AEB/FCW system ON or OFF:
1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the instrument cluster display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Auto Emergency Braking” and press the OK button.
•  Select “Auto Emergency Braking” and use the OK button to turn the AEB system on
•  Select “Forward Collision Warning” and use the OK button to turn the FCW system on
•  Select “Off” and use the OK button to turn the AEB/FCW system off
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
When the AEB system is turned off, the AEBS OFF telltale will be ON in instrument cluster
Warning Level settings
Graphic
The driver can select the level 1 warning activation time in the instrument cluster settings for driver assistance.
The options for the level 1 Warning include the following:
Late - When this condition is selected, warning is provided at shorter time to collision.
Normal - When this condition is selected, warning is provided at higher time to collision than "Late" setting.
Early - When this condition is selected, warning is provided at higher time to collision than "Normal" setting. if you are experiencing frequent warning, you can change setting to "Normal" or "Late"
There is a minimum time interval of 60 seconds required for system to provide successive AEB.
There is a chance for providing FCW warnings for some obstacles like Barricades and Cows since the RADAR may not be able to differentiate such big obstacles with respect to vehicles.
•  No automatic system can be guaranteed to function 100% correctly in all situations.
•  Never test Collision Mitigation System by driving toward a person or object. This could result in serious injury or death.
•  To help make Collision Mitigation System as effective as possible, it is recommended to always use the setting "Early"
Collision Mitigation System Troubleshooting
If any of below mentioned messages is displayed in the instrument cluster means that the system is not functioning properly and should be turned off.
However, message will not be displayed in all situations in which the camera/radar sensor is obstructed. For this reason, the driver must ensure that the area of the windshield in front of the camera and area on the bumper in front of radar sensor is always kept clean.
Graphic
1. In case of temporarily abnormal conditions due to camera sensor, AEB warning lamp will be ON in yellow color and a pop up message will appear in instrument cluster that "Automatic Emergency Braking Function Limited due to Camera Blockage" .
Graphic
The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions:
Cause
Action
The area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is dirty or covered by ice or snow
Clean the windshield or remove the ice/snow
Thick fog or heavy rain /snow blocks reduce the camera sensor’s range of visibility
No action. The driver should be extra alert in condition of this type.
There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera sensor.
Have the area of the windshield cleaned by Mahindra Authorised service.
•  If the warning lamp continues to illuminate after above action and engine restart, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer for this service.
Graphic
2. In case of temporarily abnormal conditions due to radar sensor, AEB warning lamp will be ON in yellow color and a pop up message will appear in instrument cluster that "Automatic Emergency Braking Disabled due to Radar Detection Limitation".
Graphic
The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions:
Cause
Action
The bumper in front of the radar is dirty or covered with snow/ice
Clean/clear the bumper in front of the radar.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.
Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interface with the radar signals.
No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the function of the radar.
The windshield in front of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed.
If the warning lamp continues to illuminate after above action and engine restart, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer for this service.
Graphic
3. If system malfunctions, AEB warning lamp will be continuously ON in yellow color.
Graphic
A pop up message will appear in instrument cluster that "Automatic Emergency Braking Disabled: Service required". Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
7.6.1 Collision Mitigation System Limitations
Collision Mitigation System is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
•  Collision mitigation system cannot detect all vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians under all conditions.
•  System can not detect the following objects:
–  Small pedestrians (including small children)
–  Sitting or bent pedestrians will not be detected.
–  Pedestrians other than their walking or standing poses may not be detected.
–  Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using mobile transport such as scooters, child-operated toys, or skateboards
–  Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise not in a full upright standing or walking position
–  Pedestrian who are partially obscured, wearing clothing that prevents a clear view of the person's body contours.
–  Oncoming vehicles
–  Crossing vehicles
–  Merging Vehicles
–  Cutting in Vehicles
–  Specialized vehicles
–  Obstacles on the roadside
–  Vehicles that are irregular in shapes like hand carts, cycle carts, motorized carts, animal carts
–  Vehicles that look irregular when loaded.
–  Vehicles that have long trailers above.
–  Two wheeler or bicycles without a rider.
–  Two wheeler carrying baggage extended beyond regular shape of two wheeler.
–  Obscured vehicles.
•  If the pedestrians has limited contrast to their immediate background, warning or braking may be delayed or not come at all.
•  System may not react for fast moving pedestrians.
•  System cannot detect all cyclists in all situations, such as:
–  a partially obscured cyclist.
–  a cyclist whose clothing is in such a way that prevents clear view of the person's body contours
–  a cyclist transporting a large object
•  System may not function in junction turning scenario under below conditions:
–  If the oncoming vehicle is detected at a late stage
–  If the oncoming vehicle is partially obscured by another vehicle
–  If the oncoming vehicle changes lane at a late stage
•  System may not function if speed difference between the two vehicles is too small or too high
•  System may not function properly or detect a target ahead in the following conditions:
–  Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, fog, snow, dust storms, sandstorms etc.)
–  Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.
–  Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road
–  If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area
–  Interference by other radar sources.
–  The camera area of windshield is fogged up or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.
–  Strong light (such as, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera
–  A sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a shaded area or lightning flashes.)
•  In case of a hit in bumper / full or partial blockage to RADAR, disable AEB and get the vehicle serviced as early as possible.
•  AEB will be disabled when trailer is connected
When using a trailer, make sure the trailer electrical connector is connected to the vehicle.
Collision Mitigation System limitation Scenarios
Collision Mitigation System may not function in below scenarios
•  False decelerations or no decelerations
If radar misaligned vertically or horizontally, Collision mitigation system may produce frequent false warning or deceleration or no warning/ no deceleration for front preceding vehicle. Visit nearest service center for radar alignment.
•  When any vehicle moves greater than +/- 20 deg. to host vehicle direction
Graphic
If any vehicle moves at heading angle greater than +/- 20 deg. to the host vehicle system may not consider it. Driver must be alert and take control.
•  When it is difficult to obtain view by the camera
Graphic
Due to poor visibility by camera like sunlight or any other source of light on camera. System may not function as intended Driver must be alert and take control of the vehicle
•  When the tail light of the front preceding vehicle is asymmetrical at night
Graphic
At night, if the preceding vehicle's tail lamps are not in symmetry or mounting positions are unusual, system may not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control of the vehicle.
•  Pedestrian suddenly jumping in to the host vehicle lane too closer to host vehicle
Graphic
System may not consider if a pedestrian suddenly jumps in to the lane / area very closer to host vehicle. Driver shall be alert and take control of vehicle
•  If a part of the body of the pedestrian is a covered or standing pedestrian
Graphic
In the case of pedestrians whose body part is obscured by umbrellas, bags, special clothes, etc., detection may not be accurate & system may not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control of vehicle
•  Difficult to distinguish pedestrians due to low illumination.
Graphic
If the illumination is low / poor visibility, system may not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control of vehicle.
•  Fast moving pedestrians
Graphic
System may not function as intended with fast moving pedestrians due to sensing limitations.
•  Pedestrians with lower height
Graphic
System may not function as intended with pedestrians with lower height
•  Risk of collision in proximity cut-in
Graphic
There is a close-sensing blind spot, and there is a risk of collision at close cut-in of adjacent lane vehicles.
•  Intersection situation
Graphic
The control target of the radar is selected as the control target only for the rear surface of the vehicle driving in the AEB vehicle driving direction. Therefore, there is a risk of collision for vehicles moving at right angles to the direction of intersection or for vehicles turning right.
•  The condition is that target is not detected at the road inclination change point
Graphic
Due to the vertical angle limit of the radar, it is impossible to detect the front target (vehicle, pedestrian) in uphill and downhill hill.
•  The situation where the load is protruding from the rear of the vehicle
Graphic
When a specific type of load is loaded or a special vehicle, it can collide if it is not selected as the control target due to the sensor detection limit
•  When target can not be detected due to sensor contamination
Graphic
In case of Sensor (Radar, Camera) contamination, blockage can occur and collision of the front preceding vehicle and pedestrians is possible
•  When driving on a large curve road
Graphic
When driving on a large curve road, due to the sensor limit, the front preceding vehicle and the pedestrian can collide.
•  When it is impossible to obtain the driver's field of vision
Graphic
If the driver uses the AEB in the unconfined (snow, rain, fog, etc.), the sensor limit may cause a collision between the vehicle and pedestrians ahead.
•  Detection problems due to complicated structures around roads
Graphic
If a construction section, railroad track, or other metallic object is on the road (eg, tollgate, subway construction site, tunnel, lane-proximity guard rail, etc.) AEB/FCW will not work.
•  Collision Mitigation System does not react for pot-holes
Graphic
•  Collision Mitigation System does not function for Speed Breakers
Graphic
•  Collision Mitigation System does not function for barricades/cone/barrels
Graphic
•  Collision Mitigation System does not function for oncoming vehicles
Graphic
•  Collision Mitigation System does not function for animals
Graphic
7.7 High Beam Assist
High beam assist function is intended to reduce the glare produced by the High Beam lamp which in turn aids the drivers of oncoming vehicles to maneuver safely .
High beam assist feature automatically turns high beam ON or OFF depending on the vehicle speed, intensity of the light source of preceding and oncoming vehicles and the surrounding light conditions
High beam assist is only intended to assist the driver. The driver is still responsible for controlling the headlights through manual ON/OFF depending on visibility requirements.
How to Turn ON/OFF HBA System
HBA Activation
Select High Beam Assist function from Driver assistance menu
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Turn Steering Column Head lamp Switch to 'AUTO' position
Graphic
HBA will activate when following conditions are met:
•  High beam Assist is selected through driver assistance menu
•  Auto light switch is turned ON in the Combination Switch
•  Night condition is detected and Low beam is already turned ON through the Light Sensor
•  High beam switch is turned ON
•  Vehicle speed is above 20 kmph
Graphic
When HBA feature is activated, HBA lamp will be ON.
Once HBA is activated, HBA feature will turn OFF High Beam when any of the light sources from oncoming / Preceding vehicle or streetlights is detected in front of vehicle.
HBA feature will turn ON High Beam when:
•  HBA function is activated as per above conditions.
•  No light source is detected by the camera from Oncoming/Preceding vehicle or from other light sources (depends on intensity) for few seconds.
If high beam was turned OFF due to street lights, then high beam will be turned ON once streetlight area is completely crossed
If system malfunctions , a pop up message will appear in Instrument Cluster as "High Beam Assist Unavailable". It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer in this case.
Graphic
7.7.1 HBA System Limitations
HBA is subject to certain system limitations and may keep High beam OFF for certain limitations and ON for few other limitation conditions.
•  When the light from the on-coming or front preceding vehicle is not detected because of lamp damage, hidden from sight, etc.
•  When headlights or taillights are with non-standard color or Illuminance level or shape.
•  When the lamp of the on-coming or front preceding vehicle is covered with dust, mud, snow or water.
•  When visibility is poor due to fog, heavy rain or snow.
•  When head lamp aiming is not properly adjusted.
•  When driving on a narrow-curved road or rough road.
•  When driving downhill or uphill.
•  When vehicle is near bright street tower lamps, reflecting sign or mirror, flashing sign lamps.
•  When the vehicle is tilted may be due to a flat tyre or being towed.
•  When the light from bicycle is weak or located in long distance.
•  When the light from oncoming or preceding vehicle is very small or weak or located in low or too high position.
•  When windshield is dirty or if any object blocks the Camera sensor.
•  When vehicle is in Construction area due to temporarily installed reflectors.
•  When vehicle is near traffic lights, signboards of buildings, lightning rods of construction sections, center line separation rods (reflection type), traffic signs (including variable speed LEDs), vehicle lights reflected on building glass or road reflectors.
7.8 Traffic Sign Recognition
Traffic Sign Recognition feature assists the driver by displaying Speed limits signs in the instrument cluster display.
TSR system is limited to the detection capabilities of Camera sensor . The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle as per the road regulations.
Traffic sign recognition can detect standard speed limit signs that are within the camera's visual field.
How to Turn ON/OFF TSR System
Select Traffic Sign Recognition Function from Driver Assistance menu in the cluster
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Traffic sign display in Instrument Cluster
Speed: limit Signs
Graphic
When the system recognises a speed limit sign, it displays on Instrument Cluster
Graphic
After a pre-defined time, road sign display is Grayed out to indicate to driver that the sign is of past value.
Graphic
If End of Speed Limit sign is detected, the icon in the cluster gets updated as shown in the image.
Graphic
If no new Speed Limit Sign detected for some time, the icon changes to 'No Recognition’ as shown in the image.
Over Take Not Allowed Sign
Graphic
When the system recognizes an overtaking not allowed sign, it is displayed on Instrument Cluster
Graphic
If system malfunctions, a pop up message will appear in Instrument Cluster that "Traffic Sign Recog. Unavailable". It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer in this case.
7.8.1 Traffic Sign Recognition System Limitations
The Traffic Sign Recognition is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:
•  The traffic sign is located on a sharp curve.
•  The traffic sign is improperly positioned (i.e being turned over, blocked by an object, or damaged).
•  Another vehicle blocks the traffic sign.
•  The LED light of the traffic sign is broken.
•  The visibility is poor due to heavy rain, snow, fog or poor light around the sign.
•  The traffic sign do not conform to the standards.
•  The traffic sign cannot be distinguished due to shadow caused by overpass or trees.
•  There is bright light around the traffic sign.
•  The vehicle speed is too low or too high.
•  There is dirt, ice or frost on the front windshield, where the camera is installed.
•  The camera lens is blocked by an object, such as sticker, paper, or fallen leaf.
•  Host vehicle driven right after preceding vehicle.
•  The bus or truck, on which the speed sticker is attached, passes by your vehicle.
•  TSR function may not detect electronic sign board.
•  TSR function may not detect conditional sign board.
•  TSR function may not detect rectangular sign boards.
7.9 Lane Keep Assist System
The Lane Keep Assist (LKA) system provides corrective steering to prevent the vehicle from departing the lane if the system judges that the departure is unintentional from driver's side.
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system provides visual, audio and haptic alerts to the driver once the system detects that the vehicle is crossing the lane boundary unintentionally which is determined based on whether the turn signal towards the direction of departure is turned ON or not.
The driver can choose to have either Warning Only or both Warning + Assist feature.
It is important to know that the Lane keep Assist system shall work only if the lane markings on the road are clearly visible.
The Lane Keep Assist function is meant to provide assist to the driver and cannot take full control of the steering system.
It is driver’s responsibility to stay alert and be in control of the vehicle throughout the drive.
How to Turn ON /OFF Lane Keep Assist System
Go to Driver Assistance menu under Settings
Select Warning + Assist to enable both Lane Keep Assist as well as Lane Departure Warning
Select Warning Only to enable Lane Departure Warning alone.
Graphic
Graphic
System Operation
When the system can detect the lanes, the lane marking in instrument cluster will be in white.
Graphic
When system cannot detect lanes or if system is unavailable due to speed being less than 60 kmph, the marker lines will be grayed out.
LDW Operation in "Warning Only" mode
Graphic
Graphic
If both side lanes are not detected or the speed or road conditions are not satisfied, LDW feature will be in STANDBY mode and LDW indicator light will illuminate in white.
If any of the lane markers are detected and vehicle speed is above 60kmph and all the other road parameter values are satisfied, LDW feature is ready for operation and LDW indicator light will illuminate in green.
Graphic
When vehicle approaches either the left or the right lane boundary, the LDW indicator on the instrument panel will blink and lane marking color of respective side will change to orange. Haptic and audio alert will also be provided to warn the driver about lane departure.
The warning will be stopped either when vehicle changes the lane completely or if the vehicle returns back to original lane.
Lane Departure Warning will not be provided or stopped if already being provided, if in case either turn signal or hazard switch is turned ON
Lane departure warning shall be resumed in approximately 4 seconds after turning OFF the turn signal.
Lane Departure Warning may be provided for road edges or road marks which looks like lane boundaries.
The maximum warning time is limited to 2.2 sec. To provide re-warning, vehicle should have been out of warning region atleast once. i.e. Vehicle has to be in or near to center of the lane.
LKA Operation in "Warning + Assist" mode
Graphic
If both side lanes are not detected or the speed /road/vehicle dynamic conditions are not satisfied, LKA feature will be in STANDBY mode and LKA indicator light will illuminate in white.
Graphic
If both lane markers are detected, vehicle speed is above 60 kmph and all the road and vehicle related activation conditions are satisfied, LKA system is ready to provide assist and LKA indicator light will illuminate in green.
Graphic
When the system detects an unintentional departure of the vehicle from its lane, a slight counter steering torque is provided to prevent the departure and the driver is notified by blinking the LKA indicator on the instrument panel in green color. Also visual and audible alerts are provided if vehicle is about to cross the lane boundary.
The warning and assist will be stopped either when vehicle changes the lane completely or if the vehicle is returned back to original lane
Graphic
When LKA system provides steering assist, steering wheel indicator will illuminate in green.
Lane Keep Assist will not be provided or stopped if already being provided, if in case either turn indicator signal or hazard switch is turned ON.
Lane Keep Assist shall be resumed again only once vehicle has returned back to lane and 4 seconds is completed after turning OFF the turn indicator signal.
LKA may be provided for road markings if those are looking like lane boundaries. LKA may be provided for road edges/vertical road edges (cones/curbs/medians/guard rails) if the system detects them accurately, but not always guaranteed.
LKA will not be provided if the vehicle approaches the lane boundary with a higher heading angle.
LKA won’t be provided in the types of roads if road edge/vertical road edge is present on one side and neither road edge/vertical road edge nor lane marking is present on the other side.
The audible alert can be disabled through settings in the cluster if the driver wishes to do so.
LKA and LDW shall be activated above 60 kmph and gets deactivated below 55 kmph.
If the vehicle dynamics conditions are not safe for the operation of LKA, then LKA may not be provided at all or may get cancelled if it is already being provided.
Similarly when Left turn /Right turn/Hazard is activated LKA will not be provided or will be cancelled if already being provided.
The Lane Keep Assist torque will be adjusted according to the driver applied torque to reduce discomfort and to provide precedence to driver control.
If the driver intentionally tries to cross the lane boundary by applying more torque, then assist will be cancelled. In such conditions warning alone will be provided once the vehicle crosses the lane boundary.
If the driver is constantly holding the steering wheel very lightly while the LKA intervention is being provided, system may assume that the driver is not attentive enough and will provide visual alert to the driver as in image below:
Graphic
If the driver continues to hold the steering wheel lightly for a next intervention occurring within 3 minutes, then in addition to the visual alert, audio alert will also be provided until the system makes sure that driver is in full control.
If lane marking is suddenly not available or if lane widens suddenly , then for a short duration virtual lanes may get created and assist/warning may be provided once the vehicle approaches/crosses the virtual lane boundary .
The preference for steering control and alerts will be given to Smart Pilot Assist over Lane Keep Assist if Smart Pilot Assist is equipped and enabled by driver. Please go through Smart Pilot chapter for more details.
•  Do not wait for system to provide Visual /audio alerts to hold the steering wheel. Driver is always responsible to have control of the vehicle.
•  In some rare situations when system is unable to do proper judgement, system may generate visual / audio alerts even when the driver holds the steering wheel as a precautionary measure.
•  System will provide only a mild steering torque within the operating limits. This torque may not be sufficient during sharper curves. System may stop providing assist if it determines the torque provided is not sufficient to pull back to the lane. Driver is always responsible to steer the vehicle and bring vehicle back to lane.
Graphic
LKA/LDW will not be provided for barricades and barrels on the side of road.
Graphic
Graphic
If system malfunctions in Warning Only mode, LDW indicator light will illuminate in Amber color and a pop up message will appear in Instrument Cluster that "Lane Departure Warning Unavailable".
It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer in this case.
Graphic
Graphic
If system malfunctions in Warning + Assist mode ,LKA indicator light will illuminate in Amber color and a pop up message will appear in Instrument Cluster that "Lane Keep Assist Unavailable". It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer in this case.
LKA may not detect obstacles at the side of the vehicle and may try to pull back the vehicle laterally to the center of lane even though another vehicle may be occupying the lane at the side. This could lead to a possible collision. Driver should always be in control of the steering wheel and shall provide additional torque to override LKA in such situations.
Graphic
There could be vertical structures like curbs, medians etc. at the end of lane marking and assist provided by LKA system may not be sufficient enough to pull back the vehicle before the vehicle leaves the lane. User has to take control of steering always and provide necessary steering to avoid lane deviations or crash.
7.9.1 Lane Keep Assist System Limitations
LKA and LDW System is intended to assist the driver and cannot function as intended in all kinds of driving, weather, traffic and road conditions as mentioned below.
•  Road under construction
•  Reduced visibility due to bad weather on account of rain, fog, snow etc
•  Roads with indistinct/faded lane markings
•  Road sections with sharp curves
•  Narrow roads
•  High speed driving especially in sharp curves
•  Road sections where there are turn lanes or when the original lane merges or separates
•  Passing through tunnels when brightness changes suddenly.
•  Horizontal or vertical slope
•  Preceding vehicle obstructing lane visibility
•  Improper headlight aiming/headlight covered with dirt
•  Any other environmental conditions affecting camera vision
•  Poor visibility due to sun glare or blockage in lens
•  Lane Keep assist function will be disabled when the trailer is attached.
•  Lane Keep assist functions will not work properly when there is a heavy cross wind.
•  Lane Keep assist function may not work when the lane marking color is other than white and yellow.
In such situations, it may be advisable to turn the function OFF or driver shall take complete control of vehicle.
7.10 Smart Pilot Assist System
Smart Pilot Assist system is intended to help the driver to keep the vehicle in center of a traffic lane's side marker lines by providing steering assist as well as maintaining a set time interval.
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of system could result in serious injury or death.
•  Smart Pilot Assist System is not a self-driving system. Within the limits of its capabilities, as described in this manual, it helps the driver with certain driving activities.
•  Smart Pilot Assist system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive of driver.
•  Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
•  Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can be ready to steer at any time. The driver is always responsible for staying in a lane and for assessing traffic situations.
•  Smart Pilot Assist must only be used where there are clearly visible traffic lane side marker lines on both sides of the current traffic lane. In other circumstances there is an increased risk of collision with surrounding obstacles that are not detected by the system.
How to activate Smart Pilot Assist
Select "Smart Pilot Assist" from "Driver Assistance" option in Instrument Cluster screen -> under Instrument Cluster Settings.
Graphic
Graphic
Smart pilot assist will be active only if ACC is active
System Operation
Smart Pilot Assist system is combination of Adaptive Cruise Control and Lane Centering.
Graphic
If speed/road/vehicle dynamic conditions are not satisfied, Smart Pilot Assist will be in STANDBY mode and Smart Pilot Assist indicator light will illuminate in white.
Graphic
If both lane markers are detected and all the road and vehicle related activation conditions are satisfied, system performs lane centering and indicator light will illuminate in green.
Graphic
When system performs lane centering, steering wheel indicator will illuminate in green.
If system was assisting and transiting to Standby due to any reasons, then Smart Pilot Assist will stop providing assist and indicator light will blink in white for few seconds
If a slower moving vehicle is detected ahead during lane centering, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front as per the set time gap.
When lane markings are not available, system will follow set speed and set time gap as set by the driver for ACC.
Always use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions. A short time interval gives the driver limited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic. System will be deactivated/off when ACC system is turned off or Smart Pilot Assist is deselected from the settings or when 3rd stage hands-off warning displays.
When ACC is disengaged by pressing brake pedal, Smart Pilot Assist also gets into standby.
If lane centering was active and road is straight, Smart Pilot Assist may be provided for some more time even though lane markings are not available.
Smart Pilot Assist may follow preceding vehicle if lanes are not detected properly and following conditions are satisfied.
•  Lane centering was active before lane detection got dropped.
•  Preceding vehicle speed is less than around 75 kmph
•  Preceding vehicle is close enough for system to follow. Smart Pilot Assist may stop to follow preceding vehicle if above conditions are not satisfied or if the preceding vehicle has changed the path.
Hands-off Detection & Warning : When driver does not hold the steering wheel with adequate torque, Smart Pilot Assist triggers hands off warning and it is continued until the driver holds back the steering wheel.
First stage warning will be provided immediately once hands off is detected
Graphic
Second stage warning with audio alert will be provided if driver is not holding the steering wheel even after the first stage warning.
Graphic
Third stage warning with audio alert will be provided when driver does not hold the steering wheel even after second stage warning . Here after Smart Pilot Assist and ACC will go to Standby
Graphic
•  Do not wait for system to provide Visual /audio alerts to hold the steering wheel. Driver is always responsible to have control of the vehicle.
•  In some rare situations when system is unable to do proper judgement, system may generate visual / audio alerts even when the driver holds the steering wheel as a precautionary measure.
The driver is always responsible for steering the vehicle and maintaining a suitable speed and distance to the vehicle ahead and must intervene if necessary, even if Smart Pilot Assist is being used.
Due to the limitations of the camera and radar sensor, the system may apply the brakes in your vehicle suddenly or not at all.
System will provide only a mild steering torque within the operating limits. This torque may not be sufficient during sharper curves. System may stop providing assist if it determines the torque provided is not sufficient to pull back to the lane. Driver is always responsible to steer the vehicle and bring vehicle back to lane.
Graphic
Smart Pilot Assist regulates your vehicle's speed using the accelerator pedal and the brakes. Please be aware that there may be a faint sound from the brakes when the system is using them.
Smart Pilot Assist may not detect obstacles at the side of the vehicle and may try to pull back the vehicle laterally to the center of lane even though another vehicle may be occupying the lane at the side. This could lead to a possible collision. Driver should always be in control of the steering wheel and shall provide additional torque to override Smart Pilot Assist in such situations.
Graphic
There could be vertical structures like curbs, medians etc. at the end of lane marking and assist provided by Smart Pilot Assist system may not be sufficient enough to pull back the vehicle before the vehicle leaves the lane. User has to take control of steering always and provide necessary steering to avoid lane deviations or crash.
Smart Pilot Assist Automatic Cancellation
Smart Pilot Assist cancels and goes to standby when:
•  ACC system cancels.
•  The maximum speed that Smart Pilot Assist supports is exceeded.
•  When driver shifts out of Drive gear.
•  An Automatic Emergency Braking event occurs.
•  When turn indicator or hazard is activated.
•  When interface systems are not available.
•  When driver steers manually.
•  When vehicle dynamics/road conditions are not suitable for Smart Pilot Assist Operation.
When Smart Pilot Assist cancels, the Smart Pilot Assist indicator changes to White color to indicate that system is no longer active.
Graphic
Graphic
When there is any failure in the system , below pop-up message appears on Instrument Cluster screen and Smart Pilot Assist indicator illuminate in Amber color. Visit nearest Mahindra service center for assistance.
7.10.1 Smart Pilot Assist System Limitations
Smart Pilot Assist is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
Note: All the limitations of ACC also apply for Smart Pilot Assist.
•  Smart Pilot Assist is unable to accurately determine lane markings due to poor visibility (heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.), or an obstructed, covered, or damaged camera or sensor.
•  When driving on hills.
•  The road has sharp curves or is excessively rough.
•  Bright light (such as direct sunlight) is interfering with the camera's view.
•  The sensors are affected by other electrical equipment or devices that generate ultrasonic waves.
•  When driving on winding or uneven roads.
•  When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
•  When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
•  When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.
•  On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
•  On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
•  On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
•  When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
•  When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
•  Smart Pilot Assist function will not work properly when there is a heavy cross wind.
•  Smart Pilot Assist function may not work when the lane marking color is other than white or yellow on both the sides of the road.
Smart Pilot Assist system can activate Lane centering from deactivated state only if lanes are available on both sides. Smart Pilot Assist cannot activate Lane centering from deactivated state if lanes are not available on both sides or if lane is available only on one side.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
– When the visibility of lane is blocked by a vehicle in front, Smart Pilot Assist cannot do lane centering
8 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS 1
8.1 Control Switches
Graphic
The driver door switch bank is located on the driver door armrest/handle and controls and the various functions:
A
ORVM Folding/Unfolding Switch
B
ORVM Adjustment Switch
C
Driver Door Window Switch
D
Co–driver Door Window Switch
E
Rear RH Window Switch
F
Rear LH Window Switch
G
Door Lock/Unlock Switch
H
Window Lock Switch
8.1.1  Driver Door Power Window Switch
Power windows can be operated when the ignition is in “ON” position.
The driver can operate all the power windows in the vehicle through the Driver door window switch on the driver door armrest/handle.
Graphic
Graphic
Other passengers in the vehicle can raise or lower their respective window glasses individually by using the separate switches provided on each of the door trim pads/armrests.
To lower/raise the window glass, press/lift the respective power window switch accordingly
Do not operate the power windows frequently when the engine is OFF. This will drain the vehicle battery.
If you operate the switches often during a short period of time, the system might become inoperable for a certain duration to prevent damage due to overheating. The system will return to normal functioning shortly. In such scenario, customer should wait for 1-2 minute & should not operate the switch during this period. After 2 minute operate the switch.
It is recommended to operate one window switch at a time.
To avoid any personal injuries always check and ensure that there are no obstructions like head, hand, etc. while operating the 'power windows'.
8.1.2 Power Window Lock Switch
The main power window quadruple switch in the driver door trim has a power window lock switch to enable or disable operation of rear passenger window switches.
Graphic
To disable the rear passenger power windows, press the window lock switch down.
To revert to normal operation, press the window lock switch again.
8.1.3 Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Graphic
The Door lock/unlock switch is located on the driver door trim. Driver can simultaneously lock/unlock all the doors by pressing this switch as shown in the image.
8.1.4 Smart Power Window with Anti-Pinch
This is applicable for driver door only (if equipped)
Smart power window is one of the significant safety features with the anti-pinch function, which automatically reverses the direction of glass if an obstruction is detected during the auto up mode.
Graphic
This feature consists of three functions:
•  Auto UP
•  Auto DOWN
•  Anti-Pinch during Auto UP
Auto UP: Pull the power window switch up for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way up automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the glass closes.
Auto DOWN: Press the power window switch down for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way down automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the glass comes down.
Anti-Pinch during Auto UP (If equipped): During auto UP if any obstacle is detected with the force value less than 100 N, The controller senses the load and reverses the direction of the glass by 180 mm from the point of pinch detection. Anti-pinch is available in 0-250 mm from the top.
Driver door power window can be opened or closed through Remote also. Press PKE/RKE lock button more than 1 seconds to close the power window. Press RKE unlock button more than 1 sec to open the power window. (If equipped)
Thermal Protection is active for all modes of operation, and once activated up movements are not allowed for 30s, and down movements are allowed if the window is not stalled in either of the stall positions (top stall/bottom stall).
Thermal Protection is tuned for 16 Cycles before 1st activation and inhibition duration is 30 Seconds.
After 30s thermal protection is de-activated, and the number of cycles available after inhibition is dependent on the idle duration. Right after thermal protection inhibition duration of 30 seconds 2 cycles are available.
Do not remove vehicle battery while power window is in motion
Extended Power Window
All doors power windows can be rolled UP/DOWN within 3 minutes after ignition off.
8.2 Mirrors
8.2.1 Interior Rear-view Mirror (IRVM)
Manual Type (if equipped)
Graphic
The interior rear view mirror provides the rear view information to the driver through the rear windshield. It also assists during reversing.
You can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or pulling its adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to other vehicles behind you
When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at night, adjust the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body and pushing or pulling it to a desired angle so that you can secure a clear rear view.
8.2.2 Manual ORVM (if equipped)
Graphic
Exterior Rear view mirror on both left and right sides provides the maximum side rear view information to the driver.
Both the ORVMs are hinged and can be manually folded or unfolded. This avoids hindrances in narrow areas and parking slots. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support, while folding or unfolding.
Objects seen in convex mirrors are much closer than they appear. Do not overestimate the distance of the objects that you see in the mirrors.
8.2.3 Electric Adjustable ORVM (If equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
The electric exterior mirror adjustment switch is located on the driver door trim/handle. The joystick on the switch can be used to select the left/right mirror and also to adjust the respective mirror.
8.2.4 ORVM Folding/Unfolding
Mirror Fold Function
To fold the ORVM assembly, press towards the right side of the switch with ignition ON condition.
ORVM folds automatically when:
•  The doors locked with the remote from outside the vehicle
For Auto fold function, the switch should be in neutral position.
Graphic
Graphic
Mirror Unfold Function
Graphic
Graphic
To unfold the ORVM assembly, press towards the left side of the switch with ignition ON condition.
ORVM unfolds automatically when:
•  Mirror is already in folded condition and ORVM switch is neutral condition and IGN is turned ON
ORVM memory functions and settings are connected with seat chapter.
8.3 Storage Compartments
8.3.1 Luggage Compartment (if equipped)
For 7-seat configuration: Second row and third row can be folded for keeping bigger/large objects.
Graphic
Fold down the third-row seats. (refer to “Folding the third-row seat” section)
Fold down the second-row seats. (refer to “Folding the second-row seat” section)
Now the bigger object can be placed with seat folded condition.
When you put the luggage on the folded seat, make sure that the luggage is placed firmly enough to avoid being shaken while driving. A shaky or improperly fixed luggage may injure the driver or passenger. Besides, ensure that the luggage does not obstruct the field of the rearview
Do not sit on the folded seat because the seat belt and other safety devices would not be able to protect you. It may cause serious injury in case of an accident
5 Seats Luggage Lid and Utility Bin:
Luggage Lid
Utility Bin
Graphic
Graphic
Luggage Lid/Utility Bin: In 5-Seater variants luggage space will be more comparing to 7 seater. Bigger items can be stored in the luggage lid/Utility bin area.
Luggage Net (if equipped)
Graphic
To prevent items from shifting towards the rear quarter trim, you can use the 4 hooks located in the rear quarter trim to attach the luggage net.
Make sure the luggage net is securely attached to the hooks in the rear quarter trim.
DO NOT overstretch the luggage net. ALWAYS keep your face and body out of the luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT use the luggage net when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.
8.3.2 Sun Glass Holder
Roof mounted sunglass holder is an integral part of the front interior lamp.
Graphic
Graphic
Press the lid to release the latch and lower the holder. It is strategically positioned to be accessed easily by both the driver and front passenger.
Do not access the sunglass holder while you are driving. It may distract your concentration and could lead to an accident.
8.3.3 Glove Box/Tab Holder
Glove Box : The glove box is located on the Left side of Instrument panel. To open the lid, gently press the unlock push button. To close the glove box, raise the lid all the way up and gently press to lock the lid.
Graphic
Graphic
It is suggested to keep copies of all vehicle documents along with the Owner’s Manual Kit in the glove box for reference when needed.
To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, glove box Lid should be kept closed when the vehicle is in motion.
Graphic
Glove Box Lamp (if equipped): This lamp is located inside the Glove box below the TAB Holder. It will get switched ON when Glove box is opened and switch OFF when it is closed.
Graphic
Tab Holder: Tab holder is available in Glove box area. You can place the Tab inside the Tab holder.
8.3.4 Console Storage
Graphic
You can use the console storage by lifting the console lid with the knob.
To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.
Do not store items that are damageable or cause noises since they can move around in the compartment while driving.
Do not store any flammable materials such as cigarette lighter in the console box or other space. In hot weather, they may explode and cause a fire.
Graphic
Graphic
By pressing up the console knob, you can use the compartment in the console storage. The console storage can be used as an armrest for both the driver and the passenger.
Cooler (Air vents)
Graphic
In select variants, a cooler (air vents) is provided in the Console Storage. You can cool cans, small bottles, etc. by opening the air vents. Turn the cooler clockwise to open the air vents, or anti-clockwise to close the air vents.
Only sealed cans/bottles to be stored in the cooler. Any spilled beverage can damage the interior trim and electrical components/cooler.
8.3.5 Front Cup Holder/Rear Cup Holder and Armrest (if equipped)
Front Cup Holder:
Graphic
Graphic
The cup holder located in the floor console between the front seats, It can be used for small cups or cans that are closed or have a lid.
Second row cup holder and armrest (if equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
The Second Row 60P seat features an armrest with cup holder.
•  To open the armrest, simply pull on the tab given at the top of the armrest (as shown).
•  When armrest is not required, push back the armrest into the 60P backrest.
Third row cup holder and armrest (if equipped)
Graphic
The Cup holders are located on both the left and right-side trims.
Only sealed cups/cans with lid to be used in the cup holders.
Use caution when using the cup holders. A spilled beverage that is very hot can injure driver or passengers. Spilled liquids can also damage interior trim and electrical components. Any spilled beverage can also startle the driver and cause a loss of control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.
8.3.6 Bottle and Umbrella Holder
Graphic
Bottle and Umbrella holders are located on both the front door lower trims. You can use them to store umbrella, maps, papers, small books, bottles, etc.
Only sealed/closed bottles are to be used in the bottle holders.
8.3.7 Seat Back/Magazine Pocket
Graphic
The seat back pockets are located on the back of the front seats for holding lightweight papers/books/magazines, etc.
To avoid injury, do not place large or hard objects in the seat back pockets. Do not put more than 1 kg weight in seat back pockets.
8.3.8 Grip Handle and Coat Hook
Grip Handle: Foldable grip handles are provided above the front (passenger only) and second and Third row outboard seats.
Coat Hook: The second-row outboard passenger seats grip handles features a coat hook for hanging your coat, shirts, etc.
Graphic
Hanging excess/bulky weight/items may cause breakage of the hook and inconvenience to the passengers. Hang light weight articles only..
8.4 Microphone(as applicable)
The microphone is located on the roof above driver side as shown in the image.
Graphic
Graphic
The microphone is used when talking on the phone. The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you must pair your Bluetooth® phone to the system.
8.5 Sun Visor
Use the sun visor to shield the direct sunlight through the front or side windows. It is available on both driver and co– driver side
Graphic
To shield the sunlight through the windshield, pull it downward.
Graphic
To shield the sunlight through the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket and swing it to the side.
Adjusting the sun visor or using the mirror on the sun visor while driving may cause an accident by taking your attention away or blocking your view
Adjust and use the sun visor when the vehicle is not in moving
8.5.1 Vanity Mirror and Lamp (if equipped)
Vanity mirror is in the Sun visor.
Graphic
Swing the sun visor down and slide the cover to open and close the vanity mirror.
Graphic
Lamp above the sun visor will be ON once you slide and open the vanity mirror.
Lamp will not illuminate if arm is not correctly locked in the sun visor.
Do not adjust the sun visor while the vehicle is in motion.
8.6 Center Fascia Switch
Center fascia switches are located at the center of the Instrument Panel.
There are three types of center fascia switches available based on the variants.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Sl. No.
Switches
A
Passenger Air Bag ON indication
B
Passenger Air Bag OFF indication
C
Passenger seat belt indication
D
Hazard Switch
E
Home Screen*/ SVS*/ Rear Camera*
F
Display Off
G
Drive Mode
* - if equipped
When Passenger Air Bag is enabled/activated through the instrument cluster, then the 'PAB OFF' indicator light will turn off.
8.7 Driver Side Switch Bank
Driver side switch bank is located on the instrument panel below the right-side AC air vents.
Type 1
Type 2
Graphic
Graphic
The following switches are available in the driver door switch bank:
A
Dummy
F
Scroll Down*
B
ESP OFF
G
HDC ON
C
Scroll UP*
H
ESS OFF
D
Cluster Menu/Mode*
   
E
SET*/AWD*
*-if equipped
8.8 Power Outlet
Front USB Outlet
The USB outlets are provided on the center switch bezel below the infotainment control.
USB (A) as per the image provided can be used as an input to the music system. You can connect iPods, USB memory sticks, etc. as an input and listen to the music through the vehicle speakers.
USB (B) can be used only for charging.
Graphic
A: LH - USB Port
B: RH - Charging USB Port (if equipped)
It is recommended to connect an input device only when the vehicle is stationary. Trying to connect an input device while driving may distract your attention and lead to an ACCIDENT.
Second Row USB Outlet
Graphic
An additional USB outlet is provided on the rear side of the floor console below the second row AC vents.
It can be used only for charging and it is intended to be used by second row passengers.
Third Row 12V Power Outlet (If equipped)
Graphic
The 12V Power outlet socket is provided below the third row (RH) AC vents. Electrical equipment/appliances like mobile charger, cigarette lighter etc., can be used in the outlet.
The power sockets function only when the ignition is in ACC or ON positions. It is recommended to use the power sockets when the engine is ON to avoid battery drain.
To avoid serious injury:
•  Close the power outlet cap when not in use
•  Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet
•  When using electrical appliances, strictly follow the manufacturer's instruction manual
•  Never use the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping
•  Never insert foreign objects into the power outlet
•  Never use malfunctioning electrical appliances
•  Never insert inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet
Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet in any way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunction or fire, which could cause serious damage to equipment and/or personal injuries. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for any necessary repairs.
To prevent injuries and accidents, secure all electrical appliances before use. Do not use any appliance that may:
•  Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving
•  Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or overheating
•  Emit steam, while the windows of the passenger compartment are closed
•  Use the power outlets only when the engine is running. Remove the plug from the power outlet after using the electric device. Using the power outlets when the engine is OFF or leaving the electric device plugged in for many hours may cause the battery to drain
•  Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories or equipment that are not designed to operate on 12V
•  Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio noise and may interfere with other electronic systems or devices in your vehicle
8.9 Wireless Mobile Charging (If equipped)
Graphic
A wireless mobile charging unit is located in front of the center console below the front USB ports.
The wireless charging will work in ignition ON, Cranking and Engine ON conditions only. It will not work when the vehicle is in accessory mode or in ignition OFF condition.
Follow the below steps to charging mobile in wireless mobile charger.
To start wireless charging, place the smartphone equipped with wireless charging function on the wireless charging pad and turn the ignition ON
For best wireless charging results, place the smartphone in the center of the charging pad. Phone charging indication will appear on the IVI screen.
The wireless charging system is designed for one smartdevice confirming to QI standard only. Please refer to your smartphone’s user manual or the website of the manufacturer to check whether your smartphone supports QI wireless charging.
Recommended to place the phone on the center of the charger’s pad to start charging
Before charging remove the phone cover/case to improve charging efficiency
If any metallic object such as coins is placed between the wireless charger and the smartphone, the charging will be stopped & a warning “Foreign object detected’ will be displayed on the cluster. Kindly remove the coin or the metallic object. This is done to stop heating of the metallic object which might hurt the driver or the passengers.
Do not place misalign your phone from the charging pad. It may not charge or give a warning on the cluster.
Do not place any smart key on the charging pad.
Keep the charging pad clean and dry.
Do not keep any Debit/Credit card between the phone & the charger. It may damage the card. A warning is displayed on the cluster for the same.
8.10 Intelli Command Center Switch (ICC)
Intelli Command Center Switch (ICC) is located on the centre console near the gear shift lever.
It is used to control the infotainment screen.
Graphic
A
Media / Menu
B
Favourite
C
Home / Back
D
Phone and Connectivity
E
Rotary Knob/Scroll Knob
The following features can be used by Intelli Command Center Switch
S.No
Button
Event Type
Event
Action
1
Media
Push
Short
Display current media screen if active
Push
Long
Display source shortcut screen
2
Favorite
Push
Short
Recall favorite stored screen/page
Push
Long
Store current page/screen as favorite
3
Home/Back
Push
Short
Go One level up if applicable or else no action
Push
Long
Display HOME screen
4
Phone and Connectivity
Push
Short/Long
When Bluetooth OFF: Phone button press shall Turn ON Bluetooth and Show Device list screen.
Push
Long
When Bluetooth ON, but no device connected: Show Device list screen
5
Left
5-way Push type
Short
Move the Point of focus  to left by 1 item
 
Long Press
Move the Point of focus  to left by 1 item continuously until the press
Right
 
Short
Move the Point of focus  to right by 1 item
Long Press
Move the Point of focus  to right by 1 item continuously until the press
Up
 
Short
Move the Point of focus  to UP by 1 item
Long Press
Move the Point of focus  to UP by 1 item continuously until the press
S.No
Button
Event Type
Event
Action
5
Down
 
Double Press
Open App drawer
 
Short
Move the Point of focus  to DOWN by 1 item
 
Long Press
Move the Point of focus  to DOWN by 1 item continuously until the press
OK/Power
 
Double Press
Open Quick Application Drawer in infotainment screen.
 
Short
In Power On mode, select current items in Point of Focus
In Power Off mode, toggle System On/Off
 
Long
Toggle System On/Off
Scroll Knob (When controlling Volume)
Rotary Knob
Clicks, Direction
Increase volume of current Audio functionality by as many steps in case of clockwise direction
Decrease volume of current Audio functionality by as many steps in case of counter clockwise direction
Scroll Knob (When controlling Input)
Clicks, Direction
Move Point of Focus to the right/down by as many counts in case of clockwise direction
Move Point of Focus to the left/up by as many counts in case of counter clockwise direction
Note: The Intelli command center will primarily work for Infotainment functionality.
8.11 Lamps
8.11.1 Interior Lamps
Interior lamps comprises of front/rear roof lamps, ambience lamps and ignition key ring illumination.
These lamps can be used for an illuminated entry.
In auto mode, the roof lamps (courtesy lamps) and ignition key ring illuminate when any of the doors are opened. Once all doors are closed, the interior lamps gets switched OFF.
Switches on Roof Console (if equipped)
Graphic
A: LHS reading lamp
B: Door/ Auto Mode
C: SOS calling
D: Roof Lamp ON
E: RHS reading lamp
Front Roof Lamp – Type 1
Graphic
The front roof lamps are located in the roof console above the interior rearview mirror.
The roof lamp can be switched ON by pressing the switch 'D' (Refer Switches on Roof Console). Press the switch again to switch OFF the roof lamp. Also, the lamp goes off once the Lock button in RKE/PKE is pressed and the same will be ON again when unlock button on RKE/PKE is pressed
For Auto mode - Auto Mode will be active when Switch 'B' is in pressed position. In Auto Mode, the roof lamps will turn ON automatically when any of the doors are opened. The roof lamps will also turn OFF automatically after preset time once the doors are closed.
For Reading Lamp – Reading Lamp switches 'A' & 'E' can be independently pressed for LH and RH lamps. Press the switch again for switching OFF
Map Reading Lamp (if equipped):
Graphic
Map reading lamps are located on the both sides of the roof near the grab handle above the second-row seats.
Do not leave the roof/map reading lamp in permanent ON mode. This will drain your vehicle battery.
SOS calling
Graphic
The eCall system automatically notifies the emergency services if your car is involved in an accident. You can also call the emergency services manually by pressing the SOS button.
This button should only be used in a real emergency.
Front Roof Lamp – Type 2
Graphic
The front roof lamp is in the roof console above the front seats. The courtesy lamp can be switched on using the middle switch (B) on the lamp.
A: The courtesy lamp remains permanently ON in this position
B: The courtesy lamp remains in AUTO mode (if equipped) in this position. The lamp remains ON as long as any one of the doors are open and switches OFF when all doors are closed properly
C: The courtesy lamp remains permanently OFF in this position
Centre Roof Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The center roof lamps can be switched ON by pressing the switch on it. To switch it OFF press the switch again.
In case, front roof lamp's 'AUTO' mode is ON, the center roof lamp also goes ON/OFF when the opening and closing of any of the doors.
It cannot be switched off independently in auto mode.
8.11.2 Exterior Lamps
Lighting Control Stalk: The lighting control stalk is located on the right-hand side of the steering wheel and is a part of the combination switch.
It controls operations of parking lamps, head lamps, head lamp beam selection, high beam flashing, front/rear fog lamps and turn signals when the ignition switch is ON.
Graphic
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to Position “OFF” to switch OFF all lamps.
i) Turn Signals
Graphic
A: Turn Signal - Left xxxxx B: Turn Signal - Right
Taking a Right Turn:
•  Push the lighting control stalk clockwise to indicate a right turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the right flashes along with the right side turn signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards right
After you have completed your right turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp.
Taking a Left Turn :
•  Push the lighting control stalk anti-clockwise to indicate a left turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the left flashes along with the left side turn signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards left
•  After you have completed your left turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp.
If the turn signal lamps on the instrument panel flash faster than normal, there may be a possibility that one or more of the turn signal lamp bulbs have blown. Replace the blown bulb immediately.
Changing Lanes:
The system is equipped with One Touch Lane Indicator function which can be used to signal a lane change
To signal a lane change, move the light control stalk clockwise or anti-clockwise to the limit point of free movement of the lever and release. The turn signals will flash three times and stop.
The turn signals will continue flashing as long as the lighting control stalk is held in the limit point of free movement.
ii) Parking Lamp ON
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/downward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk 2nd position from the top position to switch ON the parking lamps.
Graphic
The tail lamp, license plate lamp, instrument panel illumination lamps and all interior switches are also activated when the parking lamp is switched ON.
The Park lamps will be switched OFF automatically after opening the driver door. If a user still wants a park lamp they must turn OFF & turn ON manually.
Park Lamp Warning Buzzer
A warning buzzer sound will be provided if the park lamp is left ON with ignition OFF, as soon as driver door is opened.
iii) Head Lamp “AUTO” Function
Graphic
Auto head lamp switches ON the head lamp based on the outside ambient light sensed by the RLS sensor. This is useful when travelling through tunnels or low light areas.
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/upward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to the 3rd position from top to switch ON Auto head lamp function
•  Do not clean the sensor with detergent or wax
•  On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending on the weather, season, or circumstances
•  Any aftermarket sunfilm or spray may cause the lighting system to malfunction
•  When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room, tail, and head lights might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phenomenon recognising the automatic setting
•  There may be a difference between ambient light intensity sensed by the RLS sensor and the human eye. Hence it is possible that during low light conditions, the head lamp is activated early as the RLS sensor senses it as low intensity. This is a normal behaviour.
iv) Head Lamp ON
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on 1st position from the top to switch ON the head lamps.
Graphic
v) Head Lamp Low/High Beam
Switch ON the head lamp, and push the lighting control stalk down (away) from steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp high beam & lift/pull the lighting control stalk up again towards the steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp low beam. In head lamp high beam, the high beam tell-tale lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates indicating high beam option selected.
Graphic
A
Low Beam
B
High Beam
Your vehicle head lamps are vented and moisture may be collected on the inside of the head lamp lens under certain climatic and geographical conditions. This moisture will evaporate once the head lamps have been switched ON for a few minutes.
vi) Head Lamp Flash
Graphic
Pull the lighting control stalk towards the steering wheel to instantaneously flash the head lamp high beam and Low beam.
Head Lamp Levelling System
When the vehicle is either fully or partially loaded, it may have an upward inclination disturbing the head lamp aiming. A correct head lamp setting provides good visibility to the driver with minimum inconvenience to other road users.
Graphic
To properly aim the head lamp beam, use the head lamp levelling switch. This switch is located on the right side of the steering column shroud in the instrument panel. This switch has four positions marked as 0, 1, 2 & 3.
Switch Position
Vehicle Loading Condition
0
Driver/Driver with Front Passenger
1
Driver + Front passenger + Second row occupied
2
All seats occupied
3
All seats occupied with luggage OR Driver with luggage at extreme rear side
Select the suitable switch position depending on the pay loading condition as advised in the table.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the low beam is switched ON.
8.11.3 Auto Head Lamp Booster (If equipped)
Graphic
When the switch is in the Auto mode and high beam. Then when the vehicle speed crosses 80 Kmph the high beam intensity and reach increases. The higher reach of the beam is helpful to have vision for the higher speed
​The booster will turn OFF automatically when vehicle speed comes below 75 kmph
8.11.4 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) / Rear Park Lamp (if equipped)
To enable DRL/Rear Park Lamp: In daytime whenever the engine is in running condition and park lamp switch is in OFF position, DRL / Rear Park Lamp is enabled.
To disable DRL: Whenever the engine is in running condition and park lamp is ON, DRL will get switch to park mode
If customer doesn’t want the DRL/Rear Park Lamp to be ON, he can disable through infotainment settings.
8.11.5 Cornering Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
Cornering lamps are integrated in both the Fog lamps.
Respective side Cornering lamps turn ON when a sharp turn is taken.
They help in illuminating the road in the direction of turn.
The following conditions are to be met for the lamps to switch ON:
•  Ignition ON
•  Head lamp is ON
•  Sharp turn taken
8.11.6 Fog Lamps
Fog lamps (if equipped) are to be used along with head lamp low beam, to improve the vision during foggy and misty conditions.
Front Fog Lamps ON
Graphic
To switch ON the front fog lamps, first switch ON the parking lamps, rotate the inner rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the front fog lamp icon to the “arrow” on the inner fixed stalk as shown.
The front fog lamp indicator in the instrument cluster indicates the operation status.
Fog lamps will turn ON only if parking lamp is ON due to Park light input or Auto light input.
Fog Lamps OFF
Graphic
Align the “marking” of inner rotary switch on the lighting control stalk to the “OFF” position on the inner fixed stalk as shown to switch OFF the fog lamps.
8.11.7 Puddle Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
Puddle lamps are provided at the bottom of the front doors. They are switched ON automatically when the front doors are opened. This illuminates the ground below the respective door thereby assisting in a safe entry and exit.
8.12 Hazard Warning Lamp
The hazard warning lamp switch is in the center bezel switch bank on the instrument panel.
Press this switch to turn ON the Hazard Warning Lamp. All the Turn Signal Lamps will start flashing. The instrument cluster turn indicator lamps also flash indicating the same. To turn OFF, push the switch again.
Graphic
Use the hazard warning lamp when your vehicle is stationary or to warn other road users to be cautious while passing your vehicle.
The turn lamps will work when the hazard warning lamps are operational.
8.12.1 Auto Hazard Warning Lamp
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically during bonnet open in vehicle stationary condition.
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically for 10 seconds during panic braking condition to indicate following traffic.
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically in case of an unfortunate event of an accident where Airbags are deployed. In such a scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for 30 minutes or it can be turned off by operating Hazard switch (Off to On) or Ignition reset (Ignition Off and On)
8.13 Follow-Me Home (FMH) with Rain Light Sensor (RLS)
This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of the vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 seconds, assisting the passengers to find their way unless cancelled by the UNLOCK signal from the RKE.
To enable FMH;
•  Ignition transition from ON to OFF
•  Park lamp is OFF
•  Ignition key is out
•  Driver door open within 3 mins from KEY OUT
•  Head lamp would turn ON only if the ambience light is found dark by the light sensor
To extend FMH;
•  The first RKE/PKE LOCK command will be used for locking all doors
•  Successive RKE/PKE LOCK commands will be used for toggling the current status of the head lamp low beam
•  Each time FMH is extended the head lamp low beam will be kept/turned on for the next 20 seconds
To disable FMH
•  Park lamp transition from OFF to ON
•  Ignition off to any other state
•  FMH ON 20 seconds expires
•  FMH Max time is 3 minutes expires
With FMH mode ON, if the UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further. Also, the doors are unlocked and vehicle is disarmed.
8.14 Follow-Me Home Lamp (FMH) Non RLS (if equipped)
This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of the vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 seconds assisting the passengers to find their way. It will only work if prior to switching off the engine, the head lamp were ON for a predefined time
To activate FMH:
•  Switch OFF the parking lamps
•  Remove the ignition key
•  FMH can be activated by pressing lock button in key fob twice. First press locks the vehicle & second press enables head lamp low beam for 20 seconds.
•  Pressing unlock button in key fob disables FMH feature & unlocks the vehicle.
To extend the FMH feature further for 20 secs., press RKE LOCK button once. This FMH extension can be availed for maximum 3 minutes from the first activation.
With FMH mode ON; First LOCK signal received from RKE will lock the doors and subsequent LOCK signal is used to toggle the head lamp ON and OFF.
To deactivate FMH:
•  Switch ON the parking lamps
•  Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position
•  Press the RKE unlock/lock button once
•  Head lamp switches ON for 20 secs. and switched OFF automatically
With FMH mode ON, if UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further. Also, the doors are unlocked, and vehicle disarmed.
8.15 Lead Me to Vehicle Lamp(LMV) (if equipped)
LMV is the feature that will switch ON the head lamp for 20 secs. helping the passengers to reach the parked vehicle safely and comfortably at night.
LMV is activated:
•  Pressing the unlock button on the RKE two times
LMV is de-activated:
•  Switch ON the parking lamps
•  Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position
•  Press the RKE lock/unlock button once
•  Head lamp switches ON for 20 secs. and switched OFF automatically
To extend the LMV feature further for 20 secs., press RKE UNLOCK button once. This LMV extension can be availed for maximum 3 minutes from the first activation.
With LMV mode ON; First UNLOCK signal received from RKE will unlock the doors and subsequent UNLOCK signal is used to toggle the head lamp ON and OFF.
8.16 Remote Engine Start (If equipped)
This feature enables the customer can remotely Start/Stop the vehicle engine using mobile application.
This feature is mainly used to switch on the car air conditioner remotely via Adrenox connect app. When the engine starts, the vehicle AC automatically turns ON (If DATC equipped). This feature is available in automatic transmission and manual transmission variants with EPB.
The following conditions must be met for a vehicle to be started remotely:
•  All doors including bonnet and tail door must be closed and locked.
•  Vehicle Automatic transmission should be  in P (Park) OR Manual transmission (gear in neutral Position) with EPB applied .
•  Ignition must be in OFF position.
•  Sufficient Fuel and battery charge for the car to start.
8.17 Windshield Wipers
8.17.1 Wiper Control Stalk
Graphic
A: Flick- Wipe (MIST)
B: Off
C: Intermittent (INT)/AUTO
D: Low Speed (LO)
E: High Speed (HI)
F: Rotary Switch
Wiper Off: The wipe function is OFF when the wiper control stalk is in neutral position (B).
Flick-Wipe (Mist): Push the wipe control stalk to position (A) for a flick-wipe, hold to operate the wipe continuously (simultaneously lift the wiper stalk towards the steering wheel to operate the wash). The stalk automatically comes back to position (B) when released.
Intermittent (INT) (If equipped):Intermittent (INT) mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position (C). In the INT mode, the wiper operates on preset intervals. The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).
Auto Mode (if equipped): Auto mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position C. In the AUTO mode, the wiper operates based on rain intensity.
The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).
When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will automatically operate once if the wiper switch is turned from the “OFF” to the “AUTO” position.
Low Speed Wiping: Push the wipe control stalk down to the position (D) to operate the wiper at a fixed low speed.
High Speed Wiping: Push the wiper control stalk down to position (E) to operate the wiper at a fixed high speed.
8.17.2 Wipe/Wash
Pull/Lift the wiper control stalk towards the steering wheel from any position to activate wipe/wash function. Washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield. The wipers wipe the windshield 3 times after the washer spray is stopped. Hold the stalk in position for continuous spray of washer fluid.
Graphic
When wiper is in OFF or Intermittent mode:
After completion of the wipe/wash cycle, wipers return to their bottom position.
If the wipers are in Intermittent mode and DWELL delay is less than or equal to 5 secs., then the wiper will continue in the Intermittent mode.
If the wipers are in Intermittent mode, and DWELL delay is more than 5 secs., then a further single wipe will be performed 5 secs. after the wash/wipe cycle. After the drip wipe (last wipe), wiper returns to normal Intermittent wipe.
The wipe/wash function can be activated only when the ignition is in “ON” position.
8.17.3 AUTO Wash (if equipped)
Graphic
When Auto Washer switch is pressed once, Washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield for 2 seconds. The wipers wipe the windshield 4 times
After that, again Washer fluid from front washer motor will turn ON for 1.5 seconds and the wipers wipe the windshield 3 times
AUTO wash function will work only when the wiper switch is in OFF mode.
8.17.4 Rear Wiper-INT Mode
Graphic
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to align the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position to operate the rear wiper in INT mode. In this mode, the wiper operates on preset intervals of 4 seconds.
8.17.5 Rear Wiper-ON Mode
Graphic
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to align the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position to operate the rear wiper continuously .
8.17.6 Rear Wash
Graphic
Push the wiper control stalk towards back side from any position to activate wipe/wash function. The rear windshield wash & wipe operates 3 to 4 times or as long as the stalk end is Push/Pull to the rear wash position. Wiping will continue for 3 times after releasing the stalk end switch.
If you switch OFF the ignition before switching OFF the wiper, the blades stop at random on the windshield. Switch ON the ignition and move wiper stalk to 'MIST' position to return the wipers to the park position, provided the wiper stalk is in OFF position.
Using a windshield washer in freezing temperatures could be dangerous. The washer fluid could freeze on the windshield, and block your vision resulting in an accident. If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 deg C, use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection.
•  Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry. It may lead to scratches on the glass
•  It is recommended not to use the wiper when the windshield glass is covered with debris, snow or leaves. Clean the glass before using the wiper to avoid damage to the wiper blades and glass
•  Do not operate the windshield washer for more than 10 secs. or when the reservoir is empty
8.17.7 Windshield Washer Jet - Front & Rear
Graphic
There are two nozzles with triple adjustable washer jets in the front (on the bonnet). Using a pin, the eyeball jets can be adjusted precisely for direction.
Always direct the washer jet to hit the middle of the windshield. This will enable the wiper blade to wipe the complete width of the windshield.
Graphic
In the rear, one nozzle with triple adjustable washer jets are provided for the rear windshield wash.
Adjust the nozzle to direct the washer jet to hit the middle of rear windshield using a pin. Rear windshield washer fluid is supplied from front washer reservoir located in the Engine compartment.
9 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS II
9.1 Skyroof
A skyroof will make the driving experience more enjoyable by bringing light and sunshine into the vehicle.
It provides a real open air feeling along with pure driving fun, with fresh air, your driving experience automatically becomes significantly more relaxed. A skyroof allows air to flow evenly from above the driver, which is much quieter and less intrusive than wind blowing through a side window
9.1.1 Controls and functions

Graphic
Switch Position
Switch Press
Operation
1
Short Press
Sunshade Express Open
Long Press
Sunshade Manual Open
2
Short Press
Skyroof Express Open
Long Press
Skyroof Manual Open
3
Short Press
Skyroof Express Close
Long Press
Skyroof Manual Close
4
Short Press
Sunshade Express Close
Long Press
Sunshade Manual Close
0 & 5
Switch Home/Neutral Position
6
Short Press
Tilt Up
7
Short Press
Tilt Down
Toggle switch for the skyroof to operate. Home/Neutral position of the Switch (0) and (5). To operate the sliding skyroof and Rollo shade Pull or Push or Tilt the switch as shown in image, after every operation switch goes to Home position automatically.
You must switch ON the ignition to operate the skyroof.
9.1.2 Rollo Shade Open
Graphic
Pull the switch to position (1) for Rollo Shade Express (one touch) open. Manual (long press) open to stop at desired position.
9.1.3 Rollo Shade Close
Graphic
Push the switch to position (4) for Rollo Shade Express (one touch) Close to close Rollo Shade completely. Manual (long press) Close to stop at desired position.
9.1.4 Skyroof Open
Graphic
Pull the switch to position (2) for skyroof Express (one touch) opened. Manual (long press) open to stop at desired position.
Skyroof Smart Open by Key Fob Unlock Button
Graphic
•  Skyroof and Sunshade can be opened by long press unlock button.
•  Sunshade will be open followed by skyroof.
•  Skyroof / Sunshade movement can be stopped by pressing lock/unlock button during movement.
9.1.5 Skyroof Close
Graphic
Push the switch to position (3) for skyroof Express (one touch) Close. Manual (long press) Close to stop at desired position.
Skyroof Smart Close by Key fob Lock button
Graphic
•  Skyroof and Sunshade can be close by long press lock button.
•  Skyroof will be closed followed by Sunshade.
•  Skyroof / Sunshade movement can be stop by pressing lock/unlock button during movement
•  Skyroof /Sunshade movement can be stop by pressing lock/unlock button during movement
If antipinch is detected 3 times continuously within 10 seconds, then smart close though Remote key will not work for next 30 sec. User can manually close skyroof through switch from console.
Skyroof Smart Close while Raining
Graphic
If Rain sensor is equipped: In auto wipe mode or wiper LOW or HIGH mode, when wiper is ON for predefined time, cluster will request user feedback for closing the skyroof. Using Steering “selection button/ center button” user can choose to close the Skyroof.
In RLS variant, Skyroof and Sunshade will close automatically while rain is detected or after the defined time(12 hours) during the vehicle is in Ignition OFF and locked state.
Graphic
•  In Non Rain Sensor variant Once wiper is turned ON for a predefined time, cluster will request user feedback for closing the skyroof Using Steering switch button User can close the skyroof.
Skyroof Smart Control by Voice Recognition
Graphic
User can open and close skyroof via Voice command through Alexa during Ignition ON
9.1.6 Skyroof Control by Authorised Mobile Phone Application
Graphic
User can open and close skyroof via mobile phone with authorized application in Ignition OFF
9.1.7 Skyroof Tilt Open/Close
Graphic
Tilt/Rotate Up the switch to position (6) for skyroof Tilt Open
Tilt/Rotate Down the switch to position (7) for skyroof Tilt Close
9.1.8 Pinch Protection For The Power Skyroof
•  Pinch protection can help reduce the risk of pinching injuries when closing the power skyroof..
•  If the power skyroof closing meets resistance or there is something in the way, the power skyroof opens again immediately.
•  Check why the power skyroof did not close & avoid such incident in future for your safety
•  Try to close the power skyroof again
•  Without pinch protection, the power skyroof will close with enough force to cause serious personal injury.
•  Always be careful when closing the power skyroof.
•  Pinch protection cannot prevent fingers or other parts of the body from being pressed against the edge of the roof; may result in injuries
•  If the power skyroof malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. Visit an Mahindra Authorised Dealer or an authorized Mahindra Service Facility for assistance.
9.1.9 Emergency Close Feature
•  The express (One Touch) / Manual (long press) skyroof and Rollo Shade Close function may not work due to -
•  Consecutive several attempts to close skyroof and Rollo Shade.
•  Pinch protection is only for closing skyroof and Rollo shade.
•  Excessive Ice / Dirt accumulation on the skyroof Glass / guiderails.
Follow the emergency close command as below:
•  Emergency close feature can be used, if Sliding skyroof or Rollo shade consecutive reversal movement observed 3 times within 10 sec then continue with step 2 as below to use Emergency close feature.
•  On the 4th attempt continuously push the skyroof close switch - position (3) or Rollo shade close switch - position (4) until it closes completely to ensure occupant privacy, safety & theft prevention from skyroof open window. This is Emergency Close Feature. (Never keep your hands or head in the skyroof window while performing this operation it may cause severe injury, since Anti-pinch function will not work at this 4th attempt).
•  Once the skyroof or Rollo Shade is completely closed, release the switch.
•  Alternatively, User may wait for min. 30 secs before operating skyroof and Rollo Shade, then skyroof can be operated with Normal Functions.
•  If the skyroof doesn’t operate as above, Visit Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance.
9.1.10 Initializing The Power Skyroof
Condition for Initializing the Skyroof /Rollo Shade
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected during skyroof / Rollo shade movement and reconnected or it is dead or any fuse is replaced, the skyroof / Rollo shade must be initialized. Otherwise Express (one touch) function (open/close/tilt) and pinch protection function will be deactivated.
Initializing command procedure:
1. Turn ON the ignition
(Pre condition shall be Close position for both skyroof and Rollo shade)
2. Close the skyroof fully by pushing ‘skyroof close switch’ (3) and keep the switch pushed for 1-2 seconds after the roof is fully closed, till clicking sound comes from skyroof .
3. Close the Rollo shade fully by pushing ‘ Rollo Shade close switch’ (4) and keep the switch pushed for 1-2 seconds after the Rollo shade is fully closed, till clicking sound comes from Rollo shade.
4. The Initializing command is complete, Check if the Express open/close features are working.
If the initializing procedure is not completely performed, then it has to be run again from step 2.
9.1.11 Self Learning The Power Skyroof
Self learning command procedure:
1. Self-learning must be performed when skyroof/ rollo sunshade assembly is replaced or when false anti-pinch reversal movement (reversal without any obstruction) is noticed
2. Close the skyroof fully by pushing ‘skyroof close switch’ and keep the switch pushed continuously. Do not release the switch and wait for following actions to perform.
3. Sliding skyroof will start opening after 5 sec pause and close automatically. Release the Switch to complete the procedure.
4. Close the Rollo fully by pushing ‘Rollo Shade close switch’ and keep the switch pushed continuously. Do not release the switch and wait for following actions to perform.
5. Rollo will start opening after 5 sec pause and close automatically. Release the Switch to complete the procedure.
6. The Self learning command is complete.
Incase skyroof and Rollo Shade Close switch is released in the middle of procedure, repeat from step 1.
•  To help prevent damage, remove ice and snow from the skyroof before opening or tilting it in winter season.
•  Always close the skyroof before leaving the vehicle or if it begins to rain. If the skyroof is open or tilted, rain could enter the vehicle interior and cause extensive damage to the electrical system. This could result in further vehicle damage.
•  Remove leaves and other objects from the skyroof guiderails regularly either by hand or using a vacuum cleaner.
•  If the power skyroof malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. See an Mahindra Authorised Dealer or an authorized Mahindra Service Facility.
•  The Rollo Shade can be opened and closed independently when the sliding skyroof is in closed position.
•  During sliding skyroof Express (one touch) open/tilt operation, Rollo Shade will also open in synchronization with sliding skyroof (Express - Complete Open Feature).
Do not remove vehicle battery while skyroof is in motion
•  Improper use of the power skyroof can result in serious personal injury.
•  Always make sure that no one is in the Path/Cutout of the power skyroof when it is Closing or Opening
•  Always take the key with you while leaving the vehicle.
•  Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle – particularly if they have access to the vehicle key. Unsupervised use of the remote control vehicle key makes it possible to lock the vehicle, start the engine, turn on the ignition and operate the skyroof .
•  Never stand or sit on skyroof glasses or roof. This can cause severe damage and would be treated as abuse of the skyroof which will not be covered in warranty.
•  Never keep the Luggages / weights on top of the roof/skyroof
•  Any wet area found on the headliner should be reported to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer Immediately
9.1.12 Wind Buffeting
When you drive the vehicle with the window or skyroof open at a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your ears or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter. This happens because of an influx of in air through the window or skyroof and due to its resonance effect. If this happens, adjust by opening the window or skyroof
9.1.13 Skyroof Service Checking Procedure
Graphic
•  Open the skyroof
Graphic
•  Check all 4 Rail channel corners for mud or Dust/ Leaf present in it
•  Move the leafs/Dust to center of rain channel and then remove it by hand
Do not blow air in drain hose channel before cleaning it manually – as the bigger leaves may go inside and block drain hose.
Graphic
•  After cleaning of all visible particles blow air into drain hose channel area to clean hose for mud in this area
•  Now pour 1 liter of water in rain channel and check if water is draining or not
If water is not draining kindly contact the Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service Centre.
•  High Pressure washer nozzle jets should not be directed towards skyroof seals and Rubber components.
•  Do not use High pressure water on skyroof area.
•  It is recommended to wipe the seals with damp micro fiber cloth during cleaning.
•  Skyroof rails and drain area should be cleaned using air blower.
9.2 Power Window and Skyroof Smart Close and Open
This feature is applicable only for driver door power window (if equipped with anti pinch operation)
9.2.1 Smart operations in Ignition OFF State
a). Using PKE/RKE Key Fob
•  Skyroof & Power Window Smart Close- During ignition off with all doors closed, if the key fob lock button is pressed for more than 1 second, then doors will get locked and Skyroof & power window will get closed automatically.
•  Skyroof & Power Window Smart Open- During ignition off, if the key fob unlock button is pressed for more than 1 second, then doors will get unlocked and Skyroof & Power window will be opened along with blower ON in fresh air mode (for approximately 40 seconds)
If any of the doors status is not changed for 45 seconds, doors will get locked, Skyroof will get closed but power window will be left open
b). Using Adrenox Command
Adrenox command will work only when
1. Ignition is off and
2. Doors in locked state and
3. Key fob is not inside the vehicle
Vehicle Controls
Graphic
Power Window Smart Open
Graphic
Power Window Smart Close
Graphic
Skyroof Smart Open
Graphic
Skyroof Smart Close
Graphic
Graphic
User set PIN will be required to execute AdrenoX commands
c). Timer Based Control (Applicable only for RLS variants)
Skyroof Smart Close - During ignition off, if Skyroof is open for more than a predefined time (for approximately 12 hours), skyroof and sunshade will get closed automatically.
d). Rain detection based control (Applicable only for RLS variants)
Skyroof Smart Close - During ignition off and doors are in locked condition, If rain is detected skyroof & sunshade will be automatically closed.
9.2.2 Smart operations in Ignition ON State
a). Using Alexa Voice Command
User can open and close Skyroof via voice command through Alexa during Ignition ON.
. .Alexa, Open Skyroof ....... .Alexa, Close Skyroof
User can open and close driver side power window via Voice command through Alexa during ignition ON (will open/close only driver side window)
. .Alexa, Open Windows....... .Alexa, Close Windows
b). While Wiper is ON
Skyroof & Power Window Smart Close- During ignition ON condition, if front wiper is ON for approximately around 10 seconds (varies based on wiper modes), a notification requesting user confirmation for closing the Power Window & Skyroof will be displayed. On confirming the same, both will be closed.
Graphic
9.3 Heating, Ventilation And Air-Conditioning System (HVAC)
HVAC system provided in the vehicle enables occupants to automatically/manually adjust air flow distribution pattern, air flow rate, air intake mode and air temperature inside passenger compartment.
By appropriately adjusting the control knobs/switches provided on the DATC/ETC control panel, located on center console, occupant’s comfort can be ensured.
HVAC system also helps in defogging / de-misting the windshield and windows. Air flow direction can be further controlled by adjusting louvres of air vents. An air filter is provided at the inlet of HVAC blower.
Engine coolant is utilized to heat the cabin air. For cooling the cabin air, an air conditioning circuit based on the vapor compression refrigeration cycle is used. The air conditioning system uses a refrigerant along with a suitable lubricating oil.
Although being non-ozone depleting, the refrigerant is a greenhouse gas, hence once allowed to escape in the atmosphere, it adversely affects the environment by contributing to global warming/climate change
Refrigerant used in system is a hazardous liquefied gas and is under high pressure.
The refrigerant is colorless and has ethereal or faint sweetish odor. Exposure of refrigerant to skin or eyes may cause irritation and frostbite.
They can also cause suffocation, dizziness and loss of concentration. When mixed with compressed air or certain other refrigerants, it may form flammable mixture. Never try to service HVAC system yourself which would involve refrigerant handling.
- If you sleep while operating the air conditioner or heater with all the windows closed, You may suffocate to death due to lack of ventilation. When you operate the air conditioner or heater, ventilate frequently.
Multiple vents are provided for distributing the air, being force-circulated by HVAC blower, throughout the passenger compartment.
To ensure sufficient air flow and hence adequate HVAC system performance, air flow path should be kept free of obstructions. Keep system’s air intake, located near plenum appliqué, free of snow, leaves and other debris. Also keep the area in front of air vents free of any obstruction inside the cabin.
9.3.1 Air Vents
Graphic
Side Vents: The two side vents are located one each at the left and right extreme ends of the instrument panel. Both the side vents provide air flow to the front seat passengers.
Graphic
Centre Vents: Two center vents are located below the infotainment screen in the center console. Both the center vents provide air flow to the front seat passengers. Direct air to the desired direction by adjusting the Louvres up/down or left/right.
Graphic
Defogger Vents
Graphic
There are four defogger vents in your vehicle: two side defogger and two windshield defogger vents.
They are located just below the windshield. The side defogger vents prevent the front windows from defogging.
Second Row Vents: The second row AC vents are located on the rear side of the center console.
Graphic
Third Row Vents: The third row vents (LH & RH) are located on side trims on either side of the third row seats.
It will be provided only for variants which have the third-row seats
Graphic
9.3.2 Electronic Temperature Control (if equipped)
Graphic
A
Temperature control Knob
B
Air distribution/Mode switches
C
Front defogger switch
D
Blower speed control knob
E
Rear Defogger switch
F
Rear A/C switch
G
Recirculation mode switch
H
Economy Mode switch
I
A/C switch
Temperature Control Knob
Graphic
By operating the temperature control knob, temperature of air being discharged from various vents can be adjusted to the desired level. Engine coolant is utilized to heat, whereas the air conditioner is used to cool the air inside the AC unit. Based upon selected position of the temperature control knob, the desired discharged air temperature can be obtained.
By rotating the knob anti-clockwise and setting it to the extreme left position, maximum cooling is obtained. When the knob is rotated clockwise, the discharged air progressively starts getting warmer and at the extreme right position, hot air is discharged.
Blower Speed Control Knob
The blower force-circulates the air through the HVAC unit and distributes it throughout the passenger compartment.
Graphic
Blower is OFF when the blower speed control knob is set to small (Blower Symbol) position (extreme left). To switch-ON the blower, rotate the control knob clockwise which progressively increases the blower speed.
Economy Mode switch (ECON)
Graphic
ECON switch turns ON economy mode. During ECON AC operation the system automatically cuts OFF at a higher temperature than normal AC. The operation can be used during mild weather conditions for better fuel efficiency. Comfort level may be compromised during this operation.
Press the ECON switch again to turn OFF economy mode.
A/C switch
This button turns the air-conditioner ON or OFF.
Graphic
When the air conditioner is functioning, air gets cooled and de-humidified before being circulated inside the cabin. In hot weather conditions, it will take a slightly longer time to cool the interior as compared to cooler weather. Fuel consumption will be relatively higher if the vehicle is being driven with the air conditioner ON.
AC will function only when both engine and blower are switched ON.
•  In certain operating conditions when the engine gets overheated, the engine management system may switch off the air conditioner intermittently
•  The air conditioner should be operated at least for ten minutes once every fortnight, even during winter months. This allows AC system components to get lubricated periodically and ensures optimum system
•  During extreme cold weather conditions, the air conditioner may not function until temperature of the air near the evaporator rises above a predefined threshold
•  When air conditioner is ON, moisture is extracted from the air. The resulting condensate is drained off from the vehicle. It is therefore normal, if you see a small pool of water under your vehicle
Re-circulation Mode (Re-circulation mode switch ON)
Graphic
To set the HVAC system to recirculation mode, press the recirculation mode button. The LED on the button illuminates, indicating the recirculation mode is active. In this intake mode, the air from inside the passenger compartment will be sucked by the blower and utilized further to ventilate /cool / heat the cabin.
For quick cabin cooling/heating or while driving through dusty/polluted region, re-circulation mode can be selected for short periods. Driving with this mode active, may lead to better fuel economy and longer HVAC filter life. However, running the air conditioner in re-circulation mode for long will make cabin air too dry and oxygen level drops inside cabin the turning the air stale. On the contrary, keeping air intake control in recirculation mode for long, with air conditioner switched OFF, will make cabin air too humid and windshield and window are more likely to become foggy. Hence, never drive in recirculation mode for long, shift back to fresh air mode intermittently.
Never keep recirculation mode selected continuously for long period. Prolonged use of the HVAC system in recirculation mode may cause windshield/windows to mist/fog-up, impairing visibility which can lead to an accident, endangering you and others.
Fresh Air Mode (Re-Circulation Mode Switch Off)
Graphic
To set the HVAC system to fresh air mode, press the re-circulation mode button again. The LED on this button switches OFF, indicating that fresh air mode is active. In this intake mode, fresh air from outside the vehicle is sucked by the blower and utilized further to ventilate /cool / heat the cabin.
Rear AC switch
Rear AC Switch is used to turn ON/OFF the Rear AC blower.
Rear AC blower can be turned ON only when the Rear AC switch is turned ON
Graphic
Air Distribution/Mode switches
The air flowing out of various vents can be controlled by the air distribution/mode switches.
•  Face Mode — When face mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the Center vents, second row vents and side vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the face of the passengers
Graphic
•  Face-Foot Mode — When Face-Foot mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the Center vents, second row vents, Foot vents and side vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards both the face and feet of passengers at the same time
Graphic
•  Foot Mode — When foot mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the two foot vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of passengers seated on front seats
Graphic
•  Foot and Front Defogger Mode — When foot and front defogger mode switch is pressed air is discharged from the foot vents, side defogger vents and windshield defogger vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of passengers while de-misting/defogging.
Graphic
•  Front Defogger Mode — When Front Defogger mode switch is pressed air is discharged from the side defogger vents and windshield defogger vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the front windshield to ensure de-misting / defogging.
Graphic
Rear Defogger Switch
Graphic
Rear defogger switch is located on the ETC control panel. Press the switch once to activate the rear defogger. The LED on the switch illuminates upon activation and the rear defogger heats the rear windshield clearing the fog / mist. Switch OFF the rear defogger by pressing the switch once as soon as the fog / mist is cleared.
If the rear defogger switch is not switched OFF manually, it will turn OFF automatically after a pre-defined time, based on ambient temperature. If you want to switch the rear defogger ON again, press the rear defogger switch again.
On second and subsequent activations of the rear defogger in the same ignition cycle, the rear defogger ON time will be half the duration of the first activation.
9.3.3  Dual Automatic Temperature Control (if equipped)
Graphic
A
Co–Driver Temp control Knob
H
A/C ON Switch
B
Front defogger switch
I
OFF switch
C
Rear Defogger switch
J
Rear A/C switch
D
Blower speed control Switches
K
MAX A/C Switch
E
Auto Mode Switch
L
Mode Switch
F
Recirculation Mode Switch
M
Dual mode switch
G
Driver temp control knob
   
Graphic
Below mentioned switches/knobs in DATC control panel is pressed/Rotated, respective icons and changes are displayed in the infotainment screen.
Blower speed control switches
Graphic
You can adjust the airflow by Pressing the Blower speed control switches with ignition ON. If you adjust the airflow using blower speed control switches in AUTO mode, the AUTO indicator on Infotainment screen goes off and the operation mode is changed to the manual mode.
Blower speed can be increased by pressing the blower speed '+' switch and blower speed can be decreased by pressing the blower speed '-' switch.
The air conditioner does not operate by directly pressing the blower speed control switches if the A/C switch is not pressed. However, the air flows due to the fan operation.
AUTO switch
Graphic
If you press the AUTO switch with AC ON, AUTO indicator appears on Infotainment screen and the set temperature is maintained while the airflow and air distribution are automatically controlled.
The indicator lamp lights up while AUTO switch is operating, and the lamp turns off when the AUTO switch is turned OFF.
Front Defogger switch
Graphic
Use this switch for quick defogging with the engine ON.
When you press this switch, its indicator lamp turns ON, and the airflow direction is changed to the windshield and door glasses while outside air comes in with A/C operation.
At this time A/C, front defogger and Fresh air indicators shows up in the Infotainment screen. If you press the switch again, front defogging stops with the indicator lamp turns off and the mode returns to the previous operation. While the front defogger switch is operating, its indicator lamp turns ON and the lamp turns off when the front defogger mode switch is turned ON.
OFF switch
Graphic
You can turn off the Dual automatic Temperature controller (DATC) by using this switch.
Co–Driver temperature control knob
Graphic
To adjust the co-driver side temperature as desired, rotate the co-driver temperature control knob while the AC is ON. The temperature decreases, when the co-driver temperature control knob is rotated in anticlockwise direction & Temperature increases, when the co-driver temperature control knob is rotated in clockwise direction.
The co-driver set temperature is visible on the infotainment screen
When co-driver temperature knob is rotated, Dual mode automatically Turns ON.
When the DUAL mode switch is turned off, the passenger temperature returns to the driver side set temperature.
Recirculation mode switch
Graphic
If you press this switch with AC ON, the indication lamp lights turn up and the air recirculation indicator on Infotainment display is displayed. If you press this switch again, the indication lamp turns off and the air source selection is changed to Fresh air intake mode.
Do not use recirculation mode in the vehicle for extended periods of time with every window closed. Doing so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due to lack of oxygen
If exhaust gas comes in, there is a danger of carbon monoxide poisoning. Set to the fresh air intake mode after passing through a dusty or polluted area with air recirculation mode in operation.
Automatic selection of the fresh or air circulation mode
When the front defogger switch is pressed, outside air automatically comes in. When the switch is pressed again, the previous mode is restored.
DUAL switch
Graphic
This function allows controlling the Co-Driver side temperature separately with engine ON.
•  If you press the DUAL mode switch, the indicator lamp lights up and DUAL mode indicator on the infotainment displays comes on
•  When the driver temperature control knob is rotated, the driver side temperature on the infotainment display is adjusted as desired and when co-driver temperature control knob is rotated, co-driver side temperature on the infotainment display is adjusted as desired
•  While the DUAL mode switch is operating, its indicator lamp turns ON and the lamp turns off when the DUAL mode switch is turned OFF.
When the DUAL mode switch is turned off, the passenger temperature returns to the driver side set temperature.
Mode switch
Each time you press this switch with IGN ON, the air distribution mode is changed and displayed as shown in the figure below.
When you press this switch in AUTO mode (AUTO indicator ON), the system is changed to the manual control mode (AUTO indicator OFF).
Graphic
Graphic
Face-Mode
Graphic
Foot-Mode
Graphic
Face/Foot-Mode
Graphic
Foot/Defogger-Mode
When choosing foot mode, some air flows out from windshield defogger vents , Side defogger vents and side vents.
Driver temperature control knob
To adjust the temperature as desired, rotate the driver side temperature control knob
The temperature decreases, when the driver temperature control knob is rotated in anti-clockwise direction & temperature increases, when the driver temperature control knob is rotated in clockwise direction
Graphic
A/C Switch
Graphic
Air conditioner is turned ON and OFF with this switch. While air conditioner switch is operating, its indicator lamp lights up, and the lamp turns off when the AC is OFF.
Rear A/C switch
Rear AC Switch is used to turn ON/OFF the Rear AC blower.
Rear AC blower can be turned ON only when the Rear AC switch is turned ON
Graphic
MAX A/C switch
Graphic
MAX AC mode can be used to attain MAX cooling in a short period of time.
When MAX AC switch is pressed
1. In cabin temperature is set to minimum
2. Blower fan speed is set to Max
3. Air intake mode is set to recirculation mode
4. Air distribution mode is set to Face mode
Rear Defogger Switch
Graphic
Rear defogger switch is located on the DATC control panel. Press the switch once to activate the rear defogger. The LED on the switch illuminates upon activation and the rear defogger heats the rear windshield clearing the fog / mist. Switch OFF the rear defogger by pressing the switch once as soon as the fog / mist is cleared.
If the rear defogger switch is not switched OFF manually, it will turn OFF automatically after a pre-defined time, based on ambient temperature. If you want to switch the rear defogger ON again, press the rear defogger switch again.
On second and subsequent activations of the rear defogger in the same ignition cycle, the rear defogger ON time will be half the duration of the first activation.
9.3.4 DATC – Auto Operation Mode
Graphic
1
Co–driver Temp Control Knob
3
Driver Temp Control Knob
2
Auto Indicator ON
   
Use only when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO switch.
2. AUTO indicator is displayed on the Infotainment Screen.
3. Set the desired cabin temperature with the temperature control knob.
4. The temperature of the passenger compartment is automatically maintained according to the set temperature.
5. If the driver and co-driver require different temperatures in their respective zones, the same can be done by pressing the dual mode Switch and subsequently, setting different temperatures using temperature control.
When you use the blower speed control switches, mode switch (air source selection switch) or defogger switch during the auto operation mode, AUTO indicator on the display goes out and the air conditioner system can be controlled manually.
9.3.5 DATC – Manual Operation Mode
Graphic
1
Co–driver Temp Control Knob
4
Recirculation Mode Switch
2
Mode Switch
5
Driver Temp Control Knob
3
Blower Control Speed Switch
   
Use only when the engine is running.
1. Press AC ON switch
2. Set the desired temperature by rotating the temperature control knob
3. Adjust the blower speed by pressing the blower speed control switches
4. Select the air flow by pressing the air distribution/mode switch
5. Select the air source mode by pressing recirculation mode switch
In manual mode, the AUTO indicator on display does not come on and you can manually adjust the climate conditions by controlling the temperature, blower speed, mode (air distribution), A/C, air source selection, and DUAL temp. selection control switches.
To activate the auto operation mode, press AUTO switch.
9.3.6 DATC – Climate Control Through Infotainment Screen
Climate Control Setting also can be done through infotainment screen.
Graphic
•  Go to setting page in infotainment Screen then select climate control.
•  Under Climate control screen select Climate icon
•  All HVAC setting can be changed by pressing respective symbols or buttons in climate screen
Graphic
Graphic
9.3.7 Remote Cooling
Graphic
Remote cooling feature allows user to control Cabin climate settings from outside the vehicle.
•  During remote cooling operation , Cabin temperature settings will be changed to default 18 deg C in Auto mode for both driver and co-driver to achieve faster cooling.
•  Vehicle cabin will be cooled down before entering vehicle. Thus, making cabin more comfortable for the passengers when they enter the car that was parked in the hot sun
Activate Remote Cooling feature
Graphic
Remote cooling starts by automatically once we press "start engine" button in the Adrenox connect mobile App
In Automatic transmission vehicle
•  All Doors closed
•  Gear is in PARK position
•  Fuel level is greater than 10 liters
•  Vehicle should be in Standstill
In Manual transmission (with EPB) vehicle
•  All Doors closed
•  EPB is Engaged
•  Fuel level is greater than 10 liters
•  Vehicle should be in Standstill
•  Gear is in Neutral
Graphic
When vehicle is started remotely using Adrenox connect mobile App, By default Cabin climate settings will be changed to 18 deg C in Auto mode.
In remote Engine start condition user will have access to control below Cabin climate setting under Climate settings
1. Duration time : User can select the time duration for which remote cooling will be active using Adrenox connect mobile App, Duration can be selected from minimum of 2 mins to maximum of 15 mins.
2. Cabin Temperature settings: User can change temperature settings during Remote cooling
3. Front defrost: User can Activate /De-activate front defrost during remote cooling by selecting front defrost option in mobile app
4. Rear Defrost: User can Activate /De-activate Rear defrost during remote cooling by selecting Rear defrost option in Adrenox connect mobile App,
Once vehicle is started remotely customer will get feedback in the Adrenox connect mobile App,
Graphic
Remote cooling can be De-activated by using Mobile App. if vehicle is already in Remote start condition by Pressing start engine button, Remote cooling will be deactivated.
In Mobile App customer will get notification if Remote cooling is failed.
Remote cooling operation is suggested to be used while vehicle is parked in open sunny area for long duration. It is recommended not to operate Remote cooling when vehicle is parked in a closed environment.
9.3.8 Rear AC Control
Third Row Blower Speed Control
Rear blower speed control knob is provided below the third row (RH) vent to control the air flow to the third-row vents.
Graphic
The third row AC is switched ON by the Rear AC button on the DATC/ETC Control panel . The airflow is controlled by the rear ac blower speed control knob on the third row RH side trim.
9.3.9 Rapid Cabin Cooling
Rapid Cabin Cooling In DATC
For rapid cooling of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:
•  Make sure that all the windows are fully closed
•  Fully open the vents and adjust Louvres to direct air toward face
•  Turn ON AC
•  Press MAX AC Switch
Rapid Cabin Cooling In ETC
For rapid cooling of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:
•  Make sure that all the windows are fully closed
•  Set the blower to maximum speed
•  Fully open the vents and adjust Louvres to direct air toward face
•  Set the air distribution control to face mode
•  Set air intake control to recirculation mode
•  Turn the air conditioner ON
•  Set the temperature control knob to extreme left (coolest) position
For faster cabin cooling, you can select re-circulated air intake mode initially. Once passenger compartment reaches a comfortable temperature, shift to fresh air mode. Also blower speed and temperature control knob can be re-adjusted as desired.
If your vehicle was parked in the hot sun with all the windows closed, drive the vehicle with windows open for the first few minutes. This will help in venting the hot interior air out and allow the air conditioner to cool the cabin quickly. In case you are leaving the vehicle parked in sun frequently then activate the Active Cooling Option.
9.3.10 Rapid Cabin Heating
For rapid heating of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:
1. Make sure that all the windows are fully closed.
2. Set the blower to maximum speed.
3. Set the air distribution control to foot mode.
4. Set air intake control to recirculation mode.
5. Set the temperature control knob to extreme right (hot) position.
6. For de-humidified heating, switch the air conditioner ON. So on rainy conditions if the heater is ON then also keep the AC ON.
For faster cabin heating, you can select re-circulated air intake mode initially. Once passenger compartment reaches a comfortable temperature, blower speed and temperature control knob can be re-adjusted as desired.
In extreme cold weather conditions, the engine coolant takes time to get heated up. Hence, it might take a while for hot air discharge, even when blower is running and temperature control dial is set to hot position.
9.3.11 Points to Remember
•  For quickly defogging/de-misting outside of front windshield, it is advisable to operate the windshield wiper/washer for few times intermittently
•  If snow has deposited on windshield, use ice scraper to remove ice deposited before using wiper
•  In freezing weather, warm the front windshield with the defogger before using the windshield washer. Also use a washer fluid having anti-freezing properties. These will help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on your windshield
•  Dirty/contaminated windshield would make misting / fogging-up worse. Always keep the inside and outside of windshield clean
•  Reduced air flow because of clogged HVAC filter or any other obstructions in air flow path may lead to inadequate defogging/de-misting performance. If air flow seems to have considerably reduced, get the filter cleaned or replaced immediately. Air flow path should be kept free of obstructions
•  Reduced cooling performance from air conditioner may lead to inadequate defogging/de-misting. If cooling effect seems to have dropped considerably, get the air conditioning system checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
Your vehicle is equipped with a HVAC filter. If the AC performance is considerably low, it is recommended to have the HVAC filter checked at the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Keep in mind that a choked filter will also lead to poor cooling.
Never operate HVAC system with the filter removed. This may result in premature failure of system components.
9.4 Surround View System (If equipped)
Surround View System assists in parking and low speed maneuvering by providing views of vehicle’s surroundings with the help of 4 cameras located in the front grille, in the tailgate applique and on both exterior mirrors.
When driver activates SVS by switch while driving forward above 15 km/h vehicle speed , it assists by providing rear surroundings view.
Before using the system, Make sure that the camera lenses are clean and not covered by any dust or other obstructions that may impair the system.
Disclaimer
•  The cameras in Surround View System provide only the view and do not detect or alarm if any obstacles are in the view. Driver must check for the surrounding for any possible collisions with obstacles.
•  There is a noticeable blind area of about 20cm where the cameras cannot see around the periphery of the vehicle. Driver must be careful to check for any obstacles in the blind areas.
•  Surround View System provides the views by stitching the views from the four cameras with respect to their geometric orientations. If the position or the installation angle of any of the camera is changed e.g. after a collision, then do not use the feature for safety reasons as the image stitching may not be correct.
•  If the exterior mirror is folded or out of place then image stitching may not be correct.
•  Use the Surround View System only when all the doors and the tailgate are closed.
•  The area around the vehicle is shown using the camera images and the car image is a standard graphic shown by the system. Hence the car image shown on the screen is not real and may not represent your actual vehicle.
•  Objects and obstacles above the camera height or out of the field of view of the cameras are not displayed.
•  Camera lenses distort the actual view surroundings to capture more coverage. The objects appear are altered and may not be dimensionally same as real as on the screen.
•  The accuracy of the orientation decreases when the vehicle is raised/lowered based on the occupant’s weight.
The display screen shows the direction in which the rear of the vehicle is travelling when showing rear view. The front of the vehicle swings out more than the rear of the vehicle. Maintain sufficient distance to the obstacles so that the exterior mirrors or the corners of the vehicle does not collide with any obstacles.
9.4.1 SVS Activation and Deactivation
Use any of the following methods to activate SVS
•  Press SVS Hard Switch on center fascia switch bank.
Graphic
• 
Graphic
Select “Surround View” Icon from Infotainment screen.
•  System activates when the engine is running and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position regardless of vehicle speed or switch position.
SVS deactivates when one of the following action is performed
Graphic
•  Driver presses “Close button” in Infotainment screen.
•  When SVS hard switch is pressed again.
•  When driver activates SVS through Reverse gear or at lower speeds (< 15 km/h) then SVS display goes off if vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h while driving forward.
When reverse gear is engaged, SVS cannot be deactivated by SVS hard switch press.
SVS is a supplementary driving assist function. Always check the vehicle's surroundings for safety. Do not solely rely on what is displayed on the screen. What you see on the screen may differ from the actual vehicle's location.
9.4.2 SVS Views
SVS provides different Views, Drive blind spot view monitor, Video Recording, Parking Guidelines, Parking Assistance etc. to assist the driver. In certain views, you can rotate 3D surroundings. Refer below sections on how to use each function
How to select Views
•  To display the icon bar, touch the notch in top middle of screen.
•  Touch an icon 1-8 to select a desired view.
• 
Graphic
To select 3D surroundings view, first press Icon and then desired view.
When you touch car model in the bird’s eye view area, an oval will appear with 8 camera icons to switch different 3D views.
Graphic
•  Swipe your finger drawing an oval shape to view complete 360 degree surroundings or you can swipe clockwise / anticlockwise in top/bottom area of screen to view the 3D surroundings.
3D Surroundings View will not be available at vehicle speed above 15 km/h
Graphic
Oval in bird’s eye view will be automatically hidden after 8 second of no operation.
Sl. No
Icons
Description
1.
Graphic
This view assists you with front surroundings view for maneuvering in front of the vehicle.
2.
Graphic
This view assists you with front surroundings view for maneuvering in rear of the vehicle.
3.
Graphic
This view helps you with left side view near the front tire when parking.
4.
Graphic
This view helps you with right side view near the front tire when parking.
5.
Graphic
This view helps you to see the objects closer to rear bumper.
6.
Graphic
This view helps you to see the objects closer to front bumper.
7.
Graphic
In these views, you can see the areas surrounding the vehicle in 3D.
8.
Graphic
You can have each camera wider view (almost 180 degree view) by pressing this icon which helps in crossing junctions.
Also When you are in 3D surroundings mode , you can have 3D surroundings in full screen view by pressing this icon.
you can exit full screen view by touching icon.
9.
Refer Image No: W62K47
This view is bird’s eye view / 2D top view which gives top down view of vehicle surrounding by stitching all four camera images.
10.
Refer Image No: W62K47
When you touch this area, front surroundings view will be seen in the left screen area
11.
When you touch this area, rear surroundings will be seen in the left screen area
12.
When you touch this area, left surroundings will be seen in the left screen area
13.
When you touch this area, right surroundings will be seen in the left screen area
14.
Graphic
You can view SVS settings option using this Icon.
15.
Graphic
You can capture screen shot of Infotainment screen using this Icon.
Default View Selection
You can select 2D or 3D as default view and when you activate SVS , it shows 2D or 3D surroundings view based on your selection.
If you select 2D view, you can select Normal or Wide View as default view to be shown whenever you activate SVS.
Graphic
To select default view, touch SVS Settings icon and then touch
Graphic
Automatic Side View
Graphic
Touch SVS settings icon and enable Automatic Side View. You can see left/right 3D view in Infotainment when left/right turn indicator is activated in forward /D gear.
A pop-up message on the screen appears
When:
- The tailgate is opened.
- The driver's door is opened.
- The passenger's door is opened.
Surround view system displays the combined images from the four cameras. Therefore, the displayed image may be different from the actual vehicle position and parking guideline, etc. Make sure that no persons or animals or any objects/materials are in the maneuvering area. Pay attention and ensure safety before maneuvering the car.
Transparent Bottom View (If equipped)
When you touch on SVS car in bird’s eye view, SVS car changes to semi-transparent and view beneath the ground (Transparent Bottom View) will be visible once the vehicle starts moving as lane marking under vehicle bottom is visible in below image.
Graphic
Until the vehicle moves, the bottom portion is shown as black opaque box
Touch again on SVS car in bird’s eye view to revert to opaque car model.
Transparent Bottom View will not be available at vehicle speed above 15 km/h
Transparent bottom view is based on image stored in the memory based on past few image frames taken some time back and doesn’t display live feed. Pay attention and ensure safety before maneuvering the car.
9.4.3 Static & Dynamic Guidelines
Disclaimer
Static and dynamic guidelines can be used as references only and may differ if camera orientation is altered due to passenger occupancy.
Graphic
Dynamic Guidelines indicate the path the vehicle will traverse with the current steering angle.
•  Static Guidelines indicate the placement of the vehicle with respect to the parking slot.
•  During parking, you can compare the Static guidelines against the Parking Slot Lines to know if your vehicle placement is in line with the parking slot lines.
•  Color coding (Red,Yellow,Green) on the static lines help in assessing the distance of the obstacles [at the ground plane] from the vehicle’s boundary.
Graphic
•  Dynamic Guidelines Orange indicate the path the vehicle will traverse with the current steering angle.
You can select from settings to have parking guidelines (Static and Dynamic) in 2D or/and 3D Views.
9.4.4 Parallel and Vertical (Perpendicular) Parking Assistance
Disclaimer
Parallel and Perpendicular Parking are only assistance and driver should take care of surrounding for collisions.
A. Vertical/Perpendicular Parking
Step 1:Selecting the Perpendicular Parking Mode
Drive ahead of the parking slot so that Camera can have the parking slot view.
•  It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking area to park car safely.
Graphic
Graphic
Choose Vertical Parking icon from SVS settings. Below overlays (Ref Img No: W62K54) will appear on either side.
Step 2: Keeping the Vehicle Ready for parking
•  Move the vehicle either forward or backward so that the end point of the shortest arc [either blue or green, based on the side in which the vehicle will be parked], is coinciding with the parking slot line. (Blue arc line as shown in the image Ref. Img. No. W62K54)
•  Once it is done, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking slot, till the rack end/extreme end move of steering wheel.
Step 3: Parking the Vehicle
•  Start Reversing the vehicle until the static lines are parallel to the parking slot lines. Then, keep the steering straight, and reverse car until the vehicle is in final position in the slot. Parking is Complete
•  Steering will be straight if both dynamic and static lines are overlapping
Graphic
•  In the below image (Ref Img. No. W62K55) vehicle is in line with the parking slot lines, so at this instance, the steering should be made straight.
B. Parallel Parking
Step 1: Choose the Parallel Parking Mode
•  Drive ahead of the parking slot, so that Camera can have the parking slot view and choose Parallel parking icon
Graphic
from settings.
Graphic
Two green rectangular boxes will appear on either side as below image (Ref Img. No. W62K56).
Step 2: Keeping the Vehicle Ready for parking
•  Move the vehicle forward or backward, so that the one of the rectangular box is placed inside the parking slot
•  Make sure there are no obstacles in the green parking slot after orange pole.
•  Turn the steering wheel in the direction in which parking is intended.
Step 3: Park the Vehicle
•  Hold the steering in the current position once selecting the parking area after turning the steering wheel as the area color turns green as in below image screens.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
•  Now start reversing the vehicle. An arc will appear on the screen as below image(Ref Img. No. W62K60). Stop reversing the vehicle when the arc touches the end of parking Slot
Graphic
•  Now turn the steering in the opposite direction until the rack end/ extreme end move of steering wheel [i.e full rotation] and start reversing the vehicle. Below screen(Ref Img. No. W62K61) will appear.
•  Continue reversing the vehicle until the static lines are parallel to the parking slot lines. Then, keep the steering straight, and keep reversing the vehicle until the vehicle is in final position in the slot. Parking is Complete
Graphic
•  Steering will be straight as below (Ref Img. No. W62K62) if both dynamic and static lines are overlapping.
9.4.5 Blind-Spot View Monitor
Blind-Spot View Monitor displays the driver's and passenger's side rear view area including some blind area which cannot be viewed from rear view mirror.
To activate the BVM, select Blind View Monitor from Instrument Cluster Settings.
When the left/right turn indicator is activated, respective video feed (left/right BVM) will be displayed in Instrument Cluster.
Left Side
Right Side
Graphic
Graphic
To turn off BVM, deactivate turn indicator.
Other Instrument Cluster warning messages and screens takes priority over BVM hence BVM may not be available always when you activate it.
BVM view may not be visible clearly during night time due to camera limitations.
BVM is only view and may not detect, alert or control if any vehicles in blind area. Like all assistance function, BVM has limitations. Sole-reliance on the system may result in a collision.
Objects are closer than they appear. Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change the lane before doing so may result in crash and serious injury or death.
9.4.6 Drive Video Recording (If equipped)
The cameras installed on the vehicle body record the video of the vehicle surroundings during driving which can be used for fault diagnosis, accident evidence identification and to capture special event during driving.
SD card is used to store the recorded video.
When there is no SD card, system shows “No SD card” text.
General and Emergency Recording
When the engine is started, video recording starts and files are saved in “General Video” folder inside DVR interface.
In General Video Folder, the old recording files will be overwritten cyclically to keep the latest recordings.
It will be disabled in setting or if already in DVR screen it will come out when vehicle speed > 5 kmph or Blind View Monitor is ON or Vehicle is in Reverse Gear.
You can record special event during driving by SVS hard switch long press (approximately 4 seconds). These videos are saved in “Emergency Video” folder inside DVR interface.
Emergency Video Recording
Videos of deployed crash, Automatic Emergency Braking events etc. are also saved in “Emergency Video” folder inside DVR interface.
Emergency Videos will be recorded and saved in memory when the conditions met and battery connection is intact and not disturbed by any means.
Video clips stored in the Emergency Folder can’t be overwritten and can be deleted by user only..
How to access DVR screen
Open SVS settings and touch the "Drive Video Recording" icon to access the DVR function.
Below screen appears with “Live View”.
Graphic
A: General Video
B: Emergency Video
Under the DVR display interface, click "Back" icon to exit the DVR screen.
The recording mark and recording time appear on the “Live View” screen when a video is getting recorded.
"Live View" can be accessed even if there is no SD card.
Video Playback
•  Under DVR interface, click "Emergency Video" folder or "General Video" folder to replay any video file.
•  Saved video file name is as per date and time of recorded video. Video files are saved with .AVI file extension.
Eg. File Name - 20151203_163028.AVI
20151203 - YYYYMMDD (Y-Year, M-Month, D-Day)
163028 - HHMMSS (H-Hour,M-Minute, S-Second)
•  Click the “edit” button to delete/move video files.
Current recording will get paused during video playback.
Graphic
Playback and editing interface show as below:
Graphic
1: To close a video
2: To replay previous video
3: To play video fast backward
4: Pause/play
5: To play video slow forward
6: To replay next video
DVR Settings
Graphic
•  In DVR mode, click setting button to enter the setting interface.
•  Video length setting: DVR video clip recording time can be selected as 3 minutes or 5 minutes based on settings.
When memory is full, System shows a text message for user to delete files.
9.4.7 SVS Troubleshooting
•  When there is any error in system/camera lost connection, the corresponding camera view on screen shows green color with an icon indicating camera error. Visit nearest Mahindra Service Center for assistance.
•  In case of malfunction , system shows a pop-up message "Please Contact Service Center"
9.4.8 System Limitations
•  Surround View System is subject to certain system limitation and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:
-During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
-At night or in very dark places.
-Display may get flicker, if the area around cameras area is lit by LED or fluorescent lighting.
-If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot areas.
-If your vehicle got damaged and if any camera position and the settings got changed.
-When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres in front of the camera lens..
-When the head lights are not bright due to dirt on the lens of if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
-When strong light rays falls on the camera. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise of sunset).
-When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge).
•  Video may get blur if camera is exposed to bright light and area around is dark/shadowed.
•  SVS Camera images are reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing and stitching.
•  Sometimes during SVS activation , you may not see stable video feed as some parameters update happens.
•  When SVS is used in the area with AC light sources , black bands might be seen running in the video feed.
•  If video file is corrupted , you may observe black screen while replaying the video and system will reset to default view.
•  During video playback, you may observe green screen sometimes.
•  DVR may not record properly if the power is interrupted in between of usage. e.g during crash, low battery, removal of battery and other reasons.
•  Use SD card as fresh and formatted before first use and do not swap SD cards frequently.
•  SVS is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective.
•  Avoid using SVS if you are having eye color blindness or impaired color vision.
•  Objects above the ground or hanged may appear to be far away than they are. But in reality, objects shall be closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments and increase the risk of collision with your car.
•  SVS video is shown based on driver activation but it cannot be used to see a complete surrounding view which cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior and interior view mirrors.
•  Some obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult recognize due to stitched images, hence sole-reliance on the system may result in a collision.
System Maintenance
•  Always keep all camera lens clean. Foreign materials on the camera lens can cause system error and reduced visibility.
•  Always use clean water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens
•  Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the cameras with a power washer.
•  When SVS parts need to be replaced due to damage/ non-functioning / any other reason or abnormal video with "No Panoramic Calibration" text , Visit nearest Mahindra Service Center for recalibration.
•  Always clean camera lens smoothly and don’t apply much pressure.
10 EMERGENCIES
10.1 Hazard Warning Flashers
Graphic
The hazard warning flasher button is in the central bezel switch bank. Press the button to turn ON the hazard warning flashers, all directional turn signals will flash to warn oncoming traffic.
This is an emergency warning system and should be used only when there is an emergency. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is a safety hazard for other motorists. Hazard warning flasher will work in all positions of the ignition key and even when the vehicle is fully locked.
With extended use, the hazard warning flasher may drain your vehicle battery.
10.2 Towing
Tow hook is a screw on type, and it is available in the tool kit organizer behind the rear seats on the floor.
Front Tow Hook
Rear Tow Hook
Graphic
Graphic
Remove/pry out the tow hook cover in the Front/Rear bumper using a screwdriver, Screw in the tow eye in the anti-clockwise direction (tow eye is LH threaded) by holding the cover and tighten. Fasten a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles to the towing hook.
The rear tow hook should be used when your vehicle is utilized for towing other vehicles.
If your vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service. If a towing service is unavailable in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a towing cable or chain.
10.2.1 Towing Equipment
Towing Option
2WD
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the Ground
All Wheel Drive Models
Flat Bed Towing
ü
On Trailer
ALL
ü
Flat Towing
O
Flat Tow
NONE
O
Sling Type Towing (Front Wheel Lift)
ü
Dolly Tow
Front
O
Sling Type Towing (Rear Wheel Lift)
O
REAR
O
Towing equipment are of two types:
Sling-type equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on both ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame or suspension and lift the end of the vehicle off the ground. This is not a good method of towing as it may damage the vehicle's suspension and body. Avoid a tow with sling type equipment
Flat-bed equipment - Your vehicle is loaded on the back of a truck. This is the safest and best way of towing
Graphic
10.3 Emergency Assistance
In case of emergencies, driver/customer can follow the below steps to connect with our Emergency assistance service either from the car or through mobile phone.
Graphic
Graphic
10.4 Vehicle Does Not Start - Checks
Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the correct starting procedure and that you have sufficient fuel.
If the engine is not cranking or is cranking too slowly / intermittently
1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are firmly fastened, switch ON the interior lamps.
3. If the lamps do not illuminate, glow dim or go OFF when the starter is cranked, then it indicates a weak or discharged battery. Try jumpstarting. Follow ‘jump starting’ instructions given later in this chapter.
4. Check the fuses in the Engine Compartment Fuse Box and Instrument Panel Fuse Box.
If the engine cranks normally, but does not start
If the engine is cranking normally, but if the engine does not start even after repeated cranking, Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine stalls while driving
•  Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
•  Turn ON your hazard warning flashers and check for any malfunction lamps in the instrument cluster.
•  Turn the ignition OFF, wait for approximately 90 seconds and try starting the engine again.
•  . If the vehicle still does not start, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
If the engine stalls while running, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be much harder than usual.
If the engine speed does not increase
•  If the engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem in the Engine Management System, electrical or electronic controls.
•  In case of certain faults, the engine may go to limp home mode, which is indicated by the check engine lamp.
•  Have your vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as possible.
10.5 Engine Overheating
If the temperature gauge moves beyond the normal operating range toward “H” mark. it indicates the engine overheating that may damage the engine.
When the engine overheats, the Engine Management System reduces engine power substantially and may even shut the engine OFF; it is dangerous to continue driving when the engine has overheated. You need to first cool the engine down before starting to drive again.
Follow the below instructions to cool the engine down:
•  Progressively reduce the vehicle speed and bring the vehicle to a stop at the side of the road
•  Turn ON the hazard warning flashers
•  Keep the engine running at idle
•  Engage the parking brake
•  Switch off the air conditioner
•  Wait till the engine coolant temperature drops sufficiently such that the temperature gauge is around halfway between C and H
Now switch the engine OFF and carefully open the bonnet/hood to visibly inspect the engine cooling system parts. Be cautious while doing an inspection as vehicle parts will still be too hot. Verify that the engine coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is maintained between the 'Min' and 'Max' mark. Check for possible fluid leakages. Check for damages to heat exchangers and connecting hoses. Also verify that the radiator shrouds, cooling fan blades and the engine belt all are in good condition.
If any evidence of failure is observed, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for help. In case, no system leakage/ failure is suspected, driving can be continued.
Either due to severe operating conditions or due to any system leakages or failures, the engine can get overheated. However, if the engine is getting overheated repeatedly, even in normal operating conditions, get the vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to the 'High Engine Coolant Temperature' section under the 'Instrument cluster features' chapter for details.
If the high engine coolant temperature warning is ignored, the engine shuts OFF abruptly to safeguard engine components from overheating and consequent failure. Abrupt engine shut-off can lead to uncontrollable driving condition and accidents.
Stay clear of hot and rotating vehicle parts while visually inspecting the vehicle. The coolant inside the cooling system is under high pressure and temperature. Never open the pressure cap of the degassing tank when the engine is hot. Not taking precautions may lead to serious injury to your skin/eyes.
For optimum performance of the cooling system, you must maintain the required coolant level and use only recommended engine coolant.
10.6 Jump Starting
Jump start can be performed when the battery charge is low which can be confirmed by performing the following operations:
1. Turn headlamp ON and check whether lights are dim
2. Try to start the vehicle and check whether engine cranks slowly or not crank at all.
3. Open the bonnet and locate the battery.
It may be necessary to remove the disabled vehicle’s battery cables from the battery terminals and clean both cables and terminals. Use a stiff wire brush to remove all corrosion. Reconnect the cables to the battery terminals before jump starting the vehicle.
4. The positive terminal will be marked with a plus sign (+) and will usually have a RED cable attached on it.
5. The negative terminal will be marked with a minus sign (-) and will usually have a BLACK cable attached to it.
6. A standalone booster battery can be used to start the engine when the vehicle battery is low.
7. Take jumper cables and unwind the red and black cables.
8. Wear safety gear and connect one end of red clamp of the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery and other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
9. Similarly, connect one end of black clamp of the jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery and other end to the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery.
10. Once the jump starting assembly is done, crank the engine for starting.
11. Once the vehicle gets started, carefully remove the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment.
12. Disconnect the black clamp of the jumper cable from the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery and the other end of the black clamp from the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery.
13. Similarly, disconnect the red clamp of the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery and the other end of the red clamp from the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
14. Close the bonnet
15. Keep the vehicle's engine running and slightly accelerate the vehicle to charge the battery.
If the problem persists on next starting cycle, please visit Mahindra Authorised Dealer
Graphic
•  Once the vehicle gets started, carefully remove the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment
Make sure none of the cables are dangling into the engine compartment, where they could be exposed to moving parts.
•  Remove the jumper cables once the vehicle starts. Do this in the reverse of the order in which they were attached, and don't let any of the cables or clamps touch each other (or dangle into the engine compartment)
•  Disconnect the black clamp of the jumper cable from the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery
•  Disconnect the other end of the black clamp from the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery
•  Disconnect the red clamp of the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery
•  Disconnect the other end of the red clamp from the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery
Replace any positive (+) red post protective covers if applicable (You have had to remove or open these in the beginning) These covers help prevent accidental short circuiting of the battery
•  Keep the vehicle's engine running. Run the vehicle above idle (slightly revved up with your foot on the accelerator). This should give the battery enough charge to start the vehicle again. If it does not start, either your battery might be dead or faulty alternator.
Improper jump starting procedures can result in battery explosion and acid burn hazard.
Loosely connected battery cables could damage the electronic control units.
To disconnect battery terminals, wait for at least 2 minutes to allow discharge of high voltage or it could lead to personal injury.
While disconnecting, always disconnect the -VE terminal first and while connecting, always connect the -VE terminal last.
Do not connect battery terminals with opposite polarity, it will lead to alternator, Electronic control unit failures.
Towing a vehicle to start could be dangerous. The vehicle being towed could surge forward when the engine starts, causing the two vehicles to collide, injuring the occupants.
Modern vehicles with electronic management systems should not be jump started without ‘protected’ jump starter leads.
10.7 Limp Home Mode
Graphic
Limp Home Mode is an emergency declared by the EMS (Engine Management System) due to failure or malfunction of one/more critical sensors/actuators. In this mode, the EMS (Engine Management System) will revert back to basic minimum requirement (fuel quantity / injection timings) to aid the driver to bring the vehicle back to the nearest workshop. The drivability & fuel consumption will be greatly affected.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or if there is a drop in vehicle performance, there might be a malfunction in the engine management system which triggers/activates the Limp Home Mode. This condition is accompanied by the check engine lamp illuminating in the instrument cluster. In this mode, the vehicle speed is limited, and the accelerator pedal may not function normally. It is recommended you contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately for assistance.
If the above telltale is ON/blinking, It indicates an emergency situation declared by the EMS (Engine Management System) due to failure of one/more critical sensors/actuators and triggers/activates the Limp Home Mode.
10.8 Fuses & Relays
A fuse is electric protection device. A fuse is placed in an electrical circuit, so that when current flow exceeds the rating of the fuse, it blows off. The element in the fuse melts, opening the circuit and preventing other components of the circuit from being damaged by the over current. The size of the metal fuse element determines the rating. Once a fuse blows off, it must be replaced with a new one.
Graphic
Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment OFF before touching or attempting to change a fuse.
Graphic
Fuse puller is available at the engine compartment fuse box .
Fit replacement fuse with the same rating as the one you have removed.
You can identify a blown fuse by a break in the filament. All fuses except high current fuses are push fit. A fuse puller should be used to remove the fuse from its position.
10.8.1 Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Graphic
Graphic
Engine compartment fuse box is located adjacent to vehicle battery. Release the lock to access the fuse box contents. Remove the fuse box cover by pressing the clips from both sides using both hands simultaneously. Spare fuses are provided in the fuse box for replacement of blown fuses. Ensure the correct rating fuse is replaced with the blown fuse.
Graphic
“EF” Fuses (Mini Fuses)
Fuse No.
Circuit
Fuse Rating
F1
EMS Batt 1 (Diesel)
15A
EMS Batt 1 (Petrol)
30A
F2
EMS Batt 2 (Diesel)
10A
VVTIN/EX, VOP, Canister (Petrol)
10A
F3
HFM/FMU/FEED Pump Relay (Diesel)
10A
Ignition Coils (Petrol)
15A
F4
BMS*
5A
F5
Spare
F6
EMS ECU Permanent Batt
5A
F7
Spare
F8
Horn
20A
F9
Head Lamp Batt +ve 1/ DRL RH
10A
F10
Head Lamp Batt +ve 2/ DRL LH
10A
F11
TCU Batt (AT only)
15A
F12
EMS Loads – Relay /WIF/EGR BP (Diesel)
15A
EMS Loads – Lambda/(Petrol)
10A
F13
Brake Lamp (Switch)
10A
Graphic
“EF” Fuses (Mini Fuses)
Fuse No.
Circuit
Fuse Rating
F14
Front Blower
40A
F15
Spare
F16
ABS Valve (ABS ESP)
25A
ABS Valve (ESP EPB)
40A
F17
Spare
F18
ABS Pump
40A
F19
Spare
F20
EMS Main
40A
F21 – F24
Spare
F25
SCR Relay (Diesel)
Intercooler Fan (Petrol)
10A
F26 – 29
Spare
_
F30
AC compressor EVDC
10A
F31
Fuel Pump
20A
F32–F35
Spare
_
F36
Shifter Solenoid (AT Only)
5A
F37
Starter
30A
F38
Glow plug (Diesel Only)
50A
Graphic
“EF” Fuses (Mini Fuses)
Fuse No.
Circuit
Fuse Rating
F39
Main Batt-3
60A
F40
Cooling Fan Low Speed
40A
F41
Main Batt - 2
60A
F42
Main Batt - 4
60A
F43
Main Batt - 1
60A
F44
ABS IGN
5A
F45
TCU IGN (AT Only)
5A
F46
EMS IGN
5A
F47
Water Pump/SCR Relay*(Diesel)
15A
Turbo Rec Valve /IC Fan Relay (Petrol)
10A
F48
NOx (Diesel)
10A
EMS Relay Loads (Petrol)
5A
F49
EPS
125A
F50
Radiator Fan (High Speed)
60A
F51
Alternator
150A
Graphic
Relays
Relay No.
Relay Type
Application Detail
R2
ISO Power Relay (70A)
Cooling Fan High Speed
R3
ISO Power Relay (70A)
Glow Plug (Diesel Only)
R6
Ultra Micro Relay (20A)
Intercooler Fan (Petrol Only)
R8
Ultra Micro Relay (20A)
Shifter Solenoid (AT Only)
R11
Ultra Micro Relay (20A)
Fuel pump
R13
Ultra Micro Relay (20A)
Horn relay
R14
Mini Relay (40A)
EMS main
R15
Mini Relay (40A)
Cooling fan low speed
R16
Mini Relay (40A)
Front blower
R22
ISO Micro Relay (35A)
Starter
R23
Ultra Micro Relay (20A)
AC compressor
R25
Ultra Micro Relay (20A)
SCR (diesel only)
R1,R4, R5, R7, R9, R10, R12, R17, R18, R19, R20, R21, R24, R26 & R27
Spares
10.8.2 Instrument Panel Fuse Box Opening Procedure
Wide open the driver door and slide the driver seat backwards. This fuse box as located below the Instrument Panel on the driver side
Follow the below procedure to access the IP fuse box,
Graphic
•  Partially detach the front RHS side door static panel seal.
Graphic
•  Pull & remove the IP RH side cover.
Graphic
Graphic
•  Using a star screw driver, loosen and remove the IP driver lower trim bottom mounting star screws.
Graphic
Graphic
•  Partially detach the IP driver lower trim assembly.
•  Remove all the electrical connectors from IP driver lower trim and outward the panel to access the Instrument Panel fuse box.
Graphic
Graphic
Fuses
Fuse No.
Circuit
Fuse Rating
F1
Spare
20A
F2
Rear Power Window
30A
F3
Power Window LH
30A
F4
Spare
15A
F5
Accessory Power
25A
F6
Power Window RH
30A
F7
ORVM Switch, WLC
5A
F8
Spare
5A
F9
360 Camera Batt
5A
F10
ITM Batt
15A
F11
Roof Lamp Batt
5A
F12
Spare
10A
F13
Spare
10A
F14
Infotainment Batt
15A
F15
MBFM Batt 5
15A
F16
MBFM Batt 1
25A
F17
MBFM Batt 2
30A
F18
Flush Handle Batt 1
10A
F19
PKE Batt1 / Immo Batt
10A
F20
ICC Batt
5A
F21
IGN - HVAC, Amplifier, Infotainment
5A
F22
IGN - MBFM, Gateway, Cluster, Display
5A
Graphic
Fuses
Fuse No.
Circuit
Fuse Rating
F23
MBFM Batt 4
20A
F24
Skyroof Batt
20A
F25
Gateway Batt
5A
F26
Batt - Cluster Display
7.5A
F27
Pke Batt 2/ Ignition Switch Batt
10A
F28
Batt Power Seat Switch, OBD, HVAC
5A
F29
RLS Batt
5A
F30
Rear Blower Batt
10A
F31
Batt - Key Lock Solenoid AT and ITS
5A
F32
Spare
20A
F33
Flush Handle Batt 2
10A
F34
ESCL Batt
7.5A
F35
Eng Comp IGN
5A
F36
IGN - Airbag
5A
F37
IGN - APAS, 360/RVC, Flush Handle
5A
F38
IGN - WLC, Radar, Windshield Camera
5A
F39
IGN - EPS
5A
F40
IGN - CB Switch, Reverse Lamp MT, DS Switch
7.5A
F41
IGN - PKE/IMMO
5A
F42
IGN - ITM, EPB Switch, Power Seat
5A
F43
IGN - Reverse Lamp AT
10A
Graphic
Fuses
Fuse No.
Circuit
Fuse Rating
F44
ACC - Amp, HVAC, Infotainment
5A
F45
SPARE
25A
F46
ACC - Power Seat Vent
10A
F47
ACC - Rear Power Socket
15A
F48
Front Power USB
5A
F49
ACC - PKE, ICC
5A
F50
Start
5A
F51
MBFM Batt3
25A
F52
Spare
30A
F53
Power Seat Batt
15A
F54
Amplifier Batt
30A
* - if equipped
10.9 Changing a Flat Tyre
In case of a flat tyre during driving, reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place well away from traffic. Park on a level spot with firm ground. Stop the engine and turn ON your hazard warning flashers.
Firmly apply the parking brake. Have everyone come out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.
Never stop your vehicle in a traffic lane to change a tyre. You could be hit by an oncoming vehicle. Keep driving until you reach a safe location.
Lifting a vehicle to change a tyre or perform maintenance is very dangerous if you do not have the requisite tools, safety equipment and training. The jack provided along with the vehicle is to be used only for changing a spare tyre. It is never to be used to perform any other maintenance or repair on the vehicle.
Never place any part of your body under any portion of the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. You could be crushed by the vehicle if it falls off a jack. Keep bystanders away from the vehicle.
Find level, solid ground that is clear of oncoming traffic. If you cannot find a safe place to stop, it is better to drive on a flat tyre and damage the rim than it is to risk being hit by oncoming traffic. After changing a flat Tyre, never store the tyre or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. This loose equipment could strike an occupant in the event of a sudden stop or collision. Store all of these items in the proper place.
The following sections outline the procedure for changing a flat tyre;
10.9.1 Warning Triangle
The warning triangle is a necessary device for your safety.
Graphic
It is placed in the tool kit organizer behind the rear seats on the floor.
When you pull over your vehicle to a safe place, set up a warning triangle behind your vehicle. (Daytime: 100 Meters behind, Night: 200 Meters behind)
When the Vehicle has a Serious Problem during Driving
Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of traffic to a safe place. Set up the warning triangle behind your vehicle (Daytime: 100 Meters, Night: 200 Meters) to warn other vehicles
Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away from the traffic.
When your safety is secured, contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for your emergency service
10.9.2 Tool Kit
The tool kit is placed in the tool kit organizer behind the rear seats on the floor. It consist of jack, Screwdriver (+and-), Jack operating lever, Tow bar, DEO Spanner (10mm x 12mm) and Wheel spanner
Graphic
A
Jack Assembly
B
Wheel Spanner
C
DEO Spanner 10mm x 12mm
D
Diesel Filter water drain Tool*
E
Screwdriver
F
Jack Operating Lever
G
Tow Bar
* – Diesel Variant Only
Jack is located on the tool kit organizer behind the rear seats on the floor. To remove the jack out, follow the process below:
Graphic
Graphic
Lift the Luggage floor Lid as shown in the illustration
Take the jack out from the tool kit organizer
10.9.3 Spare Wheel Removal
Spare wheel is located below the floor at the rear end of the vehicle. It is held in place by a securing nut underneath the rear luggage compartment floor carpet.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Locate the plug covering the securing nut below the rear luggage compartment floor carpet and remove the plug
Graphic
Loosen the securing nut anticlockwise to winch down/lower the secured spare wheel to the ground
Graphic
Graphic
•  Tilt and Remove the securing bracket out of the spare wheel hub
•  Remove/pull away the spare wheel
The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running.
When Using the Temporary Spare Wheel
•  Temporary Spare Wheel provided is specifically designed for your vehicle.
•  Do not use more than one Temporary Spare Wheel simultaneously.
•  Drive the shortest possible distance with Temporary Spare Wheel.
•  While using Temporary spare wheel reduce speed, Avoid sharp cornering, Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.
•  Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a Temporary Spare Wheel is installed on the vehicle.
The temporary Spare Wheel is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
Refer to “Temporary Spare Wheel” section in the Starting and Driving chapter for more details.
The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is smaller in size (T155/90 R18 113M) and for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running.
10.9.4 Wheel Bolt Loosening
Before loosening the wheel bolt, Wheel cover/cap must be removed. To remove the wheel cover, wrap the tip of a screwdriver with cloth, insert it near the lugs of the wheel cover and pry the cover away from the wheel.
Do not try to pry off the wheel cover by hand alone. Take due care in handling the wheel cover to avoid unexpected personal injury.
Graphic
Always loosen the wheel bolts before raising the vehicle. Turn the wheel bolts anti-clockwise to loosen as per the sequence.
To get maximum leverage, fit the spanner to the bolt so that the handle is on the left side. Grab the spanner near the end of the handle and push down on the handle. Be careful that the spanner does not slip off the bolt. Do not remove the bolts but loosen them by one or two turns.
Do not apply force with your legs (or stand) on the wheel spanner while tightening or Loosening the wheel bolts.
Graphic
A: Flat Tyre
B: Chocks Blocks
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up. When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.
10.9.5 Jacking
Graphic
Locate the jack points in the front or rear as needed. They can be identified by a slot used to fit the jack precisely.
Graphic
Position the jack at the correct jacking point. Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid place.
Graphic
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle into the jack. Fit the other end of the lever into the square slot of the wheel spanner and turn it clockwise to expand the jack.
Ensure no one is in the vehicle. Raise it high enough so that the spare tyre can be installed. Remember, you will need more ground clearance when putting on the spare tyre than when removing the flat tyre.
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jacking point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the underbody of vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.
•  Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing
•  When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack
•  Do not raise the jack with someone in the vehicle
•  Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the wheel
•  Follow jacking instructions
•  Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.
Remove the wheel bolts. Lift the flat tyre straight off and place it aside. Roll the spare wheel into position and align the holes in the wheel with the hub. Lift up the wheel and get at least the top bolt inserted through its hole. Wiggle the wheel and press it back for fitting balance bolts.
Before putting on the wheels, remove any corrosion on the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such. Installation of wheels without good metal to metal contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel bolts to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while driving.
Graphic
Reinstall the wheel bolts with the tapered end inward and tighten by hand. Press the wheel inward and tighten the wheel bolts further.
Never use oil or grease on the bolts. Doing so the spanner slips, damaging the bolts and may cause personal injuries. Also, bolts may loosen, and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt, clean before installing wheel bolts.
Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel bolts using the wheel spanner. Turn the jack-operating lever anti-clockwise using the wheel spanner to lower the vehicle, making sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle extension. Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the spanner is securely engaged over the bolt.
Graphic
Tighten each bolt a little at a time in the diagonally opposite order as shown. Repeat the process until all the bolts are tight.
Improperly or loosely tightened wheel bolts are dangerous. The wheel could wobble or come off. This could result in loss of vehicle control and cause a serious accident. Always make sure all the wheel bolts are properly/securely tightened to the specified torque.
When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body and all other persons are clear off the vehicle as it is lowered to the ground. Have the wheel bolts tightened with the torque spanner to 83-104Nm, as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Restore the tools (jack, wheel spanner, Punctured tyre, etc.) in their storage locations.
Graphic
Graphic
Drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tyre pressure, dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage or valve damage.
Remove the centre cap from the alloy wheel before fixing it to the spare wheel location. From the inner side of the wheel, gently tap the cap with the wheel spanner.
11 MAINTENANCE
11.1 Dimensions
Graphic
11.2 Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
ENGINE
Diesel (MT/AT/AWD)
Petrol (MT/AT)
Displacement/Cubic Capacity
2184 cc
1997 cc
Type
4 Stroke, Turbocharged, DI engine
4 Stroke, Gasoline Direct Injection
Compression Ratio
16 ± 0.5: 1
9.5 ± 0.5: 1
Max. Engine Output
114 kW @ 3750 rpm or
136 kW @ 3500 rpm
149.2 kW @ 5000 ± 50 rpm
Max. Torque
360 Nm @ 1500 to 2800 rpm or
420 Nm @ 1600 to 2800 rpm or
450 Nm @ 1750 to 2800 rpm
380 Nm @ 1750 to 3000 rpm
TRANSMISSION
Type
6 Speed Manual/Automatic
No. of Gears
6 Forward, 1 Reverse
STEERING
Type/Description
Column mounted Electric Power Steering
SUSPENSION
Type/Description
Front: Coil Spring with side load compensation on McPherson Strut with Double acting Hydraulic Shock Absorber
Rear: Multi Link Control Blade Suspension with Double acting Hydraulic Shock Absorber & Linear Coil Spring
BRAKES
Service Brake
Hydraulic & Vacuum assisted Booster with ABS (Standard) & with ESP (Optional)
Front/Rear
Disc
Parking Brake
Mechanical Hand Operated (Conventional Type) (or)Electric Parking brake
WHEELS & TYRES
Rim
Regular (Alloy & Steel) –7J X 17”, Optional – 7J X 18”, Spare wheel –4.5J x 18
Tyres
Regular – P235/65 R17, Optional – P235/60 R18, Spare Wheel –T155 /90 R18
Type
Radial Tubeless
Laden Tyre Pressure (Psi)
Front / Rear - 32 (Up to 5 Persons), Front / Rear - 35 (6 Persons to Fully Laden)
Spare Wheel Tyre – 60
FUEL
Fuel Tank Capacity
60 liters
DEF Tank Capacity
20 liters (only for Diesel)
 
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
System Voltage
12V
Battery Rating
90 Ah
11.3 Bulb Specification
Lamp Bulb
Wattage
Bulb Type
No. of Bulbs per Vehicle
Head Lamp - High Beam
12V 55W
H7 55W/LED
2
Head Lamp - Low Beam
12V 55W
H7 55W/LED
2
DRL / Position Lamp
 
LED
Turn Signal Lamp (Front)
12V 24W
PY24W
2
Turn Signal Lamp (Front)
LED
Turn Signal Lamp (Front)
Sequential LED Light blade
Turn Signal Lamp (Rear)
LEDs
Side Turn Indicator Lamp
LEDs
Front Position Lamp
12V 5W
W5W
2
Front Fog Lamp
LEDs
Front Cornering Lamp
LEDs
Rear Position Lamp - Tail gate
LEDs
Rear Position Lamp - Quarter slide
LEDs
Stop Lamp - Body Side
12V 21W
P21W
2
Reverse Lamp
12V 16W
W16W
2
Registration Plate Lamp
LEDs
High Mounted Stop Lamp
LEDs
11.4 General Owner's Information
Your vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day-to-day care is more important to ensure a smooth, trouble-free, safe and economical operation. It is the owner's responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance, including general maintenance service is performed. Note that both the new vehicle limited warranty and emission control system limited warranties specify that proper maintenance and care must be performed. See Warranty and Service Information Guide for complete warranty information.
Where to go for service?
Mahindra technicians are well trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and in dealership training programmes. They learn to work on Mahindra vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than while they are working on it.
You can be confident that your Mahindra Authorised Dealer service department does the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle reliably and economically.
Get the most from your vehicle with routine maintenance: Routine maintenance is the best way to help ensure you get the performance, dependability, long life and better resale value you expect from your vehicle. This is exactly why we've put together this Maintenance Section. It outlines the services required to properly maintain your vehicle and when they should be performed. The focus is on maintaining your vehicle while it's running great, which goes a long way toward preventing major repairs and expenses later.
Here are a few suggestions to help you get started on routine maintenance:
•  Familiarize yourself with your vehicle by going through your Owner's Manual
•  Take a few minutes to review this Maintenance Section
•  Make it a habit to use this manual to record scheduled maintenance in the warranty and Service Information Guide
•  Consult with your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for all your vehicle's needs
Suggestions for Obtaining Service for your Vehicle
Prepare for the Appointment: If you have warranty work to be done, be sure to have the right papers with you. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history.
Prepare a List: Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the Service adviser/Relationship manager know about it.
Be Reasonable with Requests: If your list has several items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the Service adviser/Relationship manager and list the items in order of priority.
Need Assistance? : It is recommended talking to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership.
If an Mahindra Authorised Dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact any Mahindra Customer Care Executive. They would need the following information:
Owner's name and address, owner's telephone number (home and office), Mahindra Authorised Dealer name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), vehicle delivery date and mileage.
Warranty Information: Read the Warranty Information given in the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’ for the terms and provisions of Mahindra warranties applicable to this vehicle. Mahindra genuine parts, fluids, lubricants and accessories are available at any Mahindra Authorised Dealer. They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
Protect your Warranty: Routine maintenance is not only the best way to help keep your vehicle performing as intended, it's also the best way to protect your warranty. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specified in the warranty and Service Information Guide will invalidate warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance. We can't stress enough how important it is to keep records of all maintenance. Damage or failures due to neglect or lack of proper maintenance are not covered under warranty.
Keeping maintenance records is easy with the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’
It's important to document the maintenance of your vehicle. For your convenience to maintain records of service, the scheduled maintenance coupons are provided in the service coupon booklet. Every time you bring your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance, be sure to present this booklet and certify the work. Also record the date of service and mileage at the time of service. This will make record keeping easy and, should your vehicle ever require warranty coverage, you will have all the documentation to show you've properly maintained it.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing: In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic by itself, and does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Your vehicle's oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair.
Chemicals and Additives: Non-Mahindra approved chemicals or additives are not required for factory recommended maintenance. In fact, Mahindra recommends against the use of such additive products unless specifically recommended by Mahindra for a particular application.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features. That's why it's important to rely on your Mahindra Authorised Dealer to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
When planning your maintenance services, consider your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for all your vehicle's needs.
Get the most from your Service and Maintenance visits: Getting your vehicle serviced at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer adds great value to your vehicle in number of ways. Hence, it is recommended to service your vehicle at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer only.
Maintenance Interval: Mahindra establishes recommended maintenance intervals based upon engineering testing to determine the most appropriate mileage to perform the various maintenance services. This protects your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you. Mahindra recommends that you do not deviate from the maintenance schedules presented in this Maintenance Schedule.
Vehicle Self Maintenance - General Precautions
•  Refer to relevant sections of the manual before starting
•  Set the parking brake
•  Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly
•  Turn OFF the engine and remove the key
•  Stay clear of hot vehicle parts
•  Avoid repeated contact with fluids
•  Do not let fuel, coolant and other fluids spill over electrical and hot vehicle parts
•  Keep all open flames and other burning material like cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel-related parts
Do not start/run the engine when any engine/peripheral parts are removed.
11.5 Engine Compartment
Petrol Layout
Graphic
A
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
D
Engine Oil filling Cap
G
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
B
Degassing Tank
E
Engine Oil Dipstick
   
C
Brake Fluid Reservoir
F
Battery
   
Diesel Layout
Graphic
A
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
D
Engine Oil filling Cap
G
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
B
Degassing Tank
E
Engine Oil Dipstick
   
C
Brake Fluid Reservoir
F
Battery
   
11.6 General Maintenance
Exercise extreme caution when the hood is open and engine is ON.
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed frequently. In addition to checking the items listed below, if you notice any unusual noise, fluid leakages, smell or vibration, you should investigate the cause or take your vehicle to your Mahindra Authorised Dealer or a qualified service shop immediately.
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you intend to run the engine.
In the Engine Compartment
•  Front windshield washer fluid level
•  Engine coolant level
•  Battery condition
•  Brake/Clutch fluid level
•  Engine oil level
•  Fluid leaks
•  Hoses, joints and pipes for any abnormalities
Inside the Vehicle
•  Lights
•  Warning lamps
•  Windshield wiper and wash
•  Steering wheel
•  Seats/Seat belts
•  Accelerator pedal/Brake pedal
•  Brakes
•  Parking brake
•  Gear lever shift mechanism
Outside the Vehicle
•  Lamps
•  Fluid leaks
•  Doors and engine bonnet latches
•  Tyre inflation pressure
•  Tyre surface/thread and wheel Bolts
11.7 In the Engine Compartment
Fluid Leaks: Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately.
Engine Oil: Engine oil has the primary functions of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine. It plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order. Therefore, it is essential to check the engine oil regularly.
Engine Oil Consumption: It is normal for engines to consume some engine oil during operation. Causes of consumption in a normal engine are as follows:
•  Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. Thin films of oil, left over when pistons move in cylinders, are sucked into the combustion chamber due to high negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating. This oil gets burnt in the combustion chamber
•  Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of intake valves. Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burnt there
•  Engine oil consumption depends upon the viscosity and quality of the oil, and upon the conditions in which the vehicle is driven. Oil consumption will be more due to high speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration. A new engine may consume more oil since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls are not conditioned
11.7.1 Checking/Topping the Engine Oil
Graphic
•  Make sure the vehicle is on ground level
•  Turn the engine OFF and wait a few minutes for the oil to settle down into the oil sump
•  Apply the parking brake
•  Open the bonnet, use stay rod to support the bonnet. Protect yourself from engine heat
•  Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick
•  Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again
•  If the oil level is between “Min” and “Max” marks, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL
Graphic
Graphic
•  To access the engine oil filling remove the engine top cover.
•  If the oil level is below or near the "Min" mark, add enough oil through the oil filler cap to raise the level within the “Min” and “Max” marks. Wait for few minutes after every top-up for the oil to settle down before checking the level
Graphic
•  Oil levels above the “Max” mark may cause engine damage/poor performance. Put the dipstick and the oil filler cap back and ensure it is fully/properly seated
Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Engine oil capacity and grade.
Draining/Changing of engine oil should always be done by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
To avoid possible oil loss and injury due to hot blow-by gas, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
11.7.2 Checking/Topping Engine Coolant Level
Graphic
•  Park the vehicle on flat-horizontal surface. Keep the parking brake fully engaged. Shut-off the engine
•  Wait till the engine cools down and hence coolant temperature comes down to normal room temperature
Graphic
•  The coolant level should be between “MIN” and “MAX” marking provided on the degassing tank
•  In case the coolant level is below the "MIN" marking, the coolant should be topped-up
•  The coolant should be filled till the level rises above the 'MIN' but remain below the “MAX” marking on the degassing tank
•  However, if the degassing tank is found to be near empty, it is recommended that the system be checked at Mahindra Authorised Dealer
Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Engine Coolant capacity and grade.
Top-up only with recommended Ready To Use (RTU) coolants for ensuring performance, anti-freezing and corrosion protection. Do not add water directly. Mixing with other brand of coolants is not recommended and should be avoided.
Draining or changing of engine coolant should always be done by Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Never open the pressure cap when the engine is hot. Hot coolant may splash resulting in serious personal injury or severe burns by the erupting liquid.
11.7.3 Checking/Topping Brake/Clutch Fluid
Graphic
The brake and clutch systems are supplied fluid from the same reservoir (Applicable for manual transmission vehicle).
Graphic
The brake fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced. Fluid levels between the “MIN” and “MAX” lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to add fluid.
If the fluid levels are below the “MIN” mark, the performance of the systems could be compromised; the brake/clutch operation could be spongy and gear change harder. Top-up the recommended brake/clutch fluid till the “MAX” mark or contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
Carefully clean the cap on the reservoir before you remove it and be sure no debris fall in the reservoir. Do not keep the reservoir open for longer than necessary to add brake fluid.
Use only brake/clutch fluid that meets Mahindra specifications.
Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Brake/Clutch Fluid capacity and grade.
Draining or changing of brake fluid should always be done by Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
11.7.4 Windshield Washer Fluid Top-up
Graphic
Top-up the windshield washer reservoirs as and when required.
The windshield washer is located behind the RH Head lamp in the engine bay.
In very cold weather conditions, fill the reservoir with washer fluid premixed with anti-freeze.
If you operate your vehicle in very low temperatures, use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
11.7.5 Fuel Filter Water Drain (Diesel)
Graphic
Graphic
The fuel filter needs to be drained when there is water entry in the fuel filter and respective tell tale ON in cluster. Follow the below procedure to drain the water;
1. Park the vehicle on a ground level
2. Apply Parking brake and block the wheels.
3. Switch off the ignition
4. Turn the drain plug (Tool is available in the tool kit) anti-clockwise 3–4 rounds, but DO NOT remove the plug
5. Wait till the water drains (few seconds)
6. Turn the drain plug clockwise to close and tighten the plug firmly
11.8 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle
Lights: Make sure the Head lights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights and other lights are all working. Check headlight aim.
Warning Messages and Lamps: Check all warning lamps appearing in the instrument cluster. Refer to the relevant sections in this manual for further details.
Seats: Check that all seat controls such as seat adjusters, seat back recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in any position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position.
Seat Belts: Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
Accelerator Pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation, uneven pedal effort or stickiness. Check the foot well and remove obstructions, if any.
Brake/Clutch Pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and proper clearance. Check the foot well and remove obstructions, if any.
11.9 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle
The following checks should be carried out from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Lamps: Check and ensure proper functioning of all exterior lamps.
Fluid Leaks: Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately.
Doors and Engine Hood: Check all doors and latches including the tailgate for proper functioning. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
Tyre Inflation Pressure: Check the Tyre pressure with a pressure gauge every week.
11.10 Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a Mahindra authorized genuine battery. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. To prevent corrosion, apply petroleum jelly to the battery terminals. Tighten loose terminals and hold down clamp nuts only enough to keep the battery firmly in place. Tightening excessively may damage the battery terminals.
For Best Battery Service
•  Keep the battery securely mounted
•  Keep the battery top clean and dry
•  Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease
•  Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda
Do not disconnect battery terminals while the engine is running. This will adversely affect all electronic controllers.
While removing the battery, always disconnect the negative terminal first. And while installing the battery, ensure the negative terminal is connected last.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time. This will minimise the discharge of your battery during storage.
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery acid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don't lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in the eyes or on the skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep any flame or spark away from the vent holes.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead components. Wash hands after handling batteries.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock (if equipped) and the preset radio (if equipped) stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected.
The replacement battery must meet the specification of the originally fitted battery.
The company shall not be liable/responsible for any damages/ injuries, including consequential damages/ injuries, resulting due to fitment of non OEM approved batteries
Checking the Electrolyte Level
Check the electrolyte level and specific gravity at intervals of three months. Check all the six cells for proper electrolyte levels. If the level is below the lower marker, add distilled water until the level reaches the upper marker.
Adding distilled water:
•  Remove the vent plugs
•  Add distilled water to all the cells that require the fluid and secure the plugs properly
11.11 Wiper Blades
Lift the wiper arm from its position. Expose the blade lip for inspection. Clean the wiper blade lips with water applied with a soft sponge. If the wiper blade is not wiping the glass satisfactorily or is worn-out, cut, cracked or bulging, get it replaced at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
11.11.1 Changing the Wiper Blade
1. Lift the arm and position the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm.
Graphic
Graphic
2. Press the retaining clip in the opposite direction, disengage the wiper blade and pull it off the arm.
3. Hold the end of the rubber and pull until the tabs are free of the metal support.
4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber. Then install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.
To prevent damage to the windshield, don’t let the wiper arm slap down on to it.
11.12 Appearance Care and Protection
11.12.1 Washing the Exterior
•  Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH soap
•  Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces
•  Never wash a vehicle that is ‘hot to the touch’ or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight
•  Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results
•  Dry the vehicle with a chamois cloth or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting
•  It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle
•  Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits; they can cause damage to the vehicle's paint work and trim over time
11.12.2 Engine Compartment
Graphic
Do not wash the engine or engine compartment or underbody with pressurized water.
11.12.3 Exterior Chrome
•  Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo
•  Use the custom bright metal cleaners, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Apply the product as you would wax to clean chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes, and then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag
•  Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can leave scratches on the chrome surface
•  After polishing the chrome parts, you can also apply a coating of Premium Liquid Wax, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer, or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects
11.12.4 Paint Chips
•  Mahindra dealers have the exact touch-up paint to match your vehicle's color
•  Take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for paint touch-up or paint repairs
•  Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips
•  Always read the instructions before using the products
11.12.5 Alloy Wheels and Wheel Covers (if equipped)
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat of paint finish. In order to maintain their shine:
•  Clean weekly with wheel and Tyre cleaner, which is available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water
•  Never apply any cleaning chemicals to hot or warm wheel rims or covers
•  Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents
11.12.6 Plastic (Non-painted) Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are available with your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. You can use these cleaners:
1. For routine cleaning of plastic parts
2. For tar or grease spots
3. For plastic head lamp lenses
11.12.7 Windows and Wiper Blades
The front/rear windshield, side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle's glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield.
To clean these items, follow these tips:
•  The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer
•  The wiper blades can be cleaned with alcohol or Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. This washer fluid contains a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly
•  Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches
•  Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any glass parts
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to remove decals, as it may cause damage to the glass or rear windshield heater grid lines (if equipped).
11.12.8 Interior Maintenance
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats:
•  Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner
•  Remove light stains and soil with carpet and upholstery cleaner
•  If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with a stain remover
•  Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame- retardant abilities of the seat materials
•  Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
11.12.9 Display Maintenance & Cleaning
Infotainment/Cluster Display Maintenance:
Infotainment/Cluster display is a precise electrical product and the surface is covered with soft optical film/coating. Therefore user should take necessary precaution and care for cleaning the display visible surface.
Cleaning the display area:
•  It is recommended to use soft and micro-fiber lint free cloth to clean the display visible surface.
•  Wipe gently. Do not rub, as the optical film is sensitive to scratch formation.
•  Be careful for scratch by hard matter like finger nail or steel wool.
•  Do not try to peel off the optical film or coating on the screen, since it is attached strongly.
•  Do not add another commercial optical film on to the display visible area.
•  Do not touch the screen with oily/dirty/wet moisturized fingers as the optical film is very sensitive to stains. Incase of such an event please clean with soft cloth immediately.
•  The display visible surface must not come in contact with sharp objects or regular day to day ornaments like finger rings, watches, bracelets, bangles, car keys etc…
•  When you find a scratch on the screen, do not wipe it strongly. Otherwise it will worsen.
•  Display surface is not so strong for chemical agent. Glass cleaner including alkali or acid, sunscreen must not be used. Alcoholic thinner, petrol, abrading agent must not be used. This may cause discoloration or strain.
•  Antiseptic solution must not be used for cleaning, since it is not pure alcohol. This may cause stains and/ or discoloration.
Display care: Your XUV700 has an exquisite display integrated with high-end technology. To keep the display looking new and pristine, wipe the display with a clean soft cloth.
CONTINUED USAGE OF DISPLAY WITH DUST OR DIRT CAN CREATE MICRO-SCRATCHES DO NOT WIPE DUST OR DIRT WITH DRY ROUGH CLOTH OR BY HAND
11.12.10 Instrument Panel/Interior Trim
Use only soft microfiber, dry cloth to clean Instrument Panel/Interior Trim.
Clean the instrument panel/Interior trim areas with neutral PH soap and water using soft microfiber / cotton cloth / sponge, then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth; you may also use Dash and Vinyl Cleaner on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.
•  Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection
•  Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument pane and interior trim
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on the interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
•  Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth
•  Apply vinyl cleaner to the wiped area and spread around evenly
•  Apply cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area and allow this to set in at room temperature for 30 minutes
•  Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the area with a rubbing motion for 60 seconds
•  Following this, wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel.
11.12.11 Leather Seats (where applicable)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the leather:
•  To clean, use a soft microfiber / cotton / sponge cloth with a leather and vinyl with approved cleaners. Dry the area with a soft cloth
•  To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the leather care kit, available from an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
•  Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating
In some instances, a color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing meets leather upholstery. If this occurs, clean the leather immediately to avoid permanent staining.
11.12.12 Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt. You can also use an anti-corrosion spray for the underbody to avoid rusting and corrosion especially for vehicles in coastal places.
11.13 Air Conditioning System Maintenance
Your vehicle's air-conditioning is a sealed system. Any major maintenance, such as recharging should be done by a qualified technician. However, you can do a few things by yourself to make sure the air conditioning works efficiently.
Run the air-conditioning system at least once a week, even during the cold weather months. Run it for at least ten minutes with the engine running at normal operating temperature. This circulates the lubricating oil contained in the refrigerant.
Whenever you get the air-conditioning system serviced, make sure the service facility uses a refrigerant recycling system. This system captures the refrigerant for re-use. Releasing the refrigerant into the atmosphere may cause damage to the environment.
11.14 Vehicle Storage
If you are leaving your vehicle for more than 2 weeks you may want to take stopping to protect your battery. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air mode and high blower speed setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
It is recommended storing the vehicle in a covered, clean, dry, well levelled, ventilated and closed place.
11.15 Winter Care
Dealing with Ice: Make sure you have window ice scrapers and de-icers for the locks. When you're stuck, having a small shovel is useful to dig out of the snow. The weight of a bag of sand in the trunk will give added traction in rear-wheel drive vehicles and can be used to sprinkle on the snow and ice to gain better traction. And don't forget personal protection such as a warm coat, hat, gloves and a blanket, in case you get stuck in a storm.
Keep Enough Fuel in the Tank: Never let the fuel level in the tank drop below the half-full mark. A sudden storm with unexpected heavy rains could leave you stranded for hours. Having adequate fuel supply will allow you to idle the engine from time to time to keep warm.
Do not: Tap the ice on the window to crack it or chip it for a good place to start scraping. You could end up cracking more than the ice and end up with a cracked or shattered windshield/window
Pour warm or hot water on the windshield to melt ice. This will crack your windshield
During Winter Storage: Start the engine occasionally, here are a few pointers to keep in mind:
•  Run it in a well-ventilated area. Carbon monoxide can build up quickly
•  Run for a minimum of 20 minutes to allow the engine to come up to the normal operating temperature. This will allow the oil to circulate and will also open up the thermostat so that your radiator anti-freeze circulates as well
•  Start up the air conditioner and/or heater and run both for about 10 minute. Again, circulating fluids is essential for good life of the system
Exterior: Wash and wax your car to provide an extra layer of protection to your paint.
Vinyl and Rubber: Use a good conditioner on all vinyl and rubber parts to prevent from drying out.
Interior: Clean the glass, shampoo the carpets, dig in between the seats to see what's there, clean the upholstery in all nooks and corners.
Engine: Check all hoses and wires to make sure everything is in good condition and replace any that need to be. The last thing to do is to make sure the internal components of the engine remain lubricated and don't corrode.
If the engine is being started after a very long period of non-use, warm up the engine at an idle speed for 2-3 minutes before driving the vehicle.
11.16 Head Lamp Bulb Replacement (if equipped)
Below procedure is applicable only for variants having Head lamp bulbs.
To replace the head lamp bulb:
•  Ensure ignition is switched OFF
•  Remove rear dust cover from the head lamp
•  Remove the bulb assembly with connector from the head lamp by unlocking the wire clamp
•  Detach the bulb assembly from the wiring connector near to the head lamp
•  Insert the connector into the new bulb (of the same wattage), and follow the reverse procedure to assemble the bulb assembly in the headlight assembly
•  Clamp the bulb assembly by wire clamp properly
The head lamp bulb can be replaced without removing the head lamp assembly from the vehicle. The head lamp assembly has been removed here for illustration purpose only.
Graphic
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
To avoid burn injuries, do not replace the light bulbs when they are hot. Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and are to be handled with special care. Mishandling it may cause the bulb to burst or shatter. Hold the bulb with its metal/plastic holder/base and do not touch the glass part with bare hands.
Using bulbs with units of higher output capacity/wattage is illegal and may damage your vehicle’s electrical system.
Replacement bulbs must meet the specification of originally fitted bulbs.
12 ANNEXURE
12.1 Emission Control System – Multi Languages Alerts
Graphic
12.1.1 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Assames
Graphic
Graphic
12.1.2 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Bengali
Graphic
Graphic
12.1.3 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Gujarathi
Graphic
Graphic
12.1.4 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Hindi
Graphic
Graphic
12.1.5 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Kannada
Graphic
Graphic
12.1.6 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Malayalam
Graphic
Graphic
12.1.7 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Marathi
Graphic
Graphic
12.1.8 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Oriya
Graphic
Graphic
12.1.9 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Tamil
Graphic
Graphic
12.1.10 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Telugu
Graphic
Graphic
13 INFOTAINMENT
13.1 Safety Precautions
Before using this device, take some time to read through this Instructions Manual.
Knowledge of the operation procedures will help in getting the best performance out of your new Infotainment System. Figures from the display and panel presented in this manual are examples provided for best explaining how the commands are used. Thus, display figures presented may be different from those actually presented on the device display. Illustrations, technical in­formation, specifications and descriptions of this brochure were correct until the date of printing. We safeguard the right to make any required amendments according to the ongoing development and improvement.
To avoid risk of damage and/or fire, observe the following precautions;
•  To avoid short-circuits, never insert metallic objects (for instance: coins or metallic tools) into the unit.
•  If you notice that the unit is releasing smoke or strange smell, promptly disconnect the supply and consult the nearest or Mahindra service Center.
•  Pay attention not to let the unit fall down, and neither beat the device strongly. Internal glass components of the unit may be damaged, making it non-operative.
•  This system has a Capacitive type touch panel. Select the desired option in the screen using his / her finger. Do not use any sharp objects on the touch screen. On selection the selected item is highlighted as an acknowledgement.
13.1.1 Cleaning of the Unit
If the front panel of this unit is dirty, clean it with a dry cloth or slightly soaked in water. If the front panel is too dirty, clean it with a cloth moistened with neutral soap and then repeat the prior operation.
Do not use any cleansing spray with this unit, as that can affect its mechanical parts. If you clean the front panel with a rough cloth that may scratch the surface.
Features described herein are subjected to availability depending on vehicle variants. Please contact authorized personal for more information.
13.1.2 User Controls
13.1.2.1 Touch Screen Display
The Infotainment system is equipped with a 10.25”  touch screen TFT display.
It displays information about Media (AM/FM, USB, Bluetooth music & etc.,), Navigation, Vehicle controls & settings
Graphic
13.1.2.2 Intelli Command Center (ICC)
ICC is combination of Joystick & switches for  easy ergonomic access for the driver & co driver.
It has 4 shortcut keys + a central rotary knob.
The ICC rotary knob can be selected for volume or for browsing (by enabling the corresponding options in settings).There are options with long press(for Infotainment user Off) & short press(for select command or Infotainment user ON)
Graphic
13.1.2.3 Steering Wheel Control (SWC)
Infotainment system can be controlled by Steering wheel switch mounted on the left side of the steering wheel.
Graphic
A: Mute
E: Source
B: Volume +
F: SEEK UP
C: Volume -
G: SEEK DOWN
D: Call Connect
H: Voice / Call Disconnect
1. Mute switch is for muting the audio playing in Infotainment
2. Volume control can be done with the help of this switch to increase the volume, move the switch upwards and to decrease it move the switch downwards.
3. Call connect is used to accept the incoming call & also it enable the driver to open the contacts list in Infotainment & make the call.
4. Source switch is used to change the source of audio playing in the Infotainment whether USB or FM.
5. Seek up/down switch can be used for toggling up/down the menu list of Infotainment.
6. Call Disconnect switch is used when the call is over, and the user wants to cut it then switch can be pressed.
This provide the flexibility of controlling the infotainment system while driving, without any distraction
13.2 Landing Screen Overview
Graphic
The AdrenoX Screen can be split in to 4 sections
Fun in XUV700
Android Auto
Fun with XUV700
Apple Carplay
Graphic
•  Once the home button is selected, the home screen will appear on the infotainment
Graphic
•  Double-tap the Home icon to select the landing screen
13.2.1 Fun in XUV700
Fun in XUV 700 shows all the media, phone, navigation, 3rd party application options.
Home Screen Details
Home Screen is the main screen for the user to interact with the Infotainment System
•  Home Screen is displayed when user press the Home icon or Home button
•  This screen also allows the user to have split screen menus.
•  The tiles in the Fun in XUV700 screen can be rearranged based on the user preference
•  Features which are available in infotainment screen is known as Tile.
•  For e.g., Radio, Android Auto, Music, Phone, Navigation, Application and Apple car Play can be accessed through Home screen tile
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.1.1 Radio
Graphic
The Radio tile allows quick access to radio features and the Radio menu.
•  Touching the radio tile will open the full Radio screen, from the tile radio can be played and you can move between the radio channels.
•  When Radio is playing, station name & frequency will be shown in Radio Tile
•  Search the station name using seek up/down button on Steering Wheel and enter intended frequency by pressing Seek button.
Graphic
Graphic
A: Mute
E: Source
B: Volume +
F: UP
C: Volume —
G: DOWN
D: Call Connect
G: Voice/Call Disconnect
Shortcut icon in Radio: Shortcut icon in Radio tile is used to
Change next/previous radio station
 
Graphic
Graphic
Stop button is used to stop/play the music
Graphic
 
13.2.1.2 Android Auto (if equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
•  Android Auto brings out the best of in-car infotainment technology by linking the user’s Android™ device with the Mahindra infotainment system.
•  Android Auto focuses on safety & minimizes user distraction by projecting select Android phone functionality on to the vehicle infotainment system.
•  It allows the user to access and control select applications of Android phone, using various inputs on the vehicle such as touch, steering wheel controls and voice.
•  Android apps can control Music, Navigation and Phone call
•  It enhances the XUV700 driving experience & enables the user to stay focused on the road with simple, intuitive interfaces, integrated steering wheel controls and Voice recognition.
•  This makes it safer and easier to interact with the phone while driving.
•  To experience Android Auto, the user has to download and install Android Auto app from Google Play Store.
•  Android auto is supported at bottom bezel USB port. Also, Android Auto can be connected wirelessly without using USB cable.
Connection:
Android Auto will connect automatically in XUV700 in 2-ways.
•  Connect mobile Bluetooth to the vehicle Bluetooth and press Android Auto.
•  Connect the phone using your charging cable to the vehicle file transfer socket and press Android Auto (another method)
Below screen will appear in XUV700 infotainment system.
Graphic
Graphic
Features:
User can be able to find in-build apps in infotainment screen
By using the apps, user can make call to their contacts by using phone books.
Navigation system can be accessed to find the desired location.
Music can be played by using in build mobile app
In-build Google voice assistance in infotainment screen.
Graphic
Graphic
Using Mahindra icon, user can able to switch from Android Auto to vehicle Home screen
Graphic
Graphic
Shortcut icon in Android Auto:
Shortcut icon is enabled only when Android Auto is connected to infotainment
Shortcut icon in Android Auto tile is used to access -
1. Music
Graphic
Graphic
2. Phone book
Graphic
Graphic
3. Navigation
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.1.3 Music
Graphic
•  Touch Music tile screen to play the desired music
Graphic
•  Song name will be displayed in the screen
•  To change a song, press the next/ previous buttons.
•  To pause music, press pause button
•  Music can be accessed through USB, My Drive, iPod, Android Auto, Apple Car Play and Bluetooth.
Shortcut icon in Music:
Shortcut icon is used in Music tile to Change next/previous song and
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Song can be paused/played
13.2.1.4 Phone
Graphic
•  The phone tile shows the phone that is currently connected to the AdrenoX with Bluetooth.
•  If no phone is currently paired, it will give a quick option to go to the pairing screen in the settings menu.
•  Touch the Phone tile to enter phone screen
•  When phone is connected to the infotainment system via Bluetooth, the phone name will display in vehicle infotainment
•  After pressing the phone screen, user can see below features on Phone Tile
Recent call list:
Graphic
•  The phone tile shows the phone that is currently connected to the AdrenoX with Bluetooth.
•  This screen will show recent call list details of person, who pair the mobile with infotainment
Contact Details:
Graphic
Contact details can easily be accessed by using this option
Dial:
Graphic
Using dial pad, we can enter new mobile number to contact a person or can find the person by tying his/her mobile number
SMS:
Graphic
While driving or other reasons user can send a SMS to desired person
Quick Dial:
Graphic
Favorites contacts can be seen in quick dial
Shortcut icon in Phone:
Shortcut icons in the tile is used to access
First icon will take the user to Recent Phone
Graphic
Graphic
Second icon will take the user to Bluetooth device list
Graphic
Graphic
Third icon will take the user to contact details of the connected mobile through infotainment
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.1.5 NAVIGATION
Graphic
Graphic
The navigation tile allows the user to open the in-built Map My India maps for navigation.
If any route is currently set up for navigation, it will show the turn-by-turn route.
Navigation works only if the user subscribes to the configured e-SIM at regular intervals
Graphic
Graphic
When the navigation screen is displayed on the infotainment, gently touch the infotainment screen once to see the destination, settings and report on incident option.
Destination:
1. User can set the desired target by selecting the Destination option
Graphic
Graphic
2. User can enter the desired destination in the search bar
3. Then route map will be available in screen
Graphic
Graphic
Settings:
Graphic
User can select the settings option & use the below listed option in settings
Graphic
1. Live Traffic
2. Avoid on Route
3. Trip Type
4. Driver Assist
5. Map Display
Graphic
6. Voice
7. Language
8. Map Data
9. Reset
10. About
Report an incident:
Graphic
Graphic
If user encounter any of the above incidents, then he/she can report the incident by using Report a Traffic Problem option
These reports help other users to show real-time traffic conditions.
GPS:
GPS navigation system provides voice guidance to the user on how to reach a given destination.
Graphic
Graphic
Shortcut icon in Navigation:
Shortcut icon in Navigation tile is used to
1. While enabling the favorite icon, infotainment will take user directly to Navigation screen
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
2. Can switch ON/OFF the voice by using mute button
3. While enabling the Navigation icon, infotainment will take user directly to Destination screen
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.1.6 Mappls Auto (If equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
•  Navigation in XUV700 is powered by MAPPLS AUTO.
•  If any route is currently set up for navigation, it will display the turn-by-turn directions.
•  MAPPLS AUTO functionality depends on user maintaining a subscription to the configured e-SIM at regular intervals
13.2.1.7 Application
Graphic
Graphic
•  The Applications tile allows the user to open all available 3rd party applications.
•  Touching the Applications tile will open the app drawer.
•  It has quick options to open News, Music & food apps.
•  By pressing Application tile, App Drawer screen will open automatically
Shortcut icon in Application:
Shortcut icon in Application tile can be used to access the below features
News:
Graphic
Graphic
1. India Today APP will open by pressing the NEWS icon
2. User can listen live NEWS regarding various topics (Business, Live NEWS, Top NEWS, Sports, etc.,)
Travel Explorer:
 
Graphic
Graphic
1. Thrillophilia App will open by pressing the Travel Explorer icon
2. Users can find near by Hotels, famous locations etc., that can be explored by using Thrillophilia
Zomato:
 
Graphic
Graphic
1. Zomato App will open by pressing the food icon
2. User can find near by restaurants by using the above app
13.2.1.8 Apple Car Play (if equipped)
•  Apple Car Play brings out the best of in-car infotainment technology by linking the user’s iPhone™ device with the Mahindra infotainment system.
•  Apple Car Play focuses on safety & minimizes user distraction by projecting select iPhone functionality on to the vehicle infotainment system.
•  It allows the user to access, and control select applications of iPhone, using various inputs on the vehicle such as touch, steering wheel controls and voice.
•  Examples of some applications of the Apple device that can be controlled include Music, Navigation, Phone call and Google search
•  It enhances the XUV700 driving experience & enables the user to stay focused on the road with simple, intuitive interfaces, integrated steering wheel controls and a powerful speech recognition.
•  This makes it safer and easier to interact with the phone while driving.
Graphic
Graphic
Connection:
Enable Bluetooth in your mobile
Pair the mobile Bluetooth with XUV700, then Apple Car Play will connect automatically
Press Apple Car Play to enable the Car Play
Graphic
Graphic
Features:
Graphic
User can find some in-build apps in Apple Car Play. Using the apps, user can :
- make call to their contacts by using phone books
- access Navigation system to find the desired location
- play Music by using in-build mobile app
- use Siri voice assistance (Apple phone user)
Using Mahindra option, user can switch from Apple Car Play to vehicle Home screen.
Graphic
Graphic
Shortcut in Apple Car Play:
Music icon in Apple Car Play tile can be used to access the music.
Shortcut icon is enabled only when Apple car play is connected to infotainment system
Graphic
Graphic
Phone icon in Apple Car Play tile can be used to access the Phone book.
Graphic
Graphic
Navigation icon in Apple Car Play tile can be used to access the Navigation.
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.2 Widget
Graphic
Widgets are screens that provide quick information from the AdrenoX system.
•  The widgets display will be fixed in the left corner of the Fun in XUV700 screen.
•  The following information will be available as part of widgets
1. Clock
2. Health
3. Gallery
4. Weather
5. NEWS
6. Travel Explorer
7. Calendar
13.2.2.1 Clock
•  Time can be displayed in the selected area
•  Pressing the clock screen in widget will open the display settings on the clock.
•  Time can be fixed in both Analog or digital format
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.2.2 Health
•  Scroll down the Radio and find the Health screen in Widget
•  User can connect the mobile or smart watch with vehicle via Bluetooth
•  Whenever the device is in the Bluetooth range, then user can be able to see all the listed features 
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.2.3 Gallery
•  Scroll down the Health screen and find the gallery screen in Widget
•  User can be able to see the photos/videos in gallery by press the gallery option
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.2.4 Weather
•  Scroll down the gallery screen and find the Weather screen in Widget
•  Users can view weather information by selecting the weather icon on the widget
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.2.5 News
•  Scroll down the Weather screen and find the NEWS screen in Widget
•  User can know the day-to-day news using India Today app by selecting the NEWS app in widget
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.2.6 Travel Explorer
•  Scroll down the Weather screen and find the Travel explorer screen in Widget
•  User can search nearby hotels, locations etc., can be accessed by selecting the Travel Advisor app
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.2.7 Calender
•  Scroll down the Travel Explorer screen and find the Calendar screen in Widget
•  User can fix the Events, Journey Planner, Checklist, Schedule Destination & Pickup Remainder by using calendar
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.3 Fun in XUV700 Split Screen Functionality
Graphic
Users can access the Split screen by swiping left on the home screen.
Graphic
User can set the Radio, Media, Phones, and other screens by long pressing the intended tile in Split screen.
Graphic
User can set any four contents in split screen to access the features easily
13.2.4 Fun with XUV700 (If equipped)
Graphic
User can select different drive modes as per his/her convenience by using the Fun with XUV700 option.
Fun with XUV700 menu displays engine power & torque, selected drive mode, compass, a G force meter and digital lap time
•  Drive Mode feature available only in Two Wheel Drive vehicle (Diesel)
•  Feature is not available in Petrol (2WD ) and All Wheel Drive (Diesel) variants
13.2.4.1 Zip Mode (If equipped)
Graphic
Touch Fun with XUV700 screen & user can find the different drive mode option
Graphic
After selecting the Zip mode, swipe right side of the screen
Graphic
Then a user can find the Trip information screen
By using the Trip information, user can know the driving details such as Trip Distance, Top Speed, Average Speed, Fuel Economy and how many times the brake pedal is pressed in the last driving cycle.
Above details are updated according to the last driving pattern. User can reset the Trip details.
Graphic
By swiping the screen to the right side then user can be able to see the lap timer option.
Graphic
Lap timer measures within how many minutes the user can reach the maximum speed (very useful in racing track and testing track)
Swipe the screen left side for two times and again go back to drive mode screen
13.2.4.2 Zap Mode (If equipped)
Graphic
Select Zap option in drive mode screen
Graphic
After selecting the Zap mode swipe the right side of the screen
Graphic
Then user can find the vehicle performance display screen
Vehicle performance screen consists of Engine Power, Torque, G-meter, and Compass
Graphic
By swiping the screen to the right side, user can be able to see the lap timer option
Lap timer measures within how many minutes the user can reach the maximum speed (very useful in racing track and testing track)
Swipe the screen left side for two times and again go back to drive mode screen
13.2.4.3 Zoom Mode (If equipped)
Graphic
Select Zoom option in drive mode screen
After selecting the Zoom mode swipe the right side of the screen
Graphic
Then user can find the vehicle performance display screen
Graphic
Vehicle performance screen consists of Engine Power, Torque, G-meter, and Compass
By swiping the screen to the right side, user can be able to see the lap timer option
Lap timer measures within how many minutes the user can reach the maximum speed (very useful in racing track and testing track)
Swipe the screen left side for two times and again go back to drive mode screen
13.2.4.4 Custom Mode (If equipped)
Graphic
Select Custom option in drive mode screen
After selecting the Custom mode, select configure option
Then user can find configure custom mode
By using the below option user can configure Engine Power, Brake, Climate, Steering Behavior, and Theme by selecting different drive modes (Zip, Zap or Zoom mode)
Graphic
Swipe the screen left side for two times and again go back to drive mode screen
13.2.5 Android Auto (if equipped)
Graphic
Refer Android Auto section for additional information
13.2.6 Apple Car Play (if equipped)
Graphic
Refer Apple Car Play section for additional information
13.2.7 e-SIM (If equipped)
Graphic
XUV700 infotainment has inbuilt e-SIM which is used to access Zomato, Just dial, Accuweather,  Horoscope, News, and some other apps can be accessed by using the e-SIM
User can use this as a mobile network by connecting the vehicle’s Wi-Fi to mobile
Based upon OEM standards, SIM subscriptions can be varied for all variants
13.2.8 Fun in XUV 700 Quick Access Drawer Functionality
Graphic
Graphic
The Quick Access Drawer can be opened by dragging the screen from up to down.
Quick Access Drawer gives the user a swift way to access handy features like Volume control, Ask Mahindra (if equipped), Roadside Assistance, Valet Mode, Notifications, Help, Radio, Apple Car Play, Android Auto, My Drive, USB, Bluetooth, iPod, and video.
13.2.8.1 Volume Control
Graphic
User can increase, decrease or mute the volume by using Volume Control option 
13.2.8.2 Ask Mahindra (if equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
By operating the Ask Mahindra icon, a call will be triggered automatically from your XUV700 to Mahindra Support Centre for:  
1. Explanation on features and functions.
2. Guidance or assistance for usage of in-car features.
3. Assisting customers with guiding them to nearest workshop.

CAUTION:
Some Infotainment features may not work when the Ask Mahindra call is in progress
13.2.8.3 RSA
Graphic
Graphic
If any abnormal condition is observed in vehicle, user can access RSA
By enabling RSA in infotainment, a call will be triggered automatically to Mahindra Roadside Assistance team
13.2.8.4 Valet Mode (If equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
Allows the user to park the vehicle in a predefined location while giving the vehicle to valet parking. The default PIN to access the Valet mode will be 1234.
Once the Valet Mode is enabled,
•  Infotainment screen will not be accessible,
•  The vehicle speed will not go beyond 80 Kmph,
•  Geofencing alert will be triggered to the user's mobile when an unknown person drives the vehicle over 5 Km.
•  Above conditions are not applicable, if user disables the valet mode.
•  Don’t activate the valet mode during vehicle service
13.2.8.5 Notification
Graphic
Graphic
•  User mobile should pair with XUV700 via Bluetooth
•  Notification will be shown by clicking the notification icon only if the user’s mobile is paired with XUV700
13.2.8.6 Help
Graphic
Graphic
•  Using Help option user can know the unknown alerts and telltale details in Owners Manual or Infotainment Manual
13.2.8.7 Radio
Graphic
Graphic
•  Radio option will be selected directly by using Quick access option
•  Once the Radio icon is selected, then Radio screen will appear in infotainment
13.2.8.8 Apple Car Play (if equipped)
Graphic
Refer Apple Car Play section for additional information
13.2.8.9 Android Auto (if equipped)
Graphic
Refer Android Auto section for additional information
13.2.8.10 My Drive (if equipped)
By using pen drive, favorite songs can be stored in My Drive
Press My Drive option to enjoy the songs which is already stored in My Drive
Graphic
Graphic
By selecting the equalizer icon, Audio settings will be opened. User can adjust the Bass, Mid, Treble & Sub woofer.
Graphic
Graphic
By selecting the Browse folder user can see the Favorites, Genres, Artist, Album, Songs, Composers
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.8.11 USB
Graphic
Media port is available below the center switch bezel where USB device can be connected.
User can access music, video & Photos by USB device.
Graphic
Graphic
By selecting the equalizer icon, Audio settings will be opened. User can adjust the Bass, Mid, Treble & Subwoofer.
Graphic
Graphic
By selecting the Browse folder, Browse MyDrive screen will opened. User can see the Favorites, Genres, Artist, Album, Songs & Composers.
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.8.12 Bluetooth
User can connect the mobile with XUV700 via Bluetooth
Once Mobile Bluetooth is connected with vehicle infotainment, user can play desired songs
Graphic
Graphic
By selecting the equalizer icon, Audio settings will be opened. User can adjust the Bass, Mid, Treble & Subwoofer.
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.8.13 iPod
This option can be enabled only if the user have iPhone
Graphic
Graphic
If user have iPhone, then car play application can be disabled through iPhone settings. To play the music, connect the USB cable to media port and play songs through mobile APP.
Graphic
By selecting the equalizer icon, Audio settings will be opened. User can adjust the Bass, Mid, Treble & Subwoofer.
Graphic
Graphic
By selecting the Browse folder user can see the Favorites, Genres, Artist, Album, Songs, Composers
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.8.14 Video
Graphic
Graphic
•  When USB device is connected in Media Port, then user can play Videos.
•  In App drawer, select Gallery option & select the video in gallery. Video will play automatically
•  User can see the video in parking condition
•  During driving, user can see the video in infotainment up to 20 kmph speed
13.2.9 Fun in XUV 700 App Drawer Functionality
Graphic
The App Drawer can be opened by dragging the screen from Down to up.
The app drawer displays all the applications available in Infotainment System.
Graphic
Graphic
The App Drawer allows user to browse through available apps and folders and launch selected one.
Based on the usage of Apps, reordering will be done automatically
13.2.9.1 Add Folder
Graphic
Graphic
•  User can select add folder and can drag the existing apps available in app drawer to New Folder
•  User can rename the folder as per his/her choice.
13.2.9.2 Climate Control (If equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
•  User can press Climate Control option and select different modes available in XUV700.
•  Types of modes are described below
1. Face Mode:
Graphic
User can access Face mode to get direct airflow through instrument panel air vents to the front row passenger.
2. Face & Foot Mode:
Graphic
User can select Face & Foot mode to get airflow from both instrument panel air vents and footwell air vents
3. Foot Mode:
Graphic
User can select Foot mode to get airflow from footwell air vents
4. Foot & Defogger Mode:
Graphic
User can select Foot & Defogger mode to get airflow from footwell air vents & Defogger vents
Defogger vent is used to clear the frost/mist, which is formed on Front windshield.
5. Front Defogger Mode:
Graphic
User can select Front Defogger mode to clear the frost/mist, which is formed on front windshield
Recirculation Mode:
Graphic
User can select Re-circulation mode by pressing the Re-circulation mode icon
In re-circulation mode, air is re-circulated in passenger compartment If it is OFF, fresh air is supplied in passenger compartment.
Blower Speed Control:
Graphic
Blower Fan Speed can be controlled by pressing '+' or '-' button on HVAC controller.
Auto Mode:
Graphic
User can select auto mode by pressing the ‘Auto’ button on HVAC controller.
In AUTO mode, with respect to the surrounding condition, set temperature is automatically obtained. This is done by adjusting the blower speed and fresh/recirculation mode to optimum level.
Smart Air Filter:
Graphic
Smart Air Filter is used to convert the polluted air into non polluted air
Seat Ventilation Control (if equipped)
The Seat Ventilation Setting accessible through Infotainment HVAC application or from footer selection of the infotainment Launcher Screen.
Once the application has been launched, the footer selection will result in NO ACTION.
Graphic
•  Go to setting page in infotainment Screen then select climate control.
Graphic
Enable the Driver and Co-driver seat ventilation feature based on the requirement.
Once enable the seat ventilation, user will be able to modify the airflow with three different level. The default level will be OFF.
For every short press on the seat ventilation icon, the levels shall be changed by one step to another step like Level 3 →Level 2 → Level 1 → OFF →Level 1 → Level 2 →Level 3→ Level 2 →Level 3 → OFF
Graphic
The long press on the Seat Ventilation Icon, to turn it OFF.
Again, a short press on the same icon will enable the feature with Last stored Level.
Power Off:
Graphic
HVAC system is turned off when the user presses the power button.
Press the power button to restart the HVAC system
13.2.9.3 Connected Apps (If equipped)
Graphic
User can select Connected Apps and can see Manufacturer Update, Over The Air Surprises, Personalized Safety Alerts and Calendar.
Graphic
Graphic
Individual Features are explained below
Manufacturer Update
Graphic
User can select Manufacturer Update and enter in Manufacturer Update screen
Two options are available in Manufacturer Update screen
Graphic
1. History: Previous updates from organization can be stored in the history
Graphic
2. Advertisement: Service Offers can be shared by manufacturer by using this feature. This feature can be enabled / disabled by the user
Over the Air Surprise
User can select Over the air Surprise and enter to Over the air Surprise screen
Graphic
Graphic
In Over the Air Surprise, Mahindra will provide regular update to the user regarding following details:
Happy Birthday wishes to the user - Owner birth date is shown in this feature
Graphic
Graphic
Scheduled Maintenance - Last service details, can be available in this feature.
Graphic
Graphic
ADVISORY - User can know whether Android Auto is available in his/her vehicle
Graphic
Graphic
Advisory
XUV700 is loaded with lot of new features, user can explore the New Features as per his/her requirements.
There is possibility that long and repeated features can be explored in Engine OFF condition.
But, if ignition is in ON condition and vehicle is idle for days/hours, then there is chance of battery drainage.
To avoid this Mahindra had asked the user to switch ON the Engine
Graphic
Graphic
RESTORE - Once the update is done, all the details in AdrenoX Connect service have been restored.
Graphic
Graphic
UPDATE - User can be check the update in this section.
Graphic
Graphic
HAPPY DIWALI - Pushed message for the Seasons Greetings can be viewed.
Graphic
Graphic
HAPPY DUSSEHRA - Pushed message for the Seasons Greetings can be viewed.
Graphic
Graphic
Happy Birthday wishes to the user - Pushed message for Birthday Wishes can be viewed.
Graphic
Graphic
Personalized Safety Alert
 
Graphic
Graphic
Personalized Safety alert will pop-up when user drives the vehicle in over speed condition.
As a remembrance, user can customize alert voice of his / her loved ones.
When user drive the vehicle rashly voice will come & alert the user
Graphic
1. Settings: User can able to save the voice and can able to enable or disable the option
Graphic
2. History: Previous details are available in History section.
Calender
User can fix the Events, Journey Planner, Checklist, Schedule Destination & Pickup Reminder by using calendar
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.9.4 Documents
Graphic
Graphic
User can store the important files like License, Aadhar card, Pan card, Voter I’d , etc., in pdf format
Graphic
1. My Drive Documents: In this folder user can store the important details like License, Aadhar Card, Pan Card, etc.. in digital format.
Graphic
2. USB Documents: Connect the pen drive in file transfer socket and then user can access important files which are available in pen drive.
13.2.9.5 Download Manager
In Download Manager, user can know the applications which are available on Infotainment Systems.
Graphic
Graphic
User can select the required APP and view various details available in it.
Graphic
Weather - User can know the weather updates in their locality by using Weather condition app
Graphic
Travel - By using Travel explorer application user can explore nearby places or search the places as per his/her requirement.
Graphic
Others - In others user can find Connected Cars, Horoscope and Just dial applications
Graphic
News - By using NEWS app user can listen the daily NEWS
Graphic
Zomato - User can find the near by restaurants and order their foods
13.2.9.6 Drive Modes (If equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
In Drive mode user can be able to access four different drive modes.
1. Zip mode
2. Zap mode
3. Zoom mode
4. Custom mode
Zip mode
Graphic
After activating the Zip mode, the vehicle is suitable to drive in normal comfortable city condition and in traffic condition.
ZAP MODE:
Graphic
After activating the Zap mode, the user can experience the TRUE Mahindra SUV drive experience.
ZOOM MODE:
Graphic
Zoom mode can be activated by the user to drive the vehicle on highways and enjoy the thrilling driving experience.
CUSTOM MODE:
In Custom mode, user can configure Zip/Zap/Zoom mode functionalities for the 5-parameters i.e. Engine Power, Brakes, Climate, Steering and Theme
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.9.7 Eco Sense (Only in MT Variant)
Graphic
Graphic
ECOSENSE assesses how a vehicle is driven and presents an Ecoscore (Avg.).
Ecoscore is calculated by monitoring key driving parameters like speed, gear selection, acceleration, unwanted engine idling periods, frequent aggressive braking and clutch overrides.
Higher the ecoscore, better the driving habits. Higher ecoscore does not always mean better fuel economy, as fuel economy depends on factors like prevailing traffic, load on the vehicle, road profile, number of passengers and other environmental factors.
ECOSENSE also provides, on the infotainment screen, alerts for unwanted idling and clutch over ride. Recommendation for Gear-Shift is provided on the cluster, enabling the users to make optimal gear selection.
ECOSENSE helps in getting a better fuel economy which in turn leads to reduced emissions and a cleaner environment.
13.2.9.8 Gallery
User can save photos & videos in the Gallery by inserting USB device in Media Port. Also, user can copy the photos & videos in MyDrive Photos and MyDrive videos.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Use can select MyDrive Photos, see the list of Photos and select to see it in full screen.
Similarly, user can play the video in infotainment system.
As a safety measure, there are some limitations to play the video in infotainment.
User can see the video in parking condition
During driving, up to 20 kmph user see the video in infotainment 
13.2.9.9 Horoscope
By using the Horoscope app user can view daily fortune as per his/her zodiac sign
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.9.10 Just Dial
User can search various services by using the Just Dial app in the infotainment
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.9.11 My Drive Manager
Insert USB device in Media Port & open the My Drive Manager then user can copy required songs, videos, photos and documents to the infotainment system
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Select required file from USB device & by using copy (highlighted) option, user can store the required details from USB to the infotainment system.
Graphic
Delete content option is used to remove the unwanted files in the infotainment system
Graphic
User can store max 1.9 GB data in infotainment system.
13.2.9.12 My SUV Info
Graphic
Graphic
In MySUVInfo option, user can know the Vehicle Details and can store License & other certificates in digital format.
Vehicle Details
Graphic
Graphic
1. Vehicle Name
8. Number of cylinders
2. Color of the vehicle
9. Variant details
3. Primary User
10. VIN Number
4. PUC (Pollution Under Control) Expiry Date
11. Model
5. Last Service Date
12. Make
6. Engine Capacity
13. Insurance Expiry Date
7. Fuel Type
 
My Documents:
Graphic
In My Documents user can store the following details in digital format
1. Insurance
2. License
3. Registration Certificate (RC)
4. Pollution Under Control (PUC) certificates in Digital format
13.2.9.13 New Update
Graphic
Graphic
By using NEWS app user can easily listen World NEWS, Top News, Automobile News, Business, Sports & etc.,
13.2.9.14 Owner’s Manual
Graphic
Graphic
By using Owner’s Manual option, user can see XUV700 Owner's manual & Infotainment manual
13.2.9.15 Surround View System (if equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
Surround View System / 360-degree Camera View System assists the user during parking and during low speed maneuvering. Surround View Assistance is provided with the help of 4 cameras located in the front grille, in the tailgate applique and on both exterior mirrors.
Using this option, user can see different Surrounding views in infotainment system
Different Surrounding views details are listed below:
Front Camera 2d View
Graphic
This view assist the user to drive the vehicle carefully in front area.
User can see the front surroundings while maneuvering in front.
Rear Camera 2d View
Graphic
This view assists the user with Rear surrounding view for maneuvering in rear of the vehicle.
Left Camera 2d View
Graphic
This view helps the user to see the left side view near the front tire when parking
Right Camera 2d View
Graphic
This view helps the user to see the right side view near the front tire when parking
Rear Bumper 2d View
Graphic
This view helps the user to see the objects closer to rear bumper
Front Bumper 2d View
Graphic
This view helps the user to see the object closer to front bumper
Bird’S Eye View
Graphic
The bird’s eye view/2D top view shows the view of the vehicle from a top-down view (as in right side of image) stitching all the 4 camera images
Wide-Angle View / Full Screen View- 2d & 3d
Single view can be switched to wide-angle view by pressing full view icon
Graphic
Graphic
Translucent Top View
•  The translucent (semi transparent) top view will provide the user to view the floor below the vehicle.
•  Gently, touch the bird’s eye view, then the infotainment view changes to semi transparent view. User can view beneath the ground which will be visible once the vehicle starts moving.
Graphic
Graphic
3D Views
Graphic
Once user touches bird’s eye view/3D top view in infotainment screen, then oval ring will appear.
In oval ring, 3D view switching 8 icons will be visible. Selecting any icon will show the 3D view in icons direction.
If there is NO action from user side, then Icon will hide automatically after 5 seconds.
Graphic
Graphic
SVS - Settings
Graphic
User can access the Parking Guideline, Automatic Side View, Parking assistance & Drive video recordings by using SVS settings
Parking Guidelines
Graphic
Graphic
In Parking Guidelines, two modes are available i.e. Static Guideline & Dynamic Guideline.
Static Guideline indicates the placement of vehicle with respect to the parking slot.
Dynamic Guideline indicates the path that the vehicle will traverse with the current steering angle position.
Color codes (Red, Yellow, Green) on the static lines helps in assessing obstacle distance [at the ground plane] from the vehicle’s boundary.
•  By selecting 2D view, user can see either Front View or Rear View. 2D view is the Default view.
•  By selecting 3D view, user can see Full View of the vehicle.
Automatic Side View
Graphic
Graphic
•  When Left / Right Turn Indicator is turned ON and 3D view is active, then view will switch to 3D Left / Right in Infotainment Screen
•  This feature can be Enabled / Disabled from SVS SETTINGS menu
Parking Assistance:
Two types of Parking Assistances are available in XUV700
•  Vertical (Perpendicular) Parking Assistance:
1. Choose Vertical Parking icon from SVS-Settings. Overlays will appear on either side as in image below.
2. Drive ahead of the parking slot, so that camera can have the parking slot view.
3. Chose vertical parking button from settings. Overlays will appear on either side.
Graphic
Graphic
•  Parallel Parking Assistance:
1. Drive ahead of the parking slot so that Camera can have the parking slot view, then choose Parallel Parking icon from SVS-Settings.
2. Two green rectangular boxes will appear on either side
Graphic
Graphic
Drive Video Recording:
•  The 4 cameras installed around the vehicle captures the video and capture special event of the vehicle during driving.
•  Recording from SVS-DVR is possible only if micro-SD card is installed
Graphic
Graphic
•  Use Class 10 micro-SD card for recording the video
•  For detailed information on the Surround View System topic, see the Interactive Owner's Manual 360° View section which is available in Mahindra’s With You Hamesha app
13.2.9.16 Ticker Tape
Graphic
Graphic
 
Ticker Tape feature helps users to track the stock prices and other financial data by providing real-time information on various stock trades and other relevant financial data.
13.2.9.17 Travel Explorer
Graphic
Graphic
Travel Explorer takes the user thrillophilia app and it helps the user to find near by hotels, famous location etc.,
13.2.9.18 User Profile (If equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
It is a personalized profile and user can choose this option to control climate setting, preferred audio source, audio settings, application drawer, link profile to key fob, Lock my Profile etc.
User Profile
Graphic
In the given screen user have two Profile and one guest profile.
Configure Active Profile
Graphic
User can adapt person specific settings for First, Second and Guest Profiles.
Name
Graphic
User can create a distinct identity to the profile by providing a unique name.
Climate
Graphic
User can assign the comfortable climate settings according to his/her need.
Audio Source
Graphic
User can choose the preferred audio source for the profile. When preferred audio source is not available, default audio source will be played.
Audio Settings
Graphic
User can be able to assign the favorite audio settings to the profile.
Screen Saver
Graphic
By using screen saver option, user can select the photos from gallery & make it Screen Saver.
By selecting automatic screen saver, screens can be updated automatically by M&M
Application Drawer
Graphic
In Application Drawer user can fix the apps according to the profile usage
Link Profile To Key Fob
Graphic
User can link the profile with the key fob. By using this setting, once user enter the vehicle with the desired key fob, then all the saved settings will updated automatically.
Lock My Profile
Graphic
If lock settings is enabled by the user, then other user can’t change the saved details. Also, other user can't see the saved user specific settings on infotainment screen.
13.2.9.19 Accuweather
User can check weather condition by using Accuweather application
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.9.20 Zomato
By using Zomato app, user can order food from near by restaurants.
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.10 Settings
Some settings, which are needed frequently are provided up-front as Quick Settings on Infotainment Screen.
Quick Settings
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.11 ICC (Intelli Command Center) Rotary (If equipped)
ICC Rotary have two functions in it
Graphic
Browse : Using ICC knob user can rotate clockwise or Anti clockwise direction to choose the option and press ICC button to select the option
Graphic
Volume: Using ICC Knob user can rotate the ICC knob in clockwise or Anti clockwise direction to increase or decrease the volume
13.2.12 Touch Sound
Graphic
Enabling the Touch Sound will give the Touch sound, whenever user selects particular icon or app
13.2.13 Clock in System Off
Graphic
In Home Screen, user can turn ON or turn OFF the Clock by using this option.
13.2.14 Reset Home Layout
Graphic
Home screen will revert to its default layout whenever user selects this option.
All Setting
Graphic
List of details available in All Settings
1. General
4. Audio
7. Vehicle
2. Display
5. Alexa
8. User Input & Feedbacks
3. Date & Time
6. Phone
9. Wifi
13.2.15 General
User can find below details in General settings:
Units
Graphic
User can select UK (Metric) and US (Imperial) to calculate the units (i.e., Km)
Factory Reset
Graphic
If user selects 'Confirm', All settings will be restored to default factory settings
Graphic
Software Update
If Auto Download option is enabled and any update is available, then software update will happen automatically.
13.2.16 Display Settings
List of features available in settings
Graphic
Brightness
User can increase or decrease the brightness of Infotainment and Instrument Cluster.
Power and Sleep
Graphic
•  If power OFF is enabled in infotainment screen, then the clock will be displayed in Infotainment screen whenever Infotainment system gets off.
•  If the infotainment display is inactive for more than 60 seconds, then screen saver option enabled automatically if the user turn on the option in infotainment
•  User can manually select the screen saver photos from My Drive Photos
Clock Type
Graphic
User can select the digital or analog clock as per his/her choice.
This will be reflected in home screen when infotainment system goes OFF.
Home Layout
Graphic
In Home Layout, user can have the screen view as per his choice.
If another user wants to set the original settings, then the user can select reset option
.
13.2.17 Date & Time
User can set the Date & Time by using this option.
Graphic
Graphic
Sync to GPS:
Graphic
Date and Time can be sync with GPS, it can be manually enabled or disabled by user
Time Zone
Graphic
By using this option user can manually fix the different time zones
Set Date
Graphic
User can set and fix the Date format either in DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY format.
Set Time
Graphic
User can set and fix the Time format either in 12 Hour or 24 Hour.
13.2.18 Audio Settings
Using Audio Settings, user can change the sound effects in different positions.
3D Sound
Graphic
Graphic
Immersive 3D Mode (If equipped)
Fully deep, wide and the gaze height sound stage for comfortable music listening while driving
Graphic
One big sound stage, with immersive feeling just like watching artist performance at premium position
Immersive sound mode provides an experience to the listener to understand the sound and music coming from speakers, which will come from an multiple points.
Stage Mode (If equipped)
Graphic
Higher and Wider sound stage just like watching the musician's performance at the first-row seat
One big sound stage for all occupants
Party Mode
Graphic
Just like Disco Club, music will come from multi direction without sound stage (music will come from particular distance) NO sound image localization (user can feel the special instruments like guitar, keyboard, etc.,)
Breezy Mode (If equipped)
Graphic
In Breezy Mode, all the passengers in vehicle can enjoy the music performance stage close to their seat row.
3D OFF (If equipped)
Graphic
User can hear the normal sound just like normal speakers and Sound Field Size option gets disabled when user select the 3D OFF option
Sound Field Position (If equipped)
Graphic
User can adjust the sound according to his preferences and button center is given to get the sound balance from back to center
Sound Field Size (If equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
This setting will provide the ambience of theatre (Large), stage (Mid) or personal music room (Small) by selecting the sound level.
User cannot access Sound Field Size option when 3D OFF option is in OFF condition.
Equalizer (If equipped)
Graphic
Equalizer is provided to change BMT (Bass, Mid, Treble) settings according to preferences. Additionally,  subwoofer is provided to have more Bass
Digital Sound Enhancement Engine (If equipped)
Graphic
DSEE is a new settings which will enhance the quality of old recorded songs to DVD quality.
Compressed or low-quality music removed during the compression process (CD to MP3 format) can be restored into high range sound by using this technology.
Speed Dependent Volume Control (If equipped)
Graphic
Speed Dependent Volume Control will automatically adjust the loudness and quality of the music according to speed of the vehicle by removing the road noise.
Volume Settings
Graphic
User can increase or decrease the volume for the Voice recognition (Alexa & Google Assistance), Notification, Phones, Media
Default Audio Settings
By enabling the below settings, the Audio settings will be restored to the default settings
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.19 Alexa (if equipped)
Select Alexa App in general settings
On boarding will start with information about what is possible through Alexa
Alexa sign in screen will appear in infotainment as per below screens.
Graphic
Graphic
After that, system will generate a 6-character Authentication Code.
In your mobile/lap/tab open google chrome and sign in your amazon account or create a new login credentials using the link: /https://www.amazon.com.code
Graphic
Enter the 6-digit code that you receive from the XUV700 infotainment screen
After registering the correct code, your mobile/lap/tab will appear the above screen
Once account is activated, user will see the guide Screen. Press done to complete login activities.
Things to Try
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
In Things to Try option user can find following
Getting Started, Talents, Entertainment, Weather, communication, Smart Home, news and information, Navigation, Traffic information, Skills, List, Shopping, Question and Answers, Sports, Calendar, Movies and Show times
Contact List
Graphic
To make calls through Alexa, phone need to be paired and then contacts shall be uploaded to Alexa cloud when device is enabled.
Hands Free Listening
Graphic
Alexa can be invoked by either pressing PTT (Push to Talk) button in SWC (Steering Wheel Control) or simply saying “Alexa”. To invoke Alexa through voice, setting need to be enabled.
Notification
Graphic
On any screen, whenever any notification comes, yellow dot will appear on Alexa icon
Request Sound
Graphic
Before you begin any request to Alexa, particular sound to Alexa device is customized before and after your request.
If enabled, device will play a sound before you begin or end your request.
Sign Out
Graphic
In case if you don’t want to use Alexa, you can sign out any time in settings
13.2.20 Phone
By using Phone option, user can enable Bluetooth settings in vehicle, check available devices, add device, pair device using BT, fix the ringtone and can alter SMS settings.
Graphic
Graphic
Bluetooth
Graphic
User enable or disable Bluetooth connection according to his/her need
Device List
Graphic
User can view the list of devices, already connected to vehicle infotainment
Add Devices
Graphic
By using this option, user can find the nearby devices.
Bluetooth Discoverability
Graphic
When BT Discoverability option is pressed, vehicle's Bluetooth device will be shown to nearby devices for 90 seconds.
Once any mobile device is connected, Bluetooth functionalities are available.
Ring Tone
Graphic
User can fix the ringtones for incoming calls
SMS Settings
Enable Sms Signature:
Graphic
User can pre-define a small text that will appear as a signature at the bottom of every text message.
Whenever new message is getting composed or reply is getting sent, signature texts will appear automatically.
Configure Sms Signature:
Graphic
User can add a text in bottom that this message is send from my car.
Enable Sms Alert:
Graphic
Incoming SMS can be seen by enabling this option in vehicle
Configure Auto Reply Options:
Graphic
While driving, user can fix a message, I’m in driving or I’ll call you back.
Sms Readout:
Graphic
When user's phone is connected with ALEXA & all the contacts are synced with paired Alexa device, then SMS Readout option is enabled and Alexa can read the SMS.
13.2.21 Vehicle Settings (If equipped)
User can find the below option by selecting the Vehicle settings option
Graphic
Graphic
Access
Graphic
User can see following features on XUV700 by using access option
Selection Unlock
Graphic
While activating this option only the driver door can be unlocked
Easy Entry & Easy Exit
Graphic
 Driver seat can be adjusted automatically during entry & exit
Service Mode
Graphic
 By enabling this all the remote functions in XUV700 will get deactivated
Lights & Illumination
Graphic
Daytime Running Lamp:
By enabling this option DRL will be activated automatically for better visibility
13.2.22 User Input & Feedback (If equipped)
User can find the below options by using User Input & Feedback
Graphic
Graphic
ICC Rotary Knob
Graphic
By using ICC Rotary Knob, user can select two functions :
Volume: By enabling this, user can adjust the volume by rotating the ICC Knob
Browse:
1. By enabling this, user can shift the app by rotating the knob either in clockwise or in Anti-clockwise direction
2. User can select the desired app by pressing the ICC knob
Screen Touch Feedback
Graphic
Button Touch Sound: By enabling this user can hear the touch sound while selecting any application
Voice Alerts
Graphic
Voice Alerts: By enabling this, user can give voice commands through Alexa (Alexa: Open Skyroof, Alexa: Close Skyroof, etc...)
13.2.23 Wifi
Graphic
User can connect the mobile with vehicle Wi-fi
Graphic
Graphic
By using Wi-fi device option, user can know the name of vehicle Wi-Fi and can change the password of the Wi-fi.
13.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
1. How to connect phone via Bluetooth in Infotainment?
User can connect Bluetooth using any of the below methods, in Bluetooth settings.
Add device: Kindly ensure, Mobile device should be in bluetooth settings screen to accept the connection
Bluetooth discoverability: Kindly ensure, Mobile device start scan after discoverability is turned On
2. My contacts are taking time to load in IVI?
Based on the Mobile device and number of contacts, loading time may vary from few seconds to few minutes
3. Bluetooth Music is not playing in Infotainment?
After connecting mobile device to bluetooth, user need to select his device for media in device list and then select bluetooth music source in Infotainment to Play music.
4. Few Phone Contacts are not visible in Infotainment Screen?
Ensure that your phone book contacts do not have special characters before their name. If there are such contacts, please rename them.
5. I can’t Accept or decline Whatsapp call from IVI?
IVI will support bluetooth phone voice call and supportability of Whatsapp, MS Team call depends on the controls provided by Mobile device/app to Infotainment
6. During active call, I’m getting Navigation Prompts?
During call, Navigation prompts will still come so user don’t miss any direction. User can adjust the volume of navigation prompts as required
7. Next /Previous, fast forward/rewind etc. controls not working for Bluetooth music?
The availability of the features/control is dependent on the Bluetooth version of phone device and music application used in phone.
8. While playing USB song album art not displaying?
Album art will display in the screen, only if the song has album art information
9. While playing songs from USB, few files are getting skipped?
If the Infotainment system comes across a corrupt music track in media source, the system might skip to next music track in the media source.
10. Date & Time in my Infotainment is Incorrect?
User can Sync to GPS or manually set Date & time in settings. After selecting Sync to GPS, need to drive vehicle few Kms in open sky to ensure proper date and time based on the time zone selected.
11. Sources are disabled in QAD?
Source will be active only when device is connected e.g., for USB, Pendrive should be connected.
12. Can I reduce the Navigation Volume?
Yes, user can adjust Navigation or other source volume, in Audio Settings.
13. Not able to control Volume using ICC?
User need to select Volume instead of Browse in ICC rotary Quick settings.
14. Alexa not responding to my query?
Few of the Alexa In car control commands might not work based on the vehicle variant (AC, Window, Sunroof & etc.,).
Also Alexa might not hear your query, in case background music or noise is High.
15. How to connect Alexa?
Step 1: Click on the settings button in Infotainment Home Screen
Step 2: Click and open Alexa icon
Step 3:Click on the “Get started” button to get the code
Step 4:Provide sometime to system to fetch code from internet.
Step 5: Infotainment will display code to activate.
Step 6 & 7: Open mobile browser and Go to url : www.amazon.com/code and login to your amazon account(If new user please create amazon account). Enter the code seen in the screen in the box provided and click on continue button.
Graphic
Graphic
Step 8:Once login is successfully user will see screen with “Done” button. Press “Done” to complete.
16. What all vehicle related commands I can use for Alexa?
Following are vehicle specific commands that user can use based on the vehicle variant
In car controls (Works only inside the car with or without internet connection)
1. Increase Volume – Alexa increase volume
2. Decrease Volume - Alexa, Decrease Volume
3. Mute - Alexa, mute
4. Unmute - Alexa, unmute
5. Increase Brightness - Alexa, Increase Brightness
6. Decrease Brightness -Alexa, Decrease Brightness
7. Maximum Brightness - Alexa, Maximum Brightness
8. Minimum Brightness - Alexa, Minimum Brightness
9. Bluetooth Audio- Alexa, play from BT audio
10. FM-Alexa, play FM Radio
11. AM-Alexa, play AM Radio
12. USB-Alexa, play from USB
13. Play Media – Alexa, resume music
14. Pause Media -Alexa, Pause song
15. Next Song -Alexa, Next Song
16. Previous Song -Alexa, Previous Song
17. Tune to FM/AM Station / Favourite -Alexa, tune to 93.5
18. Exit navigation/Route -Alexa, Exit navigation
19. Open Sunroof -Alexa, Open Sunroof
20. Close Sunroof -Alexa, Close Sunroof
21. Open Windows - (will open only driver seat window)
22. Close Windows (will close only driver seat window)
23. AC ON -Alexa, turn ON AC
24. AC OFF -Alexa, Turn OFF AC
25. Reduce Fan Speed - Alexa, Reduce Fan Speed
26. Increase Fan Speed - Alexa, Increase Fan Speed
27. Maximum Fan Speed - Alexa set fan speed maximum
28. Minimum Fan Speed - Alexa set fan speed minimum
29. Increase Temperature - Alexa, Increase Temperature
30. Decrease Temperature - Alexa, Decrease Temperature
31. Increase Temperature by X degrees - Alexa, Increase Temperature by 5 degrees
32. Decrease Temperature by X Degrees - Alexa, Decrease Temperature by 5 Degrees
33. Set Temperature to specific value - Alexa, Set Temperature to <specific value>
17. What are all different Online commands categories Alexa Support?
Following are the Online command categories for Alexa (Works only with internet connection inside the car)
1. Search for location - Alexa, Search for location <location name>
2. Search for POI - Restaurants - Alexa, search nearby restaurants/ coffee shop
3. Search for POI - Fuel Stations - Alexa, nearby Fuel Stations
4. Search for POI - ATM - Alexa, nearby ATM
5. Search for POI - Rest Area - Alexa, near by rest area
6. Search for POI - Hospital - Alexa, nearby hospital
7. Navigate to the location - Alexa, Navigate to the <location name>
8. General Information Enquiry - Alexa, tell me about Chennai/ tell me about Sachin Tendulkar
9. Weather updates - Alexa, how is the weather today
10. Online content streaming - Alexa, tell me a story
11. Online music from Specific MSP - Alexa, play music/ Bollywood songs
12. News Updates - Alexa, news update/ today's news
13. Alexa Home Control - Alexa, turn on hallway light (make sure account has smart home device like bulb etc. are synced)
14. Alarm, Timer, Reminders - Alexa, reminder to pick up dad tomorrow at 10 AM/ Set alarm for 6 AM tomorrow
15. To do list, Shopping list - Alexa, add pen to shopping list
18. How to use Mahindra Alexa custom skills for XUV700 ?
Prerequisite –
•  User needs to have the Alexa app installed in their phone.
•  User needs to have the AdrenoX Connect app installed & registered in their phone.
Step 1:
•  Log in to the AdrenoX Connect App
•  Press the hamburger menu on top right corner to open the menu tray
•  Open ‘Settings’
Graphic
Step 2:
Click on ‘In-Home Alexa’ under the Settings menu
Graphic
Step 3:
•  Click on ‘Continue’
•  This will redirect to the Amazon Alexa app
Graphic
Step 4:
•  User needs to link their Amazon Account with the AdrenoX Connect App
•  Click on the ‘Link’ button
Graphic
Step 5:
•  Once linked, open the AdrenoX Connect app through the pop-screen as shown
Graphic
Step 6:
•  Account linked successfully will be displayed
Graphic
Step 7:
Graphic
•  Now open the Amazon Alexa app to grant permissions for the Mahindra Skills
•  Click on ‘More’ Button to open the menu tray in Amazon Alexa app
•  Open ‘Skills & Games’ option
Step 8:
•  Go to ‘Your Skills’ section
•  Click on ‘Mahindra’ Skill
Graphic
Step 9:
•  Click on ‘Settings’.
Graphic
Step 10:
Click on ‘Manage account permissions’
Graphic
Step 11:
•  Check or tick all the boxes to provide/grant permission to access the respective fields
•  Click on ‘SAVE PERMISSIONS’
Graphic
Step 12:
Once permissions are granted the following screen will be displayed.
Graphic
Step 13:
Once this is done, user can experience or use the Remote Commands through Alexa enabled devices
19. How to navigate in Owner’s Manual App?
User can go to required page, by typing the page number based on the Table of Contents in the header bar and then press Done as shown below.
Graphic
 
 
Graphic
Graphic
20. Whether ICC Switch control will work on Documents?
User are advised to use touch for Document reading. ICC control will not work on Documents and Apps like Owner’s Manual.
Setting Prepared Music Streaming Services for Playing Music through Alexa
Step 1:
•  Log in to the Amazon Alexa App using the same Amazon ID which was previously used to activate Alexa in the infotainment (Refer SI-00789 for details)
•  Click on the ‘More’ button at the bottom of the screen
Graphic
Step 2:
Click on ‘Settings’ option to access the app settings
Step 3:
•  Under the settings page, click on ‘Music & Podcasts’ under the ALEXA PREFERNECES to change the default services
Step 4:
•  Amazon Music would be preselected as Default Services
•  Click on the ‘Default Services’ option
In case music streaming services ‘Gaana’, ‘Hungama Music’, ‘Spotify’ etc. are not listed under SERVICES user needs to first link these services to the Amazon Alexa.
A. Link Alexa to Apple Music, Apple Podcast, Spotify or JioSaavn - Click on the add icon alongside the ‘Link New Service’ to Link Alexa to these music services
B. Link Alexa to Gaana or Hungama Music – Enable Gaana & Hungama Music skills from the ‘Skills and Games’ section of the Alexa app first.
Step 5:
•  Under MUSIC, click on ‘Change’ button to change the default services from Amazon music to user’s preferred choice
Step 6:
•  Select the preferred music services from the list to set as default for Alexa
Once the default music services are selected, Alexa will use this to play music whenever user gives the request as “Alexa, play music” across the ecosystem including the XUV700’s infotainment.
13.4 Appendix
Abbreviations
Acronym
Description
BT
Blue tooth
SWC
Steering Wheel control
ICC
Intelli Command Control
IVI
In Vehicle Infotainment